Home

Wholehog III - Main Light Industries

image

Contents

1. Flying Pig Systems 127 Reference 14 2 5 128 Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures If cloning will overwrite patch information in the destination you will be asked for confirmation The console will only unpatch previous fixtures that are in the way of new ones the rest of the destination universe will be untouched Tip You can also move patching from one universe to another by cloning the patch to the new universe and then unpatching the old universe see Un patching Fixtures p 128 Unpatching Fixtures You can unpatch a fixture in order to repatch it with a different start address or to stop DMX output being sent to it Unpatching does not erase any programming for the fixture in groups palettes cues and so on There are two ways to unpatch Unpatching by fixture removes all patching information for that fixture even if it has been patched to several start addresses or has multiple patch points Unpatching by start address only unpatches a specific start address leaving other start addresses associated with the fixture intact Unpatching by Fixture To unpatch all patch information associated with a fixture 1 Setup Patch open the Fixture window 2 Select the fixture by clicking on it then press Unpatch at the top of the Fixture window This unpatches the fixture but leaves all programming for the fixture intact 3 Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send th
2. The Wholehog III console allows you to record a cue between other cues without des troying existing tracking values To do this record the inserted cue without tracking forwards by deselecting the Forward button on the Record Options Toolbar that appears after pressing the Record key For example 1 Press the Record key 2 Deselect Forward on the Record Options Toolbar 3 Cue 2 5 Enter insert Cue 2 5 into the cuelist on the currently chosen master This is sometimes refered to as recording cue only as the changes only affect the recor ded cue and do not track into subsequent cues Note that you can only turn tracking forwards off when you insert a new cue into a cuelist or when you merge values into a cue not when adding new cues to the end of a cuelist Stopping Changes from Tracking Forward when Deleting a Cue When you delete a cue this can have unexpected consequences on later cues in the cuelist if the deleted cue contained parameter values that tracked through to contribute to the state of the later cues For example you have the following cues Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 2 100 80 60 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 40 If you now delete Cue 2 Fixture 1 will track from Cue 1 through Cues 3 and 4 at 30 rather than going to the expected 100 in Cues 3 and 4 Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 40 You can prevent this happening by deleting the cue cue only which adds a
3. 22 5 Scene Timing Scene timing controls the fade in and delay of a scene when it is run on a master see Scene Playback p 265 You assign and edit scene timings in the same way as for cues see Working with Fade Timings p 206 You can assign scene timing in the Programmer before recording the scene or later in the scene editor You can also assign the fade time of a scene from the command line For example to give Scene 1 a fade time of 6 seconds e Scene 1 Time 6 Enter You can also record fade times with a mask For example e Scene 1 Fixture 1 2 Colour Time 4 Enter sets the fade time for the colour parameter values of fixtures 1 and 2 in Scene 1 22 6 228 Insert Merge and Replace When recording copying or moving a scene if the destination location already has a scene recorded in it you will be prompted with record options of Insert Merge or Re place e Insert creates a new destination scene The new scene will be assigned a free location just before the one chosen using a point number if neces sary e Merge Incorporates the new information into the destination scene If the same fixture parameters are in both scenes the new values will re place the old e Replace Overwrites the scene information in that destination If you are copying a scene all three options are available If you are moving a scene only the Insert option is available Tip If you know that you are about to record co
4. Cu Palettes D Palettes REH Palettes HT Palettes Palettes o Cuelists TC Cuelists rT Pages D Pages Shows the parameter types recorded in the palette intensity P position C colour B beam E effect T time See Recording with Specified Masking p 174 The palette is a direct palette See Direct Palettes p 177 The palette contains references to other palettes See Reference Palettes p 176 The palette is the Highlight Palette See Customising Highlight p 184 The palette is the Lowlight Palette See Customising Highlight p 184 The cuelist is a chase See Using a Cuelist as a Chase p 262 The cuelist has timecode active See Working with Audio MIDI and Timecode p 291 The page is the template page See The Template Page p 284 The page has a Restore Activity macro defined See Restoring Activity When Changing Pages p 280 You can rename the selected button with the red border by pressing the Set key You can also hold Set and press any button to rename it At the top of the window there are four buttons common to all directories BE Switches to a spreadsheet view allowing you to edit attributes of the items in the directory such as their names See Working with Soreadsheets 0 90 and Figure 13 10 A Typical Directory in Spreadsheet View amp Reports This allows you to print the contents of the window Configure This allows you to control various
5. a_i On Override 7A Release On Other Go Alternatively you can turn on Release on Other Go for all new scenes in the Scene pane of the Preferences window e Setup gt Preferences Scene 25 2 268 Running Multiple Scenes Because the Wholehog III can simultaneously run ten scenes or cuelists on masters and more if virtual masters and playback wings are used the question arises as to which master actually has control over a particular fixture parameter To decide which master takes precedence the Wholehog III applies the following rules e Forintensity parameters by default intensity parameters are controlled on a Latest Takes Precedence LTP basis therefore the value of an in tensity parameter that appears in several scenes will be output from the scene with the highest playback priority see Changing a Scene s Priority p 270 In addition you can assign scene options so that a master works on a Highest Takes Precedence HTP basis this means that if several masters have programming for the same intensity parameter the highest programmed level will be output to stage For a full discussion of HTP and LTP see HTP and LTP p 9 e For position colour and beam parameters the Wholehog II deals with position colour and beam parameters on a Latest Takes Precedence LTP basis If several masters have programming for the same parameter Flying Pig Systems Section 25 Scene Playback Reference 25 2 1 25
6. W Fixture Window To change the User Number 1 Open Fixture 2 Select the fixture s Num cell short for User Number 3 Set new number Enter To change several User Numbers at once 1 Open Fixture 2 Select a range of User Number cells by pressing or clicking and then dragging Flying Pig Systems Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures Reference 3 Set new number Enter allocates a range of User Numbers starting with the number that you enter Tip You can renumber the fixtures in your show so that each one has a unique number irrespective of its type By doing this you never have to specify the type when selecting fixtures which can speed up programming See Select ing Fixtures p 138 Notes Notes can be used to attach a comment to a fixture such as its location or intended use To add a note 1 Open Fixture 2 Select the fixture s Note cell 3 Set text of note Enter Type in the note text Tip Fixture notes can be displayed in editors such as the Programmer but this is turned off by default To display notes right click on any column header in the editor and select Note Patch Notes Patch Notes can be used to attach a comment to a fixture regarding its patching To add a Patch Note 1 Open Fixture 2 Select the fixture s Patch Note cell 3 Set text of note Enter Type in the note text Inverting and Swapping Pan and Tilt Axes Depending on a fixtu
7. 2 Record Scene the Scene Directory window opens 3 Select the destination location in the Scene Directory window 4 Alternatively enter a number on the keypad and press Enter Flying Pig Systems 225 Reference Section 22 Working with Scenes 22 1 2 Recording to a Physical Master You can record a scene directly to a physical master The Wholehog III will automatically put it in the next available location in the Scene Directory 1 Create the look for the scene in the Programmer or editor 2 Record Scene 3 Press the Choose key above the desired physical master 22 13 Naming a Scene You can give a scene a name that will be displayed in the Scene Directory window 1 Open Scene open the Scene Directory 2 Check that the Guard button is selected so that you don t accidentally activate a scene when pressing its button in the directory 3 Select the scene 4 Set name Enter type in the name Tip To name a scene immediately after recording it pressing the Set key will open a Quickname window Enter the scene name and select OK 22 2 Deleting Scenes To delete a scene 1 Scene 1 Delete 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirmation by going to Setup Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items You can d
8. A group of cues that run in a specific order consecutively or even simultaneously These may be automatically linked to form a chase or manually triggered A cuelist is run from a master The value for a setting that the Wholehog III uses if you don t give it a value For example there is a default fade time used when you record a cue without specifying a fade time You can specify the defaults to be used in many cases A parameter value which has not been adjusted by the user This value is assigned by the fixture s Library and may not always be zero For example the default value of Shutter Open Strobe Off may be 100 See Also touched value tracking The time the console waits before starting a cue s crossfade See Also wait time crossfade path See console Single conventional lights that only have intensity control via a dimmer are defined as desk channels by the Wholehog III By contrast automated lights are referred to as fixtures See Also fixture An user defined arrangement of windows that can be accessed with a single button press from the View Toolbar Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is a way for a computer to ask a master computer on a network to assign it an IP address when it connects Many existing networks are configured this way and the Wholehog III supports this system You should talk to the administrator of the network you want to connect to to find out more See Also Ethernet IP address
9. Figure 28 1 The Sound panel of the Control Panel In the Sound panel you can set a volume level pan between left and right and mute each on the console s inputs and outputs e Wave console sounds such as beeps e CD the built in CD drive Line In the 3 5mm stereo mini jack line input on the console s rear panel Flying Pig Systems 291 Reference 28 1 1 292 Section 28 Working with Audio MIDI and Timecode e Line Out the 3 5mm stereo mini jack line output on the console s rear panel Speakers the console s built in speakers All inputs are sent to all outputs subject to the levels assigned in the Control Panel Playing Sound from the CD ROM Drive You can control sound playback from the console s built in CD ROM drive using the on screen controls located on the CD Control Toolbar see Figure 28 2 The CD Control Toolbar UB ee Figure 28 2 The CD Control Toolbar To open the CD Control Toolbar e Open CD Tools the CD Tools button appears on the toolbar at the bottom of the right hand screen when you press the Open key The CD Control Toolbar displays track time information and has controls for e Play e Pause e Stop e Skip Backwards Skip Forwards e A drop down list of tracks e Playing Paused the current time on the track e Remain the time remaining on the track e Track the total time of the track e A slider that represents the current location within th
10. Interchangeable Fixtures You can replace a fixture already programmed into a show by one of a different type and the Wholehog III will as far as possible convert the programmed data to apply to the new fixture type If the new fixture has more limited capabilities than the old one this is handled as gracefully as possible For more on replacing fixtures see Changing the Fixture Type p 119 3 6 14 Colour Matching Fixtures of different types use different methods to perform colour mixing Sending the same parameter values to fixtures of different types might produce a different colour on each type For example sending C 50 M 50 Y 0 will always produce a shade of blue but it ll be a different blue with different fixture types Usually you have to compensate for this yourself by manually creating colour palettes by eye to produce similar colours on all fixture types This is a time consuming process and later restricts you to using the palettes you have already set up The Wholehog III s colour matching system provides a new way to choose colours without these problems Flying Pig Systems Section 3 Wholehog II Users Introduction 3 6 1 Colour Models Traditionally colour mixing fixtures use the CMY Cyan Magenta Yellow system to uniquely define each colour they can produce With the increasing popularity of LED fixtures the RGB Red Green Blue system is also becoming more common These two systems are c
11. Or using the command line e Record Position 2 Enter If you leave out the palette location e Record Position Enter The palette will be recorded in the next available location Tip You can name your palette by pressing Set directly after recording or later pressing Set together with the palette you wish to name in the palette direct ory To use a palette select it from its directory window The palette will directly affect the currently selected fixtures as long as the palette contains parameter information for the selected fixtures A palette that puts all Studio Colors in the rig to deep red will therefore apply this immediately to any Studio Colors that are in the current selection For example 1 Open Colour open the Colour Directory window 2 Studio Color 575 3 Thru 5 select the fixtures 3 Palette 2 select the palette from the Colour Directory window Find Out More For more information see the Reference p 61 section of the manual For The Programmer See Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters p 137 For Editors See Working with Editors p 98 Flying Pig Systems Section 8 Programming Fixtures Tutorial For Selecting Fixtures See Selecting Fixtures p 138 For Groups See Working with Groups p 161 For Setting parameters See Modifying Parameters p 142 For Palettes See Working with Palettes p 167 For Fanning See Fanning p 154 Flying Pig Systems 49
12. Skip back Enters the Goto command into the command line so that you can enter a cue number and press Enter to go to that cue on the chosen master Enter a cue number to go to in the Target Cue cell Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own fade time overriding the cue s time Go instantly to the next cue on the chosen master Go instantly to the previous cue on the chosen master Flying Pig Systems Section 28 Working with Audio MIDI and Timecode The Wholehog III console allows you to input and output audio signals including playing audio from the built in CD drive You can also trigger cues from MIDI Show Control MSC and send MSC data out and you can bring timecode into the console and trigger cues from it and output it at another point on the network The Wholehog III supports MIDI timecode Linear Timecode LTC and Video Timecode VITC 28 1 Working with Sound The Wholehog III supports several sound inputs and outputs all controlled from the Sound panel of the Control Panel see Figure 28 1 The Sound panel of the Control Panel To open the Control Panel e Setup gt Control Panel iix Sound Cd Displays Wave CD Line In Line Out Speakers Sound gt gt ea Keyboard Wings Time and Date B Auto Launch oh Network i System Info a ae aT Zor oa C 4 C A yN z S amp z 3 v F amp k z S Cy N z v Ome Gg Reports
13. When you press the Fixture key the Fixture Types Toolbar will appear with all the fixture types in the show for you to select from Studio Color in the example above See Fig ure 8 3 The Fixture Types Toolbar Desk Studio Studio Technobeam Channel Color 575 Spot 575 Iris Figure 8 3 The Fixture Types Toolbar Alternatively you can cycle through the fixture types by repeatedly pressing the Fixture key The Programmer will remember the last fixture type that you selected which means you only need to press Fixture and choose a type when you wish to use a different fixture type So e 2 Enter selects Studio Color 575 2 within the Programmer With User Numbers If you have assigned your user numbers as a non repetitive single sequence simply type the fixture s user number irrespective of type e 1 Enter selects Studio Color 1 within the Programmer e 21 Enter selects Technobeam 1 within the Programmer Selecting Multiple Fixtures First clear the previous selection by pressing the Clear key You can select more than one fixture using the and Thru keys e Fixture 1 5 Enter selects Fixtures 1 and 5 e Fixture 1 Thru 5 Enter selects Fixtures 1 through 5 e Fixture 1 Thru 5 3 Enter selects Fixtures 1 through 5 except 3 You can also select more than one fixture type at once If you haven t assigned unique user numbers you will need to specify the fixture type e Fixture Studio Color 575
14. with effect palettes 238 with groups 164 with palettes 178 with scenes 228 recording CD ROMs 110 cuelists 222 cues 191 removing parameter values 193 with a delay time 207 with a fade time 206 with selected fixtures only 193 with state 201 desktop views 88 direct palettes 177 effect palettes 238 effects 233 groups 161 link cues 218 pages 277 palettes 168 parameter timings 210 scenes 225 reference palettes 176 Release scene 267 Release All 278 release cue 245 Release key 244 Release on Other Go 246 scene 268 Release Time 245 scene 267 releasing parameters 135 Rem Dim button 144 Remember Fader Values 278 Remove playback wings 80 renaming shows 107 renumbering cuelists 195 Reorder button 141 repeat with fanning 157 Replace button with cuelists 224 with cues 192 with groups 164 with palettes 178 with scenes 228 387 replacing faders 352 touch screens 351 Trackball 353 replicating fixtures 118 reselecting fixtures 141 restarting 106 processes 347 Restore Activity 280 Reverse button 141 RGB 15 RGB colour 147 router see switch S safety information 359 saturation 15 Saturation 147 scene masters 12 release 267 Scene Directory 94 scene master copy 265 move 265 scene rate overriding during scene playback 275 scenes 225 configuring playback controls 287 copying 227 copying to pages 281 deleting 226 editing contents 227 movin
15. zip drive zones Flying Pig Systems See in time Universal Serial Bus a means of connecting computer peripherals such as keyboards and mice The Wholehog III also uses USB to connect expansion wings See Also playback wing A form of timecode that is embedded in a video signal See Also timecode A means of running a cuelist without having it attached to a physical maser on the console See Also cuelist master A real time computer rendering package that allows the Program mer to create their lighting virtually before getting to the venue See Also wysiwig The time between the previous cue being triggered and the current one being run automatically Not to be confused with the delay time See Also delay time A definition of white light used by the Wholehog III s colour calib ration system to match the colour of fixtures with different lamp types such as tungsten and arc A device that allows the connection of accessories to the console or PC via USB Such accessories may range from input control panels to DMX outputs See Also universe USB A visualisation package by Cast Lighting that can be used in con junction with the console to pre programme lighting before getting to the venue Zip disks are like a floppy disk but with a much higher capacity They can be used to store back up and transfer show files The Wholehog III has a drive to read and write zip disks Enable the lighting rig or specif
16. 13 8 1 Starting a New Show and Changing the Current Show To change the current show or start a new one log out and log in again 1 Setup gt Quit 2 Select Log Off 3 Inthe Start window either launch a new show or browse to launch an existing one see Starting Up and Shutting Down p 103 13 8 2 Working With Show Files Browsing Files You can browse and organise show files and libraries in the File Browser pane of the Show Manager window see Figure 13 19 The Show Manager Window On the left is a list of the main console folders and the Wholehog III s Zip and CD drives Clicking on one of these will display its contents in the right hand list The browser shows the name description and creation date and time of the file as well as the version number of the library used to create the show in parentheses If the show is marked as modified then the library has been altered through a library merge Moving Copying Deleting and Renaming Shows To move copy or delete shows use the File Browser pane of the Show Manager window To move a show file e Drag and drop files to destinations in the left hand folder list Generally you will find dragging with the mouse or Trackball much easier than using the touchscreen Flying Pig Systems 107 Reference Section 13 Using the Console To copy a show file e Drag and drop files while holding down the Pig key or the Control key on an external keyboard To delete a show fi
17. 14 DP 14 21 __ Fixture No No 1 DP 1 31 __ Fixture No No 1 DP 1 41 Fixture No No 31 2 6 Step 6 Edit Fixture to Define Default Values To define the default values for your new fixture you can edit the defaults for each parameter in the Edit Fixtures window 336 Flying Pig Systems Section 31 The Fixture Builder Appendices Tutorial E Edit Fixtures Sern amp O pam Piue Gobo Strobe Yellow Magenta Cyan Tilt Pan Ines Count Releasal Feature Default Min Max Offset Default Ps 1 Yes Random 0 0 100 0 Default 1 Yes Slots open VLLLLLLLNLLLLLLLALLLL LIINIL 4 Yes Spin Orpm lt JA00rpm 100rpm Orpm Defaut 2 Yes Random 0 0 100 0 Default 2 Yes Slots open G 1 if 2 Yes Spin 0 rpm 1 OO rpm 100 rpm O rpm Default 3 Yes Random 0 0 100 J0 Default 3 Yes Slots open 3 Yes Spin 0 rpm 100 rpm 100 rpm O rpm Default 4 Yes __ Random 0 o Fs 100 0 Default 4 Yes Slots open WY MLLLLLLLMLL 1 oS a Yes Spn Orpm 100 rpm 00rpm Orpm Defaut 5 Yes Random 0 0 100 0 Default 5 Yes Slots open I 5 Yes Spin O rpm 1 100 rpm 100 rpm Orpm Default 1 Ye Random 0 Hz OHz 30 Hz OHz Default 31 2 7 Step 7 Programming Your Custom Fixture When programming with the fixture from the tutorial bear in mind the following Flying Pig Systems Pan and Tilt are 16 bit DMX but appear as a single parameter and use 2 DMX channels each C
18. Alternatively 1 Select the macro cell and press Set 2 Enter the macro command manually using the keyboard 3 Press Enter to finish Note that if you enter an invalid command then the cell will revert to being empty when you press Enter 29 3 Additional Macro Syntax Within a macro command you can specify multiple targets separated with commas e RS6 20 Flying Pig Systems 305 Reference 306 Section 29 Automating the Console Using Macros or a range with a right angle bracket HM2 gt 7 You can have multiple macros executed by one cue by separating them with colons HM1 3 HM2 gt 7 You can also send commands to a specified network device using H Hog to refer to a console D to refer to a DMX Processor and IOP to refer to an MIDI Timecode Processor For example e GM1H2 will Go master 1 on console number 2 e RND3 will reset DMX Processor number 3 Flying Pig Systems Appendices Flying Pig Systems 307 Section 30 Visualiser Connectivity The Wholehog III system is capable of connecting to visualisers directly connected to the Wholehog III network Currently both ESP Vision and WYSIWYG are supported The Wholehog III Connectivity application must be installed on the visualization com puter for this connectivity to function This section describes the basic information needed to install the Wholehog IIT Connectiv ity application on your visualiser computer as well as the configuration of the applica
19. Section 9 Recording Cues and Times 9 1 Building the Look Once you have created the building blocks for your show you can start building cues by mixing selections of groups palettes and individual fixture parameters For example e Technobeams Drums Full Position Drums Colour Blue Enter This sets the Technobeams Drums group to full intensity to the Drums position palette setting and applies the Blue colour palette to them Note that the parts of this command that are shown in brackets are user defined labels in this case group and palette names 9 2 Recording a Cue Now that you have fixtures selected and intensity position colour and beam assigned you can record your first cue For simple programming the console allows you to record cues quickly to one of the playback masters ready for immediate playback e Record Choose press the Choose key for the master of your choice The Choose keys This will create a new cue in a new cuelist on the selected master You can make further states in the Programmer and record new cues in the same way the console will auto matically increment the cue number and store to the chosen cuelist If you wish to start a new cuelist simply choose another master Note that when you record a cue the values remain in the Programmer but the back ground colour changes from blue to grey This indicates that the contents of the Pro grammer are available for recordi
20. The Wholehog III Start window see Figure 6 7 The Start Window gives you the option to Launch New Show as well as launch existing shows or join one currently running over a network Flying Pig Systems Section 6 Setting Up the Console Tutorial Hog3 Start Launch New Show Click here to create a new show Launch New Show Launch Existing Show gt Choose a previous show from the list or browse for a show Launch Existing Show Shons Turoral Show Hog3 Y Browse Connect To Show Connect to an active Network Show if one has been found Press Rescan to search the network again Press Settings to change the console s network settings No Network Show found Rescan Pa Settings Help 2K Quit Figure 6 7 The Start Window For now create and launch a new show following the on screen instructions as the console guides you through the process 1 Select the Launch New Show option The Show Location screen will al low you to name your new show and select a location for the show Show Location Select a file name and location for your new show Look In mm Shows zj Ew J Description J Created Tr Tutorial Show Hog3 Show v4 0 6 30 Novem fa Tutorial Show Hog3 Show v4 0 6 13 March 2 fa Tutorial No Patch Hog3 Show v4 0 6 19 March E PE Tutorial No Patch Tutorial Show with no pate 13 March 2 P Tutorial Patch Fix Tutoria
21. Wholehgg Ill User Manual Version 1 3 8 EN Wholehog III Wholehog lll User Manual Flying Pig Systems by Nick Hunt and Matt Haskins Copyright High End Systems Inc 2002 2005 All Rights Reserved Changes Information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice High End Systems Inc assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual Trademarks High End Systems the Flying Pig Systems logo the Wholehog Wholehog II and Wholehog III logos are re gistered trademarks of High End Systems Inc or High End Systems Europe Ltd Flying Pig Systems Effects Engine and Hog are registered trade marks of Flying Pig Systems All other brand names and product names used in this book are trademarks registered trademarks or trade names of their respective holders FCC Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which ca
22. gt Very carefully slide the whole mechanical assembly out from the other bottom end Very carefully slide the track assembly out from the bottom end Wipe tracks and wipers with a dry clean tissue Do not use solvents Re insert track assembly Very carefully re insert mechanical assembly Os Ree SON Og Fit top end cap and replace and tighten screw 352 Flying Pig Systems Section 36 Servicing Appendices 10 Replace the cleaned fader See Replacing Faders p 352 36 4 Replacing the Trackball Caution Always shut down and disconnect the mains power before removing the front panel To replace the Trackball 1 Remove the front panel See Replacing Faders p 352 steps 1 to 3 2 Lift track ball out of its bezel 3 Unplug the cable assembly from the trackball PCB 4 Reconnect and replace new Trackball Important The only occasion on which the front panel PCB itself needs to be removed is to access the mass storage devices underneath a procedure beyond the scope of this manual Flying Pig Systems 353 Section 37 Technical Specifications 37 1 Wholehog III Console 37 1 1 Input and Output Connections m e Z gt lt gt gt OO a UJ Ns of Dy R5232 VEA 1 V amp A 2 Audio in MIDI Out Figure 37 1 Rear panel of the console From right to left when viewing the console from the back Mains in IEC 320 connector 5A 250V rated cab
23. 1 Setup Shows gt Current Show 2 Press Backup Flying Pig Systems Section 11 Saving and Shutting Down Tutorial 11 2 2 3 Select a location A copy of your show will be saved with _bck appen ded to its file name Auto Backup The console s Auto Backup function will make an automatic backup at specified intervals the default setting is every twenty minutes You can specify a location and name for your back ups as well as specifying how many the console should keep the default being the last three To enable Auto Backup 1 Setup Shows gt Auto Backup open the Auto Backup pane of the Shows window see Figure 11 3 The Show Manager Window 2 Press Enable Auto Backup 3 Browse to desired backup location 4 Select OK to apply and close lolx Current Show Aak m Current Show Using this panel you can control where and how often the server makes a backup of your show You can also specify how many backup copies are kept Each copy is numbered the largest number is the latest Once you start AutoBackup the backup process happens automatically t3 AutoBackup Enable AutoBackup 2 CD Burning Number of copies to keep 3 Maximum 100 Q Fie Browser Time between backups 12 Backup location Shows Browse AutoBackup File Name fA Big Show_bck Selected Name and Location will be replaced by the AutoBackup sequence number c Documents and Settings All Users Docume
24. 1 Fixture Studio Spot 575 2 Enter Or with unique user numbers Flying Pig Systems Section 8 Programming Fixtures Tutorial 8 1 3 e Fixture 1 12 Enter selects Studio Color 575 1 and Studio Spot 575 2 Deselecting and Removing Fixtures from Programmer Once you make a new selection previously selected fixtures will remain in the Program mer and are indicated by changing the text colour to pale blue To make further changes re select them or click on the fixture s number in the Num column of the Programmer window You can clear specific fixtures by knocking them out of the Programmer e Studio Color 1 Thru 10 Knockout You can clear all fixtures in the Programmer by pressing the Clear key Note that knocking out fixtures or clearing the Programmer will clear any parameter values that you have assigned Pressing the Undo key will restore the cleared values however 8 2 Creating and Using Groups Groups are shortcuts for selecting several fixtures at once They can be recalled from the Group Directory see Figure 8 4 The Group Directory that you open by pressing Open Group Whilst the Autopalettes function will create groups such as All Studio Color 575 Odd Technobeam Iris and Even Studio Spot 575 it can be helpful to create show specific ones For the tutorial show you should make groups for e All Technobeams and Studio Spots on Rear Truss e Technobeams 1 3 Keyboards Specials Group e Technobeams
25. 144 which is the current mode 102 tracked value 6 tracking 6 8 151 160 201 backup 295 Cue Only 264 stopping values tracking forwards 199 200 through loops 220 Track Through Loops 264 tracking backwards 198 Trigger Forwards Only 299 389 trigger macro 264 triggers 216 troubleshooting 347 turning off the console see shutting down type of fixtures 129 U Unblock button 202 unblocking 202 undo 84 units real world 13 universe cloning 127 unpatching 128 unpatching 128 by DMX address 128 Update key 99 Auto Update 184 updating fixture types 111 software 343 user interface 5 User Manual reporting problems 350 User Number modifying 130 User Preferences 63 Console 64 69 Edit 143 160 206 Playback Defaults 148 278 V Value button 98 version numbering software 350 video timecode see timecode View by DP 125 View Cue 197 View Toolbar 88 views see desktop views Views Directory 88 94 virtual masters 12 254 272 Vision visualiser software 309 visualiser software using with the Wholehog III 309 390 Index W wait time 205 216 wheel I Wheel 12 Rate Wheel 12 white point 16 148 Wholehog II 11 Wholehog III clean software install 343 reporting problems 349 technical specification 355 updating software 343 Window Control Toolbar 86 windows bringing to the front 86 closing 86 Cuelist 221 directory 94 Edit Fixtures 133 editor 9
26. 294 for tracking backup 295 MIDI Timecode Processor 72 connecting 296 mains power 76 technical specification 356 using 76 using with timecode 295 modifier keys 84 monitor see display mouse 68 move scene master 265 moving cuelists 223 cuelists to pages 282 cues 195 effects 240 groups 164 inhibitive masters to pages 282 pages 283 palettes 171 scenes 227 scenes to pages 282 shows 107 MSC 293 multiple consoles on the network 11 74 DMxX Processors 74 patch points 125 Flying Pig Systems shows on the network 11 75 N naming cuelists 222 cues 193 desktop views 88 effects 238 groups 162 palettes 168 scenes 226 shows 107 slots 135 the show 103 Net number 73 77 Net Number 122 network 72 connecting to an existing 75 sending timecode over 295 status 79 network processor 72 mains power 76 using 76 networking 11 new playback features 12 show 103 new show starting 107 next 67 Next button 197 Next key 140 Next Page key 278 numbering cues 192 see also renumbering O Odd button 140 on screen keyboard 70 Open key 85 ortho mode 67 Output window 259 P pages 9 277 changing 278 clearing 282 copying 283 385 copying cuelists to 281 copying inhibitive masters to 281 copying scenes to 281 creating 277 deleting 283 moving 283 moving cuelists to 282 moving inhibitive masters to 282 moving scenes to 282 removing cuelists f
27. 38 Section 7 Setting Up the Show zini Fixture Replicate Change Edit Fixture Auto View T A Schedule Patch Unpatch Apply Patch Remove Fixtures Type Fixtures Builder Palettes By DP A DP 2000 Fixture 1 1 1 DP 2000 1 426 Fixture 33 1 DP 2000 _ 1 427 Fixture i 34 1 DP 2000 1 428 Fiture 35 1 DP 2000 _ 1 429 Fiture f 36 1 DP 2000 1 430 Fixture I 37 1 DP 2000 11 431_ Fixture 38 1 DP 2000 1 432 Fidure i 39 DP 2000 1 433 Fixture f 40 1 DP 2000 _ 1 434 Fixture I 441 1 DP 2000 1 435 Fixture i 42 1 DP 2000 11 436 Fixture ZZ 7 43 1 DP 2000 1 437 Fixture PZ 44 1 DP 2000 1 438 Fidure fi DP 2000 1 439 Fixture 1 1 OP 2000 Fixture Figure 7 2 The Fixture Window showing patching 1 Setup Patch open the Fixture window 2 Select the fixture s Num cell short for User Number by clicking on it with the trackball or mouse 3 Press Set type in the new number and press Enter To change several User Numbers at once 1 Setup Patch 2 Select a range of Num cells by clicking and dragging 3 Press Set type in the new number and press Enter the fixtures User Numbers will be assigned starting from the number you entered If you wish to use user numbers for the tutorial they should be assigned as follows Fixtures User Numbers Studio Colors 1 10 1 10 Studio Sp
28. CEH RRETTASN VILEFELTHEGA 363 Glossary 1 10 Base T 100 Base T button abstraction layer accessories address attribute automated light beam blocking cue board Flying Pig Systems An older flavour of Ethernet that is slower 10 MBits per second than the 100 Base T used by Wholehog III components If connected to other equipment that only supports this flavour then Wholehog III components will automatically detect this and run their Ether net connections at this slower speed However this is not the re commended way to set up your network See Also 100 Base T A flavour of Ethernet that supports data rates of up to 100 MBits per second All Wholehog III components support this flavour of Ethernet and comply with all relevant standards so networking equipment designed for 100Base T should be compatible with the Wholehog III See Also 10 Base T Means at and can be used for assigning levels or patching via the keypad The Wholehog III separates abstracts the user from the details of how fixtures work For example most values are expressed in real world values such as degrees of rotation rather than DMX values Extensions to the console or network can range from expansion wings to DMX Processors See Also playback wing widget DMX Processor See DMX address See parameter See fixture The distribution and quality of the fixture s beam Such qualities may be chan
29. For example you can use fanning with position suppose that you have seven moving lights on an upstage position all pointing downstage towards the audience You could fan the Pan parameters so that the centre fixture still points downstage and the others turn progressively out to stage left and right Flying Pig Systems Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters Reference The fixture selection order is significant when fanning see The Selection Order p 141 The value change when fanning is always relative to its current value if there is no current value the parameter will fan from its default value Tip Choosing the initial or base value is important when fanning as the parameter values cannot go below 0 or above 100 Make sure that you leave enough of the value range for the value to fan into 15 4 1 Using the Fan Key To fan a parameter 1 1Thru5 30 Enter select the fixtures and assign the intensities to 30 2 Press and hold the Fan key whilst slowly moving the Wheel The fix tures at either end of the range take the values 10 and 50 with those in between evenly spread across the intervening range Type Pan Tilt Studio Color 575 15 4 2 Inthe Programmer Window To fan a parameter 1 Select a range of cells for example the intensity cells of Studio Colors 1to5 2 Set 10 Thru 50 Enter The fixtures at either end of the range take the values 10 and 50 with tho
30. NW of the cue Figure 20 2 Path Types hours h minutes m seconds s hours h minutes m seconds s For example e 2s 2 seconds in and out times e 2s 5s 2 seconds in 5 seconds out Flying Pig Systems 209 Reference Section 20 Working with Cue Timing and Ordering e 1m 1 minute in and out times e 1m10s 1 minute and 10 seconds in and out times e 1h10m30s 1h 1 hour 10 minutes and 30 seconds in time and 1 hour out time Use the H M and S buttons that appear when editing a fade or delay time cell to enter the H M and S text into the cell Alternatively you can use an external keyboard Note that if you enter 140 the time will be 1 minute 40 seconds not 140 seconds 2 minutes 20 seconds To assign paths directly in the Cuelist window 1 Click in the Path cell for the desired cue and press Set 2 Choose a path from the displayed list see Figure 20 3 Selecting a Path in a Cuelist Window The In path is applied when a fixture is increasing in intensity during the crossfade and the Out path when a fixture is decreasing in intensity 3 Press OK In Out Default a Default a Linear Start Start End Over Over Under Under Damped Damped Brake Brake Accelerate cca ll Accelerate OK Cancel Figure 20 3 Selecting a Path in a Cuelist Window The different types of path are explained in Paths p 208 20 2 210 Individual Parameter Timing
31. Note that grouping and buddying are only used during fanning the grouping and buddying information is not recorded into cues and palettes but the resulting parameter values are recorded 15 5 15 5 1 15 5 2 15 5 3 Removing Values As well as assigning values for parameters you will sometimes want to remove para meter values from editors For example e You no longer want to use a particular fixture in a cue scene or palette e You decide to have the colour of several fixtures controlled by a different cuelist on another playback To do this you need to remove colour parameter values so that they don t take over control of the colour parameters under the LTP rule See HTP and LTP p 9 Tip If you want to clear the entire contents of an editor use the Clear key Removing Entire Fixtures from an Editor To remove selected fixtures from an editor known as knocking out press the Knockout button on the Main Toolbar For example e Fixture 1 Thru 5 Knockout removes Fixtures 1 to 5 from the editor e Group 2 Knockout removes all fixtures in Group 2 from the editor Removing Specific Parameter Types from an Editor You can remove specific parameter types from the selected fixtures in an editor e Colour Knockout Select the parameter type and press Knockout Removing Individual Parameters from an Editor You can remove individual parameters from the selected fixtures in an editor e Hold Knockout a
32. The Wholehog III will recognise this as a loop see Figure 20 11 A Cuelist with a Loop W Chosen Master Master Cuelist lol x Follow Follow Insert 5 he Cue Chosen _ Link wait Name Comment Fade Delay Path Cue 2 5s los No Figure 20 11 A Cuelist with a Loop Exiting Loops You can determine when the cuelist stops looping and continues with cues after the loop The options are e Forever the loop will run indefinitely until you press the Go key e Count the cuelist will loop the assigned number of times Assigning a count of zero will make the cuelist ignore the link Timed the cuelist will loop until the assigned time period has elapsed Timecode the cuelist will loop until the assigned frame of timecode is reached To assign the looping behaviour 1 Open Cuelist 1 open the cuelist window 2 Select the link cue s Delay cell and press Set 3 Select an option from the Loops Toolbar Forever Count Timed Tinecode 4 If you have selected Count Timed or Timecode enter a count time or timcode frame value Note that you may see a Special button on the Loops Toolbar this is reserved for future use You can also configure what happens when you press the Go key during a loop see Action of go when Looping p 249 Flying Pig Systems 219 Reference 20 4 3 220 Section 20 Working with Cue Timing and Ordering Tracking Th
33. Time Follow on time Delay in Fade in Wait Delay out Fade out Figure 20 1 Cue timings The Wholehog III allows you to assign timings to each parameter of each fixture ina cue scene or palette Often you will want to assign the same value to every fixture parameter this is described in Working with Fade Timings p 206 Assigning timings for individual parameters is described in Individual Parameter Timings p 210 20 1 20 1 1 206 Working with Fade Timings You can assign fade and delay times and paths to cues You can assign separate fade delay and path values for the cue Cues recorded without assigning any time information will be given the default time this can be adjusted in the Default Timing pane of the User Preferences window Fade Time To record a cue with a fade time other than the default 1 Create the desired look for the cue in the Programmer 2 Fixture Enter select all the fixtures currently in the Programmer 3 Time 7 Enter assign a fade time of 7 seconds 4 Record Cue 1 Enter record the cue on the currently chosen master To assign times greater than 1 minute enter the number of minutes followed by the number of seconds e Time 140 Enter select a fade time of 1 minute 40 seconds Flying Pig Systems Section 20 Working with Cue Timing and Ordering Reference To change the time of an already recorded cue 1 Cuelist 1 select the cuelist unless the desired cuelist or master i
34. To deselect specific fixtures use the key e Fixture 1 deselects Fixture 1 Alternatively you can deselect a fixture visually in the Programmer or editor window by clicking on its number in the Num column 15 1 7 Reselecting Fixtures You can recall the last sub selection made before deselecting fixtures by pressing Previous on the Select Toolbar 15 2 The Selection Order The order in which you select fixtures is significant in controlling how fanning and effects are applied to them see Fanning p 154 and Working with Effects p 229 For example ap plying a fan or effect after selecting fixtures 1 5 can appear different than if you selected fixtures 1 3 2 4 5 The selection order is relevant during programming and is recorded as part of groups but it is not recorded in palettes cues or scenes Tip Because the console records the selection order as part of groups you can select the group and use the Next and Back keys to subselect each fixture in a particular order By controlling the selection order when you record the group you can then work through a series of fixtures in the order they are physically positioned in the rig instead of in numerical order 15 2 1 Reverse Shuffle and Reorder You can change the selection order of fixtures in predefined ways The Reverse Shuffle and Reorder buttons are on the Select Toolbar and Fanning Toolbar Main Toolbar Select open the Select Toolbar Revers
35. To unpark fixtures select the fixtures set any value for the parked parameters and hold the Pig key while pressing Park Both the park and unpark commands will accept a parameter mask on the command line for example e Position Park parks only position parameters of the selected fixtures 18 6 1 Viewing and Editing What is Parked You can view which fixtures have parked parameters in the Fixture window and the Output window and you can view and edit parked parameters in the Parked Output window Flying Pig Systems 187 Reference 188 Section 18 Advanced Programming The Fixture Window To view which fixtures have parked parameters in the Fixture window e Open Fixture the Fixture window opens see Figure 18 3 The Parked column of the Fixture window lolx 100 100 Figure 18 3 The Parked column of the Fixture window The Output Window Parked parameters are shown in the Output window by the blue text Parked Technobeam Iris Master CuelistCue 2 Master Cuelist Cue 1 Parked 25 The Parked Output Window You can view and modify the parked settings of fixtures in the Parked Output window see Figure 18 4 The Parked Output window To open the Parked Output window e Open Parked the Parked button is on the toolbar that appears when you press the Open key Within this window you can edit parameter values in the same way as in any editor You
36. Use HTP K Alternatively you can turn on Use HTP for all new scenes in the Scene pane of the Preferences window e Setup Preferences Scene Asserting One Scene Over the Others When you have several scenes or cuelists active at the same time control of fixture parameters programmed into one scene or cuelist may be taken by another scene or cuelist that also has programming for that fixture parameter For example assuming both scenes are LTP if Scene 1 has programming for desk channels 1 3 and Scene 2 has Flying Pig Systems 269 Reference 25 2 3 270 Section 25 Scene Playback programming for desk channels 3 6 then running a cue in Scene 2 will override the in tensity parameter of desk channel 3 You may want to return control of desk channel 3 to Scene 1 without having to run Scene 1 this is known as asserting Scene 1 Asserting a scene forces all fixture parameters to their programmed value in that scene To assert parameters in the scene attached to Master 3 for example press and hold the Assert key and press the Choose key for Master 3 The Assert Time When you assert a scene the parameters that have been asserted change to their new values over the assert time The default is 2 seconds but you can assign your preferred assert time for each scene 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Scene 2 Select the Assert Time cell Release Time 12s Default Assert Time 2s r4 9 Default 3 Se
37. amp Dirty A Show in Ten Steps can recover the Grand Master by moving the cuelist fo another master see Moving Cuelists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters to a Page p 282 49 Step 9 Playing Back the Cue 1 Check that the Fader of the Grand Master by default it is on Master 1 and the master that you put your cuelist on are at full 2 Clear the Programmer to ensure its output does not interfere with your look on stage by pressing Clear 3 Press Go on the master you recorded your cues on 4 10 Step 10 Changing the Cue Time The Wholehog III gives cues a default time of 2 seconds when they are first recorded To change the cue time e Cue 1 Time 6 Enter You can now carry on to the full tutorial in the next section or just start using the console and use the Reference p 61 to answer your questions as you go 24 Flying Pig Systems Section 5 Tutorial Overview 5 1 Introduction The following sections introduce you to the basic functions of the Wholehog III by worked example introducing its layout showing you how to create new shows connect fixtures create groups and palettes then programme cues chases and effects Experi enced Wholehog II users may bypass this section firstly referring to Wholehog II Users p 11 and then to Reference p 61 when needed The Tutorial rig consists of e 1x Wholehog III e 1x DP2000 DMX Processor directly connected to the console 2048 Channels e 5 x Studio
38. fixture type and user number for each DMX universe Additional rows show where there is an available space in the allocated DMX addresses This is useful when you are patching additional fixtures and you need to know what ranges of DMX addresses are free To show this view e Setup Patch View by DP the View by DP button is on the toolbar at the top of the Fixture window Deselect the View by DP button to return the Fixture window to its normal view Fixtures with Multiple Patch Points Some fixture types consist of several separate elements that work together each with their own DMX address An example is a parcan with a scroller which operationally you want to treat as a single fixture a light that can change brightness and colour but that physically consists of a dimmer controlled lamp and a colour scroller Similarly some moving fixtures such as the Vari Lite VL5 consist of the moving head with its own control electronics fed by an external dimmer See Figure 14 8 Examples of Fixtures requiring Multiple Patch Points With such fixtures there are two or more DMX start addresses which may not be nu merically adjacent and indeed may be on different universes and DMX Processors The Wholehog III handles this by giving these fixtures multiple Patch Points which you address separately in the Fixture Patch window For example to patch the fixture with a scroller of fixture type Scroller Dimmer shown
39. p 17 Additional buttons have also been provided along the top and bottom edges of the touch screens These Soft Keys replicate the on screen toolbar buttons located immedi ately above or below the Soft Keys Touch Screens The two touch screens are larger are in colour and have better brightness and contrast characteristics For more information see Using the Touch Screens p 83 3 3 12 New Playback Features The new playback features include Flying Pig Systems Section 3 Wholehog II Users Introduction 3 4 Ten Fully Customisable Playbacks Any of the ten masters can also be assigned to be the Grand Master The functions of all associated keys can be customised e Scene Masters Scenes which are single cues that are not associated with a cuelist can be loaded onto any of the masters and controlled by the fader and keys e Inhibitive Masters Groups can be loaded onto masters and their maximum intensity controlled by the fader The Effects Engine The new features of the Effects Engine include e Palettes Effects can be recorded into embeddable palettes so that they update throughout the show when the original palette is modified e Effects Morphing Effects can morph from one to the next For example with a circle at one speed in cue 1 and a circle at another speed in cue 2 on the crossfade the circle will speed up rather than the first circle stopping and the next one fading in e Effect Leng
40. progress is indicated by the percentage completed in the same column Pausing a cue will turn the arrow red and the letter H Halted is displayed Customising Cuelist Feedback There are several view options selected by buttons at the top of Cuelist window e Play Controls displays alternative play controls at the top of the Cuelist window These are useful for running virtual masters see Running Vir tual Masters from the Cuelist Window p 255 e View Cue opens the current cue as denoted by an arrow in the wait column in an editor Follow Cue selecting Follow Cue from the top of the Cuelist window will make the list of cues scroll to keep the current cue in view as the cues are played back e Follow Chosen during playback you may not want to have multiple Cuelist windows open Select Follow Chosen from the top of any Cuelist window so the Wholehog III automatically displays the cuelist of the Flying Pig Systems Section 24 Cuelist Playback Reference 24 4 3 currently chosen master If Follow Chosen is off the same cuelist will always be shown in the window irrespective of the chosen master e View Timecode turn the display of timecode information on or off The Output Window The Output window displays the output value of all parameters controlled by the Wholehog III from all cuelists virtual cuelists scenes the Programmer and other editors and parked parameters It provides an accurate indication of the stat
41. the Remove button is on the Record Options Toolbar at the bottom of the right hand screen 3 Cue 5 Enter removes the selected parameter values from Cue 5 Flying Pig Systems 193 Reference Section 19 Working with Cues To remove a whole fixture ensure that all parameters are selected You can do this by selecting the fixture and pressing the Touch button on the Main Toolbar 19 3 Deleting Cues To delete a cue 1 Cue 1 Delete deletes Cue 1 in the currently chosen cuelist 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Or 1 List 1 Cue 1 Delete deletes cue 1 in cuelist 1 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirmation by going to Setup gt Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items You can delete a range of cues 1 List 1 Cue 1 Thru 4 Delete deletes Cues 1 to 4 in Cuelist 1 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Tip To delete a cue cue only so that changes caused by deleting the cue don t track through to later cues see Stopping Changes from Tracking For ward when Deleting a Cue p 200 19 4 Copying and Moving Cues Tip Copying or moving cues affect hard values only the cue you wish to copy move may also contain tracked values that create the current onstage state If you wish to copy this look rather than just changes made by the current cue
42. use Copy and Move with State see Using State p 201 194 Flying Pig Systems Section 19 Working with Cues Reference 19 4 1 19 4 2 Copying Cues To make a copy of a cue in the same cuelist 1 Make sure that the cuelist you want to work with is on the currently chosen master 2 Cue 1 Copy Cue 2 Enter copies the contents of Cue 1 to Cue 2 To copy in a cuelist other than the chosen one or to copy between cuelists specify the cuelist with the List key For example e List 1 Cue 1 Copy List 2 Cue 2 Enter copies the contents of Cue 1 of Cuelist 1 to Cue 2 of Cuelist 2 To copy a range of cues e List 1 Cue 1 Thru 4 Copy List 2 Cue 2 Enter copies the contents of cues 1 to 4 of Cuelist 1 to Cuelist 2 starting at Cue 2 If the destination cue s already exist you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 192 Moving Cues To move a cue to a new location e Cue 1 Move Cue 2 Enter moves the cue from 1 to Cue 2 effectively removing Cue 1 Similarly to move between cuelists e List1 Cue 1 Move List 2 Cue 2 Enter moves Cue 1 of Cuelist 1 to Cue 2 of Cuelist 2 effectively removing Cue 1 from Cuelist 1 To move a range of cues e List 1 Cue 1 Thru 4 Move List 2 Cue 2 Enter moves Cues 1 to 4 of Cuelist 1 to Cuelist 2 starting at Cue 2 If the destination cue s already exist you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 192 19 5 Renumb
43. 0 centre tene eens 94 13 4 1 Automatic Naming of Directory Items 1 0 0 96 13 5 Working WITH EGIOIS 25s ss ct a a decanted vanes 98 13 5 1 Editor Window Controls ccc eene renee 98 13 5 2 Changing Parameter Values in the Editor 99 13 6 Using the COMMANG LINE ees 100 13 6 1 Command Line SYNTAX oo eee e eee ee ee eee ee eeeeeeeeeaes 100 13 6 2 The Status Bor arnt en ad catia nE nascar A ote 102 13 7 Starting Up and Shutting DOWN 20 eee etre teeies 103 Flying Pig Systems v Wholehog III 1S 7S STOMTING MU o EE autacucntmunecaet agate 103 13 7 2 Automatically Launching a SNOW cece eens 104 13 7 3 Launch MACOS iania eia a a eatin aoe uate 105 13 7 4 Restarting and Shutting DOWN 0 0 ect e eee eeee 106 13 8 Managing Show DOtd wc ii 106 13 8 1 Starting a New Show and Changing the Current SNOWS ES E T A Cadets tien A 107 13 8 2 Working With Show FiIles 0 0 0 ccc een eee nen es 107 13 8 3 BACKING UO rid ieia nai Pein Suites te impute uation ced 108 13 8 4 Copying Files to a CD ROM 0 ccc teteete neers 110 13 8 5 Saving and Loading Your Preferences ccc 110 13 9 MEIGiING SHOWS a alii A A E E agave st 111 13 9 1 Merging Fixture Types 0 eet eterteee teenies 113 13 9 2 Merging Fixtures ccc eee tere eeee nent ern enes 113 13 9 3 Merging Programming 0 0 tee eens 114 13 9 4 DEPENCENCIES 0 0 ccc cece eee eee sees ee eeeenenen tees 116 13 9 5 USING Merging ener iene 116 14 Adding a
44. 100 8 Yellow Variable 255 0 02100 9 Gobo Slots 0 open 0 19 Gobo Spin 100 gt 200 100 gt 100rpm 9 Gobo Slots 25 breakup 0 9 Gobo Slots 35 bubbles 0 la Gobo Slots 45 cone 0 9 Gobo Random 201 255 02100 9 Gobo Slots 55 radial 0 10 Lamp Control Strike 225 f 10 Fixture Control __ Shutdown 235 i 10 Fixture Control Global Reset 205 10 Strobe Random 200 gt 128 0 gt 30Hz 10 Strobe Rate 12127 0 gt 30Hz fo Strobe Shutter o closed 10 Lamp Control Douse 245 A 40 Strobe Shutter 255 lopen New Dmx Entry Delete Dmx Entry Build Type To build the fixture 1 Flying Pig Systems W Fixture Builder Tutorial Type Information Y Create New Copy From Delete Current Press the Build Type button to build the fixture library 335 Appendices Section 31 The Fixture Builder 2 Ifany errors are found a dialog will explain the error Make any correc tions and build again 3 A dialog box will confirm a successful build of a library 31 2 5 Step 5 Add the Fixture in the Fixture Schedule 1 Open the Fixture Schedule window and scroll to the User Created manufacturer 2 Select your new fixture and press Set Enter the number of fixtures to be used in the show 3 Press OK and patch the fixtures swap axes and so on as normal W Fixture Win i il Fixture Auto Builder Palette Swp Axes 1 4 1 Fixture 4 DP 34 11 Fixture
45. 15 17 Even Studio Studio Color Studio Color Studio Color Color 575 Figure 16 1 The Group Directory Tip The Wholehog lll can automatically generate a useful set of groups based on the fixtures in your show see Creating Palettes and Groups Automatically 120 16 1 Recording a Group When recording a group only the active fixture selection is recorded not all the fixtures currently in the editor To record a group 1 Select the desired fixtures in the Programmer or editor Flying Pig Systems 161 Reference Section 16 Working with Groups Record Group the Group Directory window opens Select the destination location in the Group Directory window Alternatively enter a number on the keypad and press Enter Se RS Qe If the destination location is already used you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 164 When you record a group the selection order is also saved This controls how fanning and effects are applied to the fixtures in the group and is significant when using the Next and Back buttons see The Selection Order p 141 Fanning p 154 and Working with Effects p 229 16 1 1 Naming a Group You can give a group a name that will be displayed in the Group Directory window 1 Open Group opens the Group Directory window 2 Select the group to be named 3 Set name Enter type in the name Tip You can name a group cue scene or palette immediately afte
46. 17 1 Tne Colour Directory When you use a palette to assign parameter values in the Programmer and then record the contents of the Programmer as a scene or cue the Wholehog II records a reference to the palette rather than numerical values for the parameters During playback the console refers to the parameter values stored within the palette when outputting cue data to the stage Because of this referencing when you modify a palette s content the cues and scenes that were programmed using it will in effect be automatically updated with the new values The palette is said to be referenced in the cue This is a very powerful feature that allows you to make global changes to the show very simply and quickly rather than having to re programme every cue individually If you wish to make a palette that is just a programming tool where later changes to the palette will not cause cues scenes and other palettes recorded with it to be updated then you can use direct palettes With direct palettes actual parameter values are placed into cues rather than references See Direct Palettes p 177 Tip The Wholehog Ill can automatically generate a useful set of palettes based on the fixtures in your show see Creating Palettes and Groups Automatically 120 Flying Pig Systems 167 Reference Section 17 Working with Palettes 17 1 17 1 1 168 Recording a Palette By default the Wholehog III records only parameters
47. 2 Dms3 Dmx 4 Figure 7 1 The Fixture Patch Window 4 1 Enter patches Studio Colors 1 through 10 to DMX addresses 1 to 160 consecutively Tip You can use the key on the console as a short cut for the Patch button in the Fixture window Patch the remaining fixtures in the same way 1 Fixture Technobeam Iris 1 Thru 8 161 Enter patches Technobeams 1 through 8 to DMX addresses 161 to 304 consecutively 2 Fixture Studio Spot 575 1 Thru 5 305 Enter patches Studio Spots 1 through 8 to DMX addresses 305 to 424 consecutively 3 Fixture Desk Channel 1 Thru 16 425 Enter patches Desk Channels 1 thru 16 to DMX addresses 425 to 441 consecutively Once you have patched all the fixtures press Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the patch information to the DMX Processor Figure 7 2 The Fixture Window showing patching shows the completed patch 7 3 Assigning User Numbers A User Number is a number you use to select a particular fixture when programming By default the Wholehog III gives each fixture type its own range of numbers so there may be several fixtures numbered 1 distinguished by selecting the fixture type before entering a number when selecting fixtures You can speed up programming by renum bering the User Numbers into a non repetitive single series so that you don t have to keep re selecting fixture types To Change the User Number Flying Pig Systems 37 Tutorial
48. 26 1 Creating A New Pde ou ttre eiei tens 277 26 2 CHANGING PAGS wesai thw Se a het acacia E A E 278 26 2 1 Options When Changing Page ou cceceeeeeeeenee es 278 26 2 2 Matching Levels When Changing Page ecseri 279 26 2 3 Restoring Activity When Changing Pages sacc 280 26 3 Modifying PAGES aasi aun taAa A ty ca OPA OAA ASAKURA ome 281 26 3 1 Copying Cuelists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters to o POQS s cdctsteraacetavs O AE 281 Flying Pig Systems Wholehog II 26 3 2 Moving Cuelists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters to a POJE erine a a adnate te ues haa Mad eee 282 26 3 3 Removing Cuelists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters fron A Pagen a a salva cel aE E EEA OAA 282 26 3 4 Clearing Cuelists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters from q PAJE a a e E anna AE E AR nme 282 26 4 Copying ANd MOVING PAGES 0 ce eee e ents 283 26 5 Deleting PAGES saraaa ened aA gua EAA A A 283 26 6 The Template PAGE woe eee 284 27 Working with Playback Controls ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 285 27 Crane Matei iniae anen e a a AE steel Mang AAS 285 27 1 1 Matching the Grand Master Level ccccccccccccro 285 27 1 2 The Blackout KEY 0 cc cecccesec cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeaeas 285 27 2 INNIDITIVES MOSTOTS visi ccciteeeediedieeneteeasccv ters erecenerenener teen eet ens 286 27 3 Configuring Playback Controls 1 0 ne ree eees 287 27 3 1 Configuring Master Controls cciceeceeee teense nea 288 27 3 2 Configuring the Main Controls c cece
49. 262 Section 24 Cuelist Playback Tip You can still run cues to time when manual fader mode is selected by pressing the master s Go key Note that you have no individual fader control of intensity and accidentally moving a fader will start to run the next cue manually Using a Cuelist as a Chase You can use a cuelist to make a chase Any wait times are ignored and each cue becomes a step in the chase where the rate is set in Beats Per Minute BMP To use a cuelist as a chase 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Is a Chase A Use HTF ed da io hed Is A Chase Track Through Loop The Playback Bar displays Chase and the rate which defaults to 120 bpm 1 5 Disco Chase Cue 1 Each cue step is by default equivalent to a beat so to set a chase that advances every second the rate needs to be 60 bpm By holding down the master s Choose key you can modify the chase rate and crossfade times on the parameter wheels Chase Rate Crossfade 120 bpm 100 When you select Is a Chase the Cuelist pane of the Playback Options window the follow ing chase options appear e Chase Rate the speed of the chase defined in Beats Per Minute bpm e Crossfade the amount of each step that a crossfade is active for as a percentage e Step Length by default each cue step is the equivalent to a beat This is helpful when you enter a rate using Tap Sync but then wish the chase to step at half o
50. 4 X ESP D 5 Universe ESP DP Universe 1 13 4 A 1 Ki DI 2 6 7 2 4 4 4 ie a lal fa fe 2 3 4 8 4 2 15 4 S 3 s 4 4 30 2 4 Using the Connectivity with ESP Vision Once the above configuration is complete the connectivity between the Wholehog ITI system and ESP Vision should begin working You can close the Wholehog III DP win dow and the connectivity will continue as long as the Wholehog III logo remains in the task bar Th amp BB 3 13PM 30 3 Connecting to WYSIWYG The Wholehog III Connectivity for WYSIWYG supports multiple DP s up to the number of channels supported by your WYSIWYG dongle Contact Cast for WYSIWYG upgrade information 30 3 1 Configuring the Network Connection When WYSIWYG is launched the Wholehog ITI DP window will be launched and opened on the bottom right of your visualiser computer screen wholehog III DP x Status Status Locating Wholehog III Network Session Info Scanning port 6600 Configuration Port 6600 User Number 1 ply 198 A Wholehog III logo will also be placed in the Windows task bar when this application is running 314 Flying Pig Systems Section 30 Visualiser Connectivity Appendices 8 BB 3 13PM If you close the dialog box the Wholehog III DP will continue to run and double clicking on the task bar icon will re open the di
51. 5 Selecting Parameter Types from the Wheels Toolbar To assign a path to all the parameters of a fixture 1 Select the fixtures that you want to assign a path to making sure that they have been given parameter values 2 Press the Time key 3 The Slot Toolbar will show buttons for All In and Out see Figure 20 6 The Slot Toolbar showing Paths 4 Choose In to assign a path to be applied to the parameters when the fixture they belong to is increasing in intensity during the crossfade Choose Out to assign a path to be applied to parameters when the fix ture they belong to is decreasing in intensity during the crossfade Choose All to assign a path to be applied to parameters of fixtures irre spective of whether their intensity is increasing or decreasing The Paths Toolbar will open see Figure 20 7 The Paths Toolbar 5 Select the desired path from the Paths Toolbar The different types of path are explained in Paths p 208 All In Out Enable Mode Control Figure 20 6 The Slot Toolbar showing Paths Default Linear Start End Over Under Damped Brake Accelerate Shake Figure 20 7 The Paths Toolbar Assigning Parameter Timings with the Command Line To assign the fade time for all parameters of a fixture 1 Fixture 1 select the fixtures you want to assign a time to making sure that they have been given parameter values 2 Time 4 Enter assigns the fade time to 4
52. 80 a S a lan D a 69 izar A20 100 _ 58 J Programmer 18 2 2 Using Live and Touch Using Live and Touch together touches all parameters that belong to fixtures that are at non zero intensity on stage including parameters at their default values This is similar to suck except that it will bring all values into the Programmer or editor including those that are at their default values The Touch button is located on the Main Toolbar For example if Studio Color 575s 1 to 3 are in the output with an intensity of 100 e Live Touch brings all the parameters of Studio Color 575s 1 to 3 into the Programmer not just the intensity values as suck would Flying Pig Systems 181 Reference Section 18 Advanced Programming Output ETE Broo foen fo Y jo lo 0 i noo open J je p777 jo fore lopen lo fos om jo o aa jos lo fo Programmer You can select the parameter types to touch e Live Colour Touch only the colour parameters are touched Output studio Th i 100 open for Jo ko o lo 100 open fo for om lo fo ee a OO pore Programmer 18 2 3 Using Copy to Bring Values into an Editor You can bring parameter values from a palette scene or cue into an editor such as the Programmer using Copy e Cue 1 Copy Enter copies the contents of Cue 1 of the currently chosen cuelist into the current editor 182 Fly
53. Blue Cyan Figure 15 7 The Colour Wheel When you programme with the HS parameters the Wholehog III stores all values as HS and converts them to CMY or RGB as required when sending DMX data to the fix tures As part of this process the console is able to match the colours of different fixture types see Using Colour Matching p 148 The Hue and Saturation parameters of fixtures with continuous colour mixing are con trolled in the same way as other continuous parameters see Continuous Parameters Colour and Beam p 145 You can also use the Colour Picker and Gel Picker see The Colour Picker p 149 and The Gel Picker p 150 Using Colour Matching One of the advantages of the Wholehog III s HS colour system is its ability to match colours across different fixture types Assigning the Hue and Saturation parameters of two different types of fixtures will set them to the same visual colour within the limit ations of the fixtures but it might send different DMX values to each Furthermore they will maintain that match through a crossfade ensuring even colour fades For colour matching to work the fixtures need to have a colour calibration in the fixture library you can check this in the Fixture window e Setup Patch Flying Pig Systems Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters Reference If the fixture has Yes in the Col Cal column then it has a colour calibration Fixtures that are not calibrated w
54. CD will unpause if paused or play from the start of the CD Halt CD HCD HCD Pauses the CD if playing unpauses if paused or starts the CD but pauses it immediately Release CD RCD RCD Stops the CD Next CD Track NCD NCD Previous CD PCD PCD Track Controlling Timecode Macro Syntax Example Comments Enable Time ET cuelist ET2 Enables timecode for the selected code cuelist Disable Time DT cuelist DT2 code Open Timecode or oT Toolbar Flying Pig Systems Section 29 Automating the Console Using Macros Reference Sending MIDI strings Macro Syntax Example MIDI String MS node number MIDI message MSh1 90473F The node number is h for a console i for a MIDI Timecode Processor and its Net Number The MIDI message is in Hex Controlling Network Devices Macro Syntax Example Comments Reset Node RN net number RN3 Resets the selected network device such as a DMX Processor Tip You can display and select from a list of available macro commands on the console by selecting the Macro cell and pressing the Set key 29 2 Entering Macro Commands To enter a macro command into a macro cell 1 Select the macro cell and press Set 2 Select a command from the drop down menu 3 Enter the specific information for the macro such as the master number 4 Press Enter to finish or select another macro and repeat If you add a further macro command the will be entered automatically
55. Complex Net MOIS A e aaa a ends E ER A E E A ve imeem lene 73 12 3 Working with Network PrOCesSSOfS ccccccccccccccccccrrcrccec 76 12 3 1 Using the network processor s Front Panel Con ILE AREE A AAS E O A E A ct 76 12 3 2 Network Sef iNgS ccccccccrcrcrrcrcrcncnrnc cc 77 12 3 3 Options and Defaults teeter a 78 12 3 4 Resetting the DMX Processor laccccccccccrcccccrnec 79 12 3 5 Checking a DMX Processor s StOTUS iiac 79 12 4 Adding Playback WINGS 00 0 ernie eenei es 80 13 Using the Console occ ccecceceeecen dec edecee dee teete coatdenencwageadensteteereettenes 83 13 1 Basie CONCEPTS irren iea eanna ties lh aiedenevidgeciartenieberenss 83 13 1 1 The Graphical User Interface sssssssierirrrrrrrrrrirererre 83 13 1 2 Using the TOUCH SCreenS eter 83 13 3 MOGifion KEYS stiicisigccestidervetehan tales A E A R OTTONE 84 ISA Undo ANd REJO iini tnaa aa aana datatancts eile 84 13 2 Working With WINGOWS 00 ANI EEA ATRA 85 13 2 1 Opening WINCOWS 0 0 eens 85 13 2 2 CIOSING WINGOWS 0 0 teenies 86 13 2 3 Fronting Resizing and Moving WiNdoOwWS 0c ee 86 13 2 4 Scrolling Window Content cette eee ne ees 87 13 2 5 Desktop VIEWS oo ccccccccececeeeseeeeeeeeeee ease saseee ease enenenees 88 13 3 Working with Spreadsheets 2 0 0 eerie ee 90 19 3 COMPACT MOS is cas erani na ea paraa ceva dein 91 B32 AGGIE Gallon ie ae vents e a A EE ae A AE 92 13 3 3 Cut Copy ANd Paste oo a 94 13 4 Working with Directories 0
56. Control Panel OK close the Control Panel For the display settings to take effect you need to restart the console Press Quit in the Start window When the console says that it is safe to turn it off switch off and back on again using the power switch on the rear of the console W Control Panel 4 Sound ea Keyboard s Wings Time and Date Enable left touchscreen KA Enable right touchscreen Calibrate Touchscreens i System Info Go Reports l l x External Monitor 1 Resolution Off v Extemal Monitor 2 Resolution Off v vA Enable left LCD bs _ Enable right LCD A Apply ala Ok X Cancel Figure 6 5 The Displays Pane of the Control Panel 29 Tutorial 6 2 3 Section 6 Setting Up the Console External Keyboard Finally if you have connected an external keyboard you may need to configure it 1 Control Pnl gt Keyboard open the Control Panel from the Startup Toolbar located at the bottom of the right touchscreen 2 Choose a keyboard model and layout in the Keyboard pane see Fig ure 6 6 The Keyboard Pane of the Control Panel 3 Click or press on OK iix Keyboard E Displays 4 Sand Keyboard model Generic 101 key PC v Keyboard layout usen O S Wings Time and Date B Auto Launch oh Network System Info Gg Reports Figure 6 6 The Keyboard Pane of the Control Panel 6 3 30 Launching A New Show
57. DMX values and ranges may be between 0 and 65535 If a DMX value is out of the allowable DMX range the minimum or maximum value will automatically be used an entry of 0 gt 500 will become 0 gt 255 Real World This field defines the label value or range that is displayed on the console when the function and feature is used The selected function and feature will automatically define the type of value available within this field For example an intensity function will always be displayed as a percentage while pan or tilt will always be displayed in degrees and 326 Flying Pig Systems Section 31 The Fixture Builder Appendices strobe frequency in hertz Hz You may enter a single value or a range of values 0 gt 260 using the Thru key on the console keypad The Real World range will be mapped directly to the corresponding DMX value range Note that if a single value is entered 100 for a corresponding DMX value range 0 gt 255 then you will not be able to adjust the parameter throughout the defined range When defining the Real World values for a function feature you can simply enter the numeric value 0 gt 100 and the predefined unit type will automatically be defined for intensity this would appear as percentage for position as degrees for strobe as hertz you do not have to enter in the unit type Also if a Real World value is out of the range of the console the minimum or maximum value will automatically be used an en
58. In the Channel Count cell enter the total number of DMX channels used by the fixture In the Add Patchpoint Channel cell enter a DMX channel number to define a new patchpoint A patchpoint is used to create fixtures with dual DMX addressing capabilities similar Flying Pig Systems 323 Appendices Section 31 The Fixture Builder to a scroller dimmer fixture type When the fixture is later patched in the patch window you will be able to patch this fixture at two discrete DMX addresses as you have defined the starting point for each within this window the 1st channel is automatically defined as the first patch point Only 1 additional patch point is currently allowed Select OK to submit the library information and begin the building process see Building the Fixture p 324 Creating a New Fixture Library Using an Existing Library When you press the Copy From button the Create New Custom Type window will open see Figure 31 2 The Create New Custom Type window Create New Custom Type 2 x Create New Custom Type Model Name Author Notes vA Create Blank Create From Existing Name 1 5 Star Systems Eb AC Lighting Apollo Cameleon City Theatrical Clay Paky Coef Coemar Controlite l Coolux m4 Figure 31 2 The Create New Custom Type window Within this window you can define the Model Name Author and enter any Notes The currently loaded
59. Max Offset Default Patt Mas Speed 4 Yes Titt z 120 Linear j0 5 Yes Tit EE 120 ia d Linear Os s 6 Yes Titt 120 120 jo Linear Os ti Yes Titt 120 jo Linear 0s 8 Yes Tit 0 _jtinear 0s El Tit O Linear jos 1 o Linear Pa 1 Linear oe 185 g Linear 0s 185 ot Linear Os 185 J0 Linear 0s 185 lor Linear los 185 o Linear los 185 jo Linear 0s 185 jo Linear 0s 185 o Linear 0s z O _ tinear Qs Assigning a Custom Default Setup Patch Edit Fixtures Repeat to assign the Maximum value Select the Minimum cell of the parameter you wish to limit Set new value Enter Enter a value as a real world unit In the case of pan and tilt it will be a plus or minus number of degrees from the fixture s default position The default value is the value that the parameter will take when no playbacks or editors are controlling it Fixtures also go to their default setting when the console starts up To assign a custom default 1 2 3 Assign a Parameter Offset Setup Patch Edit Fixtures Select the Default cell of the desired parameter Set new value Enter Enter a value as a real world unit This setting allows you to offset the range of values over which a parameter varies For instance if one fixture is hung at an angle to the bar so that it has a different pan centre
60. Moving fixtures have pan and tilt parameters and perhaps colour beam shape and so on A wheel that facilitates the control of fixture parameters Parameter Wheels are fixture sensitive once loaded from the fixture library parameters are allocated logically to the wheels The assignment of DMX addresses to fixtures See Also DMX The set of information that defines where a fixture is patched in cluding DMX address DMX universe and DMX Processor Some fixtures have multiple patch points See Also DMX DMX address universe DMX Processor A way of defining the way that a parameter changes during a fade You could assign a path that makes the fixture parameter snap to its final value at the start of the fade for example Paths should not be confused with conversion curves paths are the properties of a cue while a conversion curves is the property of a fixture See Also fade time conversion curve See gobo See accessories The Flying Pig symbol button is a modifier key and may be used in conjunction with other keys to alter their function A system where new objects are added to previous ones rather than replacing them The Wholehog III can be assigned to pile on desktop views so that new windows are opened but ones from the previous view are not closed See Also desktop view See master A Wholehog III accessory that increases the number of masters available 373 374 plotting point number port numbe
61. Section 12 Setting Up the System Reference double click speed for the mouse and Trackball can be assigned in the Key Timings pane of the User Preferences window 12 1 6 Keys and Buttons In the manual the word key is used to indicate a hardware button on the Wholehog III s front panel For example press the Enter key The word button refers to virtual buttons that can be pressed on the touch screens or clicked on with the Trackball or mouse You can adjust various key timings in the Key Timings pane of the User Preferences win dow Setting Function Key repeat delay When you hold down a key this is the delay before it starts to repeat Key repeat period When you hold down a key this is the time between repeats Key double press time When you press a key twice within this time the Wholehog III interprets this as a double press Note that these timings only apply to the physical keys on the console s front panel not to on screen buttons Tip Double pressing a key is often a shortcut way of opening the window asso ciated with the key for example double pressing the Beam key will open the Bean directory window If you prefer not to use the double press shortcuts then assign the double press time to zero to disable it 12 1 7 Keyboards Using an External Keyboard You can connect an external keyboard to the Wholehog III via the console s standard PS2 5 pin mini DIN port or one of th
62. Show with no patch 3 0 13 3 2005 15 35 laa He CO Back X Cancel Figure 13 22 The Source Location page of the Merge Show window Tip If you want the latest fixture types you can download a library file from the Flying Pig Systems website www flyingpig com and put it on a recordable CD or zip disk to load into the console Flying Pig Systems Section 13 Using the Console Reference 13 9 1 Merging Fixture Types Once you have selected a show or library the Wholehog III compares the libraries and creates a list of types which have changed see Figure 13 23 The Type Merge page of the Merge Show window Merge Show Type Merge C A Select the fixture types to merge from the source file Type Import Show Same Revision Name Revision ID Change Calibrated J es em Green Hippo A Griven High End J c8 1 Same ee O Catalyst 2 Same a OV Catalyst v3 3 Same i Color Pro HX Std Q Same x Select All Select All Newer Select Al Missing Deselect All 2 Help Back XK Cancel Figure 13 23 The Type Merge page of the Merge Show window An expanding tree shows those types and their differences e Newer the fixture type in the source library is a newer revision e Older the type in the source library is an older revision Not In Show the type is in the source library but not the current libra
63. Systems Section 19 Working with Cues Reference To record a cue with Track Backwards select the Backwards button on the Record Options Toolbar that appears after you press the Record key 1 Fixture 1 Thru 3 100 Enter 2 Record Cue 3 3 Select Track Backwards on the Record Options Toolbar 4 Enter Tip Z You can also Track Backwards when you update cues using Auto Update see Auto Update p 184 19 7 2 Stopping Values from Tracking Forward When you insert a new cue into a cuelist or merge changes into an existing cue the new values track forwards into later cues in the cuelist For example your cuelist has Cues 1 to 4 and Cue 1 has Fixture 1 programmed into it at 30 so that it tracks through the subsequent cues Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 2 100 60 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 40 You now insert a Cue 2 5 with Fixture 1 at 100 Because cues 3 and 4 do not change the intensity of Fixture 1 it will remain at 100 for the rest of the cuelist Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 2 100 60 Cue 2 5 100 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 40 You may want to record the new cue so that parameter values in the new cue return to their original value in the next cue so that the inserted cue does not change the original looks due to tracking Flying Pig Systems 199 Reference 19 7 3 200 Section 19 Working with Cues Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 2 100 60 Cue 2 5 100 Cue 3 30 50 Cue 4 40
64. Wholehog III s graphical user interface is generally similar to that found on Windows and Macintosh personal computers with each section of the console Programmer Output display and so on displayed in a window which can be placed anywhere on the touch screens or external displays The key features of the GUI are You can work with on screen controls and windows using the touch screen or through a pointer controlled by the built in Trackball or an external mouse Left clicking the mouse is the same as touching the screen and is used for selecting or activating controls while right clicking brings up a context sensitive range of menu options The Soft Keys adjacent to the touch screens provide another method of accessing functions changing to match whichever toolbar is docked along that edge of the screen The graphical environment is highly customisable giving you complete control of the console and individual window layout For example you can rearrange column headers in list windows e g the Cuelist and Pro grammer windows to prioritise information that is most pertinent to a specific show or user Information displayed can also be sorted or filtered When a user logs out these preferences and settings are stored and re trieved again on logging in 13 1 2 Using the Touch Screens You can use your finger on the touch screens in the same way that you use a mouse pressing the touch screen is equivalent to a mouse click You can
65. a cuelist s contents is flashed to If programmed levels are 60 and the flash level is set to 50 the flashed output intensity will be 30 Flashes the contents of the cuelist to the full pro grammed level whilst sending the intensities output by all other masters including Virtual Masters to zero If set to on the Flash key stays on as if it were being held down until you press it again The cuelist is triggered when you press the Flash key as if you had pressed the Go key The cuelist is released when you press the Flash key Running Multiple Cuelists Because the Wholehog II can simultaneously run ten cuelists on masters and more if virtual masters and playback wings are used the question arises as to which master actually has control over a particular fixture parameter To decide which master takes precedence the Wholehog III applies the following rules For intensity parameters by default intensity parameters are controlled on a Latest Takes Precedence LTP basis therefore the value of an in tensity parameter that appears in several cuelists will be output from the cuelist with the highest playback priority see Changing a Cuelist s Priority p 252 In addition you can assign cuelist options so that a master works on a Highest Takes Precedence HTP basis this means that if several masters have programming for the same intensity parameter the highest programmed level will be output to stage For a full di
66. a 2 f Setinas L Software Update Gl al S i ey A X Gad Figure 12 8 The Network window TimeCode Using the network processor s Front Panel Controls For the remainder of this section the manual assumes that you are using the network processor s front panel controls To navigate through the screens lt Move the cursor through the options backwards e Select the option currently highlighted by the cursor gt Move the cursor through the options forwards The menus use the following conventions OK Confirm changes and return to the previous screen Cancel Abandon changes and return to the previous screen Close Return to the previous screen To assign a numerical value Flying Pig Systems Section 12 Setting Up the System Reference 12 3 2 1 Move the cursor to the value you want to change 2 Press the key and the first digit of the number will be highlighted 3 Usethe key to change the value and the lt and gt keys to select a different digit of the number 4 When you have finished press gt until no digits are selected You can then use lt and gt to select options in the usual way Network Settings A simple network of just a console and an DMX Processor will configure itself automat ically If you have a more complex network you may need to change some of the network settings See Connecting and Configuring More Complex Networks p 73 Checking and Setting the Net
67. a Choose key you can use the left hand parameter wheel to control the crossfade rate of the selected master This modified rate will persist until you make another change Rate 100 The rate level is displayed as a percentage with a default of 100 A cuelist running a cue that is 10 seconds long will complete the cue in 5 seconds with an accelerated rate of 200 or in 20 seconds with a decelerated rate of 50 24 5 2 Manual Crossfading You can assign any cuelist to be operated manually allowing you to perform the crossfades from one cue to the next manually using the fader Once a cuelist s Manual Fade option is selected the Master s fader will no longer control intensity but instead the crossfade progress of all parameters from the current cue to the next starting when moved from any end stop finishing when the opposite end stop is reached If you select Manual Fader mode when the fader is at 50 a manual fade cannot take place until the fader is moved to and then from an end stop further moves from end stops will manually work through the cuelist sequentially To assign a cuelist s Manual Fade function 1 Open Choose Options Master 2 Select Manual Crossfader from the Fader menu Fader fader i Go None fader Manual crossfader Flash w Flash Manual crossfade mode will be indicated on the Playback Bar above the selected master by Flying Pig Systems 261 Reference 24 5 3
68. actually recor ded in the cue are displayed Show Palettes Press Show Palettes to see the palette name rather than the parameter value see Working with Palettes p 167 Fade Changes Press this to have parameter values changed in this editor fade rather than snap onto stage see Fade Changes p 186 Compact Press this to toggle compact mode on and off Compact mode fits more information into the editor without having to scroll However the column for a particular parameter won t necessarily be aligned across different fixture types so sorting is not possible amp Reports This allows you to print the contents of the window Configure This allows you to control various aspects of how the editor window displays information The Jump Toolbar The Jump Toolbar has a button for each type of fixture currently in the editor allowing you to quickly jumpt to the parameter values for that type of fixture The Jump Toolbar only appears if aggregation is turned on see Aggregation p 92 13 5 2 Changing Parameter Values in the Editor To make changes to the contents of an editor you need to have its Edit button selected You can have up to eight editors open but only one can be editable at a time and the parameter wheels I Wheel and command line all operate on the contents of the currently editable editor If you have several editors open at once you can use the Edit button to determine which one you are controlling eve
69. also applies when the cuelist automatically loops back to the start of the list after you play back the last cue in the list Important The Track Through Loops option applies to the whole cuelist Using it may have unintended consequences when playing back other cues in the cuelist out of sequence Flying Pig Systems Section 21 Working with Cuelists Cuelists are lists of cues usually used to play back the cues in a defined order A cue number is specific to each cuelist not the entire console so there can be a cue 1 for cuelists 1 2 and 3 Cuelists are held in the Cuelist Directory Figure 21 1 The Cuelist Directory window and it is possible to copy or move cues between cuelists see Copying and Moving Cues p 194 To open the Cuelist Directory e Open List Alternatively e List List For general information on working with directories see Working with Directories p 94 W Cuelist Directory 0 x Figure 21 1 The Cuelist Directory window To open a cuelist Figure 21 2 The Cuelist window e Open Cuelist 1 select a cuelist from the Cuelist Directory Or with the command line e List 1 Open e Open Choose select the master with the cuelist Tip Cuelist windows can be set to always show the same cuelist or to follow the currently chosen master see Cuelist Feedback p 258 Flying Pig Systems 221 Reference Section 21 Working with Cuelists W Chosen Master List 1 a 0
70. any time by pressing the Calibrate Touch Screens button in the Displays pane of the Control Panel Press each of the targets in turn to calibrate Press Set to start calibration again Press Control to swap external screens Press Enter to finish Figure 12 2 The Calibration Screen Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the touch screens by holding down the Setup key and adjusting the parameter wheels labelled Left Backlight or Right Backlight Tip If you find the graphics on the screens are too bright you can change the console s colour scheme to a darker one in Setup Preferences gt Appear ance Flying Pig Systems Section 12 Setting Up the System Reference 12 1 3 Backlight Off Time The backlights that illuminate the touch screens switch off automatically after a time if the console is idle to maximise their life You can adjust the amount of time the backlights wait before switching off in the Appearance pane of the User Preferences window 1 Setup Preferences gt Appearance 2 Adjust the Backlight Off value located at bottom of pane either by pressing the arrows to increment or decrement the value or by clicking on the value pressing Set and typing in a new value 3 Select OK to apply and close Tip Once the Wholehog III displays are asleep you can wake them up by pressing any key It is a good idea to use the Pig key as this will prevent you from accidentally changing any data within
71. are restored when you release the key To create an inhibitive master 1 Record a group containing the required fixtures See Recording a Group p 161 2 Group Group open the Group Directory 3 Select the required group To ensure you don t select the group in the Programmer or editor enable the Guard button in the Group Directory or press and hold the Pig key while selecting the group 4 Move Choose move the group to the required master Or using the command line 1 Record a group containing the required fixtures 2 Group group number Move Choose The Playback Bar will show the group name above the chosen master When the master level is less than 100 the Playback Bar will also display a bar showing the level When the Flash key is pressed the Playback Bar will display BO see Figure 27 1 The display of Inhibitive Masters on the Playback Bar Flying Pig Systems Section 27 Working with Playback Controls Reference 2 Group 2 2 Group 2 2 Group 2 Group Group Group 50 BO Inhibitive Inhibitive Inhibitive master with master at full master at 50 flash key pressed Figure 27 1 The display of Inhibitive Masters on the Playback Bar 27 3 Configuring Playback Controls For each cuelist and scene you can configure how the playback controls work For ex ample you can e Assign the master Go key to assert the selected cuelist over 3 seconds e Assign the main Halt Back key to Hal
72. can knockout fixtures or parameter values to stop them being parked or add or modify parameter values to park them Flying Pig Systems Section 18 Advanced Programming Reference EE ioi x j Technobeam Studio M Iris Color 575 Position Colour Mixing Colour 1 Track 100 off 4 SEAMED s Track 100 off LLL Lp CZ Track 100 off LLL V7 4 77 i f Y rack 10doff si a Figure 18 4 The Parked Output window Flying Pig Systems 189 Section 19 Working with Cues Every cue created on the Wholehog III is given a number and assigned to a cuelist A cue number is specific to the current cuelist not the entire console so there can be a Cue 1 for Cuelists 1 2 and 3 For more on cuelists see Working with Cuelists p 221 You can refer to a cue either by its cuelist or by the master it is currently on e List 1 Cue 2 refers to Cue 2 of Cuelist 1 e Alternatively you can use the key List 1 2 e Cue1 2 refers to Cue 2 on Master 1 e Cue 1 if you don t specify a cuelist or master the currently chosen master is assumed 19 1 19 1 1 Flying Pig Systems Recording a Cue To record a look created in the Programmer or editor as a cue within a cuelist you need to specify a cuelist and cue number to record to If the cuelist does not yet exist the Wholehog II will create it automatically For example to record Cue 4 into Cuelist 2 e Record Lis
73. cannot rectify the problem or you think that it is because the console is not working as it should please contact support flyingpig com following the guidelines in Reporting Problems with the Console p 349 35 1 35 1 1 35 1 2 Troubleshooting The console appears to have crashed or frozen The Wholehog III s software runs as a series of separate processes that can start and stop individually Often when the console appears to have crashed or frozen it is only one process that is causing the problem while the rest of the processes are still running normally In particular an editor or the desktop may crash while playback continues normally Before restarting the entire console therefore you should see if the problem can be cured by restarting the individual process 1 Pig Open Backspace open the Launched Processes window see Figure 35 1 The Launched Processes window 2 Kill processes that are not responding by right clicking on them and selecting Kill 3 Restart the process by right clicking and selecting Restart An exception is the Editor process which will disappear when killed you can restart it by re opening the Programmer or an editor window The console isn t talking to the DMX Processors 1 Check that the display on the DMX Processor shows Outputs Active If it does not then see if it is in the process of getting the show data or connecting or crashed if it has crashed restart
74. change the a console s network settings No Network Show found Rescan Pa Settings 2 Help X Quit Touchsoms Control Pnl Software Figure 6 3 The Startup Window and Toolbar 6 2 1 Touchscreens 1 Once the console is switched on the Start window will appear see Figure 6 3 The Startup Window and Toolbar Select Touchscrns on the Startup Toolbar located at the bottom of the right touchscreen 2 A target will appear sequentially in each corner which you should touch in turn see Figure 6 4 The Calibration Screen The calibration is complete when you have done all four corners press Enter to finish You can press the Set key to start the process again if necessary 28 Flying Pig Systems Section 6 Setting Up the Console 6 2 2 Flying Pig Systems Press each of the targets in turn to calibrate Press Set to start calibration again Press Control to swap external screens Press Enter to finish Figure 6 4 The Calibration Screen Tutorial External Displays If you have connected external displays to supplement the console s touch screens you will need to enable them and set their screen resolution 1 Control Pnl gt Displays open the Control Panel from the Startup Toolbar located at the bottom of the right touchscreen and select the Displays pane Select a resolution for the displays from the drop down menu see Figure 6 5 The Displays Pane of the
75. close the win dow 4 6 Step 6 Patching the Fixtures For each fixture e Fixture Fixture Type from Toolbar Fixture Number Patch Address Enter For Example e Fixture Studio Color 575 1 1 Enter after pressing Fixture the Fixture Types Toolbar appears from which you can choose the required fixture type When patching the Fixture Patch window will appear Use this to determine the next free DMX address and to see how full the DMX universes are To Patch to a universe greater than 1 e Fixture Fixture Type from Toolbar Fixture Number Universe Number Patch Address Enter For Example e Fixture Studio Color 575 1 2 1 Enter Repeat as necessary when all fixtures are patched close the Fixture window 22 Flying Pig Systems Section 4 Quick amp Dirty A Show in Ten Steps Tutorial 4 7 Step 7 Assigning Values to Parameters Fixtures and their parameters are assigned values in the Programmer opened by pressing Programmer in the Main Toolbar First assign the intensity of your fixture For example e Fixture Studio Color 575 1 60 Enter assigns the intensity of Studio Color 1 to 60 When you press the Fixture key the Fixture Types Toolbar will appear Use this to select Studio Color 575 in this example You can also adjust the intensity with the I Wheel on the right of the console e Fixture Studio Color 575 1 Enter select the fixture then move
76. command into the command line so that you can enter a cue number and press Enter to go to that cue Goto Enter a cue number to go to in the Target Cue cell Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own fade time overriding the cue s time Skip forward Go instantly to the next cue Skip back Go instantly to the previous cue The Fader Function Options and Notes None Disables the control Fader The fader controls fixture intensities being output by the master Manual cross fader Press Go Off Zero to Go the next cue when the fader is moved above zero Press Release At Zero to release the master when the fader is moved down to zero The fader control cues manually move the fader to the bottom to pick up the next cue then move it up to start the crossfade Flying Pig Systems 289 Reference 27 3 2 290 Section 27 Working with Playback Controls The Flash key Function None Flash Options and Notes Disables the control The Flash key brings the fixture intensities currently controlled by the master to their full level determined by the cuelist or scene on the master This is equivalent to momentarily bringing the fader to full You can enter a percentage level for the Flash function If this is less than 100 fixture intensities will be reduced in proportion when the Flash key is pressed Press Go On Flash to go the master when the Flash key is pressed Press Release o
77. cue in the series While tracking can help speed up the modification of cues you may not always want changes to track through For example in a theatre show you probably wouldn t want changes to track through from one scene to the next and in a music concert you wouldn t want changes to track through from one song to the next To prevent changes tracking through you can record a blocking cue which contains hard values for all parameters that have values at that point in the cuelist regardless of whether the values have tracked through from previous cues In the example given above a new cue cue 4 would act as a blocking cue Fixture 1 2 3 4 Cue 1 100 0 50 50 Cue 2 50 100 Cue 3 100 Cue 4 50 100 100 50 Flying Pig Systems 7 Introduction Section 2 Users New to Moving Light Consoles 2 4 2 2 4 3 The new cue 4 acts as an end stop preventing any future changes to cues 1 3 from tracking through to subsequent cues For more on working with blocking cues see Blocking Cues p 201 Simultaneous Cues Another advantage of tracking is that multiple cues can be run simultaneously Imagine a play where the sun sets outside the window and characters turn on various lights in the room as the natural light fades You might create this as an initial sunset cue over 20 minutes followed by a series of snap cues for the room lights being turned on during the sunset With a non tracking console this would cause problems wh
78. eeee teens 290 28 Working with Audio MIDI and Timecode ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 291 28 1 Working With SOUN 0 ci n 291 28 1 1 Playing Sound from the CD ROM Drive cce 292 28 2 Working With MIDI Show Control cece eeeee teense nees 293 28 2 1 Bringing MSC into the Wholehog Ill ccecce 293 28 2 2 Sending MSC from the Wholehog Ill ccce 293 28 2 3 Using MIDI Show Control oo eene ees 294 28 2 4 Tracking Backup Using MIDI Show Control 0 295 28 3 Working with MIDI SYNTOX eee 295 28 4 Bringing Timecode into the Console 1 0 ceeceeeeeee eee eees 295 28 4 1 Connecting a Timecode INPUT eens 296 28 4 2 Timecode INPUT OPTIONS 0 0 cece eee ee cece ee ee ease ea eaes 298 28 5 Triggering Cues from TIME COE ccc te teeter ee ees 299 28 6 VIEWING TIME COE 0 ini 300 28 7 Simulating TIME COE 0 nee 301 29 Automating the Console Using Macros s ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 303 29 Macro COMMGNGS incccivrereiaecencis eaaa aii 303 29 2 Entering Macro COMMAMNAS 11 etnies 305 29 3 Additional Macro SYNTOX oo cece cece cece eee ee ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeenenees 305 A APDONCICeS i cscescsvcicsssee dace vac enecs asicadencdex cede cated coved A sexes 307 30 Visualiser Connectivity cece eee ee eee ee cece eens eeeea sees eeeeeeeeees 309 30 1 Installing the Connectivity Application 0 0 cece 309 30 2 Connecting to ESP VISION cette entire ees 312 30 2 1 Configuring ESP VISION ce
79. enter 0 gt 540 if desired but then this would be different than existing fixtures as the 0 value would equal a DMX value of 0 6 Repeat the above for the second 2 3 channel 7 Repeat all of the above for Tilt on the two 4 5 channels Cyan Magenta Yellow Tilt Tilt 0265535 0 270 Cyan Variable 255 0 02100 7 Magenta Variable 255 gt 0 O gt 100 E Yellow Variable 255 0 O 100 9 UNUSED Dje G 1 Select the function cell for channel 6 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories 2 Select Colour on the left column to display a list of Colour function sub categories 3 Select Cyan as the desired function The window will close and you will see Cyan assigned as the function and feature for channel 6 Note the feature column will auto fill with variable 4 Select the DMX value cell for channel 1 and press Set Enter the DMX values range for the Cyan channel 255 gt 0 and press Enter Note that the DMxX value is inverted because the protocol shows 0 is full colour and 255 is no colour 5 Select the Real World value cell for channel 6 and press Set Enter the Real World value to be displayed in percentage 0 gt 100 and press Enter 6 Repeat the above steps for Magenta on channel 7 and Yellow on channel 8 Gobo Wheel Since the DMX Protocol lists 8 discrete DMX values or ranges used by channel 9 the number of DMX entries needs to be increased for this channel 1 Select the Channel c
80. hard Soft Reset resets the DMX Processor so that it re initialises communication with the network Hard Reset is equivalent to turning off and on the DMX Processor s mains power You can do both types of reset from the Control Panel Checking a DMX Processor s Status The indicator lights on the front of the DMX Processor display its status on the network see Figure 12 9 The LEDs on a DMX Processor Flying Pig Systems 79 Reference Section 12 Setting Up the System 100base T The established link is 100Mbps fast ethernet e 10base T The established link is only 10Mbps because the link partner usually a switch or hub does not support fast ethernet A fast ethernet link is recommended e Full Duplex The established link is full duplex both link partners can talk at once This will only occur when the link partner is a console PC or ethernet switch router Full duplex cannot be established with a lowly hub repeater e Collision A collision has been detected this will occur once in a while and is perfectly normal However excessive collision indication might mean a network congestion or reliability problem or an incompatible link partner e Transmit The DMX Processor is transmitting data Receive The DMX Processor is receiving data e Link A link has been established Note that this is a link at the hardware level it doesn t necessarily indicate that the console is successfully communicating with the D
81. how to work with the Wholehog III While it is possible to work through the Reference in order it is designed to be used to look up how particular features of the console work as and when you need them If you want to be guided through the main operations of setting up the console and pro gramming and running a show use the Tutorial p 19 Flying Pig Systems 61 Section 12 Setting Up the System 12 1 Setting Up the Console Many aspects of the Wholehog IIT are configured in the Control Panel and the User Pref erences window Settings in the Control Panel apply to the console hardware while those in the User Preferences window are specific to the current show To open these windows press Setup and then either Control Pnl or Preferences from the toolbar at the bottom of the right hand touch screen Both the Control Panel window and the User Preferences window have several panes grouping their contents according to function Select the desired pane by selecting from the list on the left hand side of the window see Figure 12 1 Pane lists for the Control Panel and User Preferences windows Disp Ld Displays 4 Sound ska Keyboard Wings Time and Date R Auto Launch En Network I System Info LI KG Sensitivity ms Key Timings f Track Ball Edit Defaut Timing Default Naming Wheelset Editor Figure 12 1 Pane lists for the Control Panel and User Preferences wind
82. in Figure 14 8 Examples of Fixtures requiring Multiple Patch Points 1 Setup gt Patch Open the Fixture window Flying Pig Systems 125 Reference Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures Scroller address 1 2 501 Parcan Smart Repeater address 1 1 1 Dimmer address 1 4 1 Ey O DMX Processor 1 Figure 14 8 Examples of Fixtures requiring Multiple Patch Points 2 Fixture Scroller Dimmer 1 Opens the Fixture Patch window 3 Select the Fixture Patch Point for the scroller from the drop down list in the top right corner of the Fixture Patch window 2x Patch points Fixture wv Dana pd Intensity bmx 4 Fixture Click DMX 2 to select the second DMX universe 501 Enter Enter the DMX address for the scroller Fixture Scroller Dimmer 1 Opens the Fixture Patch window again Click DMX 4 to select the fourth DMX universe SND OT Select the Intensity Patch Point for the dimmer from the drop down list 9 2 Enter Enter the DMX address for the dimmer 10 Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch information to the DMX Processors In the Fixture window these types of fixture will span more than one row one for each Patch point see Figure 14 9 A Fixture with Multiple Patch Points 126 Flying Pig Systems Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures Reference Scroller D
83. key while pressing Size rotates through the options in the reverse order Move Screen moves the selected window between Open touch screens and external displays Maximise toggles the size of the currently selected Open Full window between full screen and its previous size Focus switches between windows in turn bringing each Open Thru to the front a cd Bl 2e Lock stops the positions and sizes of all windows being Open changed by the Trackball or mouse but not the toolbar buttons Press again to unlock xl Close closes the frontmost window Open Backspace Using the Mouse or Trackball To move a window click and hold on the window s top status bar whilst dragging it to its new position To move a toolbar click and hold its left hand edge and drag to its new position Windows can be resized by clicking and holding on corners until the resize arrow ap pears You can then drag the corner to make the window bigger or smaller Note that you can only use the mouse or Trackball to move and resize windows if you have unlocked them with the Lock button on the Window Control Toolbar Keeping the windows locked is useful when using the touch screens so that you do not accident ally drag or resize windows with their title bars or borders You can still move and resize windows with the buttons on the toolbar 13 2 4 Scrolling Window Contents When a window s contents is too great to fit inside the window scrol
84. mask to the selection This allows you to select all fixtures that are on stage that are assigned to particular values or palettes For example e Live 50 selects fixtures that are on stage at 50 e Live 50 Thru 80 selects fixtures that are on stage at 50 to 80 e Live 0 selects fixtures that are at 0 Using a palette as a mask e Live Blue selects fixtures that are on stage that are at their Blue palette settings You can use the Live and keys together to select fixtures that are both live on stage and in a specified fixture selection e Live 1 Thru 5 selects fixtures that are in the range 1 to 5 that are live on stage e Live Group 1 selects fixtures that are in Group 1 that are live on stage Note that in all the above examples using the Live key only selects fixtures it does alter values in the Programmer or editor 18 2 18 2 1 Bringing Parameter Values Into the Programmer Sometimes you will end up with a look onstage or in a cue scene or palette that you want to reuse in further programming There are various ways in which you can bring those fixtures and parameter values into the Programmer or editor Suck You can use Suck to assign fixture parameters to the values that they currently have on stage It doesn t assign parameters that are at their default value or that belong to fix Flying Pig Systems 179 Reference Section 18 Advanced Programming tures with an intensity v
85. numbers but they are not patched or added to any groups An asterisk will appear next to User Numbers that may now conflict with existing ones 14 1 DP 2000 _ 1 377 Fixture No No No 100 No 4 DP 2000 1 401 Fixture No No No 100 li No 30 14 1 DP 2000 1 377_ Fixture No No No 100 No 15 14 DP 2000 _ 1 401_ Fixture No No No 100 li ZNO p Figure 14 3 A Studio Color 575 in the Fixture window before and after replicating 14 1 3 Changing the Fixture Type It is sometimes useful to change the type of a fixture for example because of production changes where one fixture of one type is replaced by another of a different type or be cause the rig has been changed perhaps by adding a scroller to a desk channel fixture such as a Par To change the fixture type 1 Setup Patch 2 Select the fixtures you want to change by clicking on the numbered button in the left hand column 3 Press the Change Type button and select the new fixture type from the list 4 The Wholehog III cannot change a fixture s type while it is patched You will be asked if you want to unpatch any patched fixtures don t forget to repatch them afterwards Figure 14 4 Changed Fixture Type shows the contents of the Fixture window before and after changing the fixture type Important Changing a fixture s type may cause ambiguities in any programming that has already taken place Whilst the Wholehog III translates all real worl
86. of a single type intensity position colour beam into a palette Palettes of each type are held in the relevant directory You can optionally record more than one parameter type in a palette see Recording with Specified Masking p 174 Also by default the Wholehog III records the appropriate parameter values of all fixtures in the Programmer or editor not just those of the selected fixtures To only record from selected fixtures see Recording Only Selected Fixtures p 176 To record for example a position palette 1 Inthe Programmer or editor assign the position parameters of the de sired fixtures as you want them in the palette 2 Record Position the Position Directory opens 3 Palette 2 choose a location in the directory Or using the command line e Record Position 2 Enter If you leave out the palette location e Record Position Enter the palette will be recorded in the next available location If the destination palette already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 178 Naming a Palette You can give a palette a name that will be displayed in the Palette Directory 1 Open Position opens the Position Directory 2 Check that the Guard button is selected so that you don t accidentally activate a palette when pressing its button in the directory 3 Select the palette to be named by pressing its button in the directory 4 Set name Enter type in t
87. one If their priority is equal then the LTP rule is used to de termine which cuelist will take precedence and determine the parameter s value A cuelist s default priority is 0 and you can assign the priority value in increments of 10 For example if the priority of the cuelist attached to Master 5 is at default 0 and the priority of that on Master 4 is 50 then a Go triggered on Master 5 will not override common parameters currently active on Master 4 Conversely you can apply a minus Flying Pig Systems Section 24 Cuelist Playback Reference priority so if the cuelist on Master 3 has a priority of 50 common parameters on Master 5 will override those on Master 3 To change a cuelist s priority 1 Open Choose Options gt Cuelist 2 Select the Playback Priority cell Priority Playback Priority q 0 b 3 Set 50 Enter change the priority to 50 Alternatively you can assign the Playback Priority for all new cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the Preferences window e Setup Preferences Cuelist In the event that two or more cuelists share the same priority level normal LTP rules are applied Persist on Override The Wholehog III automatically releases cuelists when all of their parameter contents have been overridden by other cuelists However sometimes it is useful to return to a cuelists s look when overriding cuelists have been released in this case you can use Persist on Override When this
88. one fixture from a range of fixture types for example Studio Spot 1 and Studio Color 6 e Fixture Studio Spot 575 1 Fixture Studio Color 575 6 Enter Note that selections are cumulative building the total selection until the selection is used to perform an action on the selected fixtures After that subsequent selections start from nothing unless you use or to add or subtract from the previous selection 15 1 3 Select All You can select all the fixtures in the Programmer using the All button on the Select Toolbar For example 1 Studio Colors 1 to 5 are in the Programmer but not selected 2 Main Toolbar Select open the Select Toolbar see Figure 15 2 The Select Toolbar 3 All the selection is now Studio Colors 1 to 5 Or with a key shortcut e Next Back hold down Next and press Back All Invert Random Even Odd Previous Reverse Shuffle Reorder Close Figure 15 2 The Select Toolbar 15 1 4 Inverting the Selection You can invert the current selection so that the fixtures in the editor that were previously not selected become the new selection For example 1 Studio Colors 1 to 5 are in the Programmer Flying Pig Systems 139 Reference 15 1 5 140 Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters 2 Fixture 1 3 5 select Studio Colors 1 3 and 5 Studio Colc 3 Main Toolbar Select open the Select Toolbar see Figure 15 2 The Select Toolbar 4 Invert
89. oon 350 36 SOIVICING oari edhe ives ea E EEE E EE EEES 351 36 1 Replacing Touch SCreenS 0 eee 351 36 2 Replacing FACETS 2 et 352 36 3 ClEONING FOES wcsiavicgecasiecacenayendeetacteateterendeceh panne etaventye 352 36 4 Replacing the Trackball eee 353 37 Technical Specifications 0c ccceece cee ee eee ee cece ee eee eaeeeeeeeeeeeees 355 37 1 Wholehog Ill Console wo eerie 355 37 1 1 Input ANd Output CONNECTIONS cccceec eens eens ee ees 355 37 1 2 Power Weight and DIMENSIONS cece eee 355 37 2 DMX PIOCESSOF renon reevei AEO E ad encore idee dvi ee abees 356 37 2 1 Input ANd Output CONNECTIONS cette 356 37 2 2 Power Weight and DiMeNnsions ecee eee eee 356 xii Flying Pig Systems Wholehog II 37 3 MIDI Timecode ProCeSsOr ccc 356 37 3 1 Input and Output CONNECTIONS iseer 356 37 3 2 Power Weight and DIMENSIONS cece 357 37 4 RaCkMOUNtT Control UDIT nereiidi 357 37 4 1 Input and Output CONNECTIONS iseer 357 37 4 2 Power Weight and DiMeNsIONS acccccrcccccrcrccrceco 357 37 5 Touchscreen MONITOF ccc cccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneneneaeees 357 37 5 1 Input and Output CONNECTIONS iseer 357 37 5 2 Power Weight and DIMENSIONS cece 358 S 573 PENOMMONGe sv aheresssaticisimenteri via tanita anand ead eaten es 358 38 Safety Information ccecee cece e eect eee e cece eee e sees sane eases eaeeee 359 38 1 Safety INTOMMGliOn aiora aaa
90. point from all the others on that bar then you could assign an offset so that the fixture appeared to line up from a programming and operating point of view To assign a parameter offset 1 2 Setup Patch Edit Fixtures Select the Offset cell of the desired parameter Flying Pig Systems Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures Reference 3 Set new value Enter Enter a value as a real world unit Important Applying an offset to a parameter after you have programmed values for it into your show will mean that those values will also be offset Naming Slots Some fixture parameters are continuously variable for example CMY colour mixing On the other hand some parameters for example gobo or colour wheels work in discrete increments or slots The Fixture Library loaded into the Wholehog III defines the fixture s default slots displayed on the Slot Toolbar in palettes and the Programmer When custom gobos or colours are used you can customise the show file to display a suitable name for each gobo or colour slot chosen from those in the fixture library To name a slot parameter 1 Setup Patch gt Edit Fixtures 2 For the desired fixture scroll right and select the Slot cell for the para meter required 3 Press Set select the desired slot name from the list and press Enter Releasable Parameters Fixture parameters move to their default values when they are released You can preve
91. source to the console s MIDI In port on the rear panel If you are using Linear Timecode a Connect the Linear Timecode USB Widget to the console s USB port b Connect the timecode source to the Widget s input This is a standard audio 3 pin XLR connection Setup Network open the Network window Select the console in the list Settings open the Settings window In the Timecode pane select the input and any required options see Timecode Input Options p 298 297 Reference Section 28 Working with Audio MIDI and Timecode Using a CD To use Linear Timecode recorded on a CD Place the CD in the console s CD ROM drive Setup Network open the Network window Select the console in the list Settings open the Settings window a FON p In the Timecode pane select CD as the input and assign any required options see Timecode Input Options p 298 The CD will send its timecode just like any other timecode source when it is played using the CD controls see Playing Sound from the CD ROM Drive p 292 Note that the CD audio will come out the console speakers and audio output port according to the settings in the Sound pane of the Control Panel see Working with Sound p 291 28 4 2 Timecode Input Options You can assign various options for timecode input in the Timecode LTC and VITC panes of the Settings window The general options for timecode input are Setting Default Notes Active Port No
92. store the show You cannot choose the Zip drive or the CD ROM as a storage location e The show name This can be as long as you like If you do not have a keyboard attached press Set to open an on screen keyboard e A fixture library Choose the library to use as the fixture library The library contains information about different types of fixtures that the Wholehog III needs Several library versions are available for compatab ility reasons it is best always to select the newest library when starting a new show Flying Pig Systems 103 Reference 13 7 2 104 Section 13 Using the Console Launch Existing Show Use the drop down menu to choose from a list of recently used shows and then press Launch Existing Show Alternatively use the Browse button to select from all available shows including those stored on Zip or CD ROM Connect to Show To connect to a show already running on the network select it in the Connect to Show section If no show is displayed and you are sure that a show is running on the network this could be because e your console is on the wrong network port Click on the Settings button and adjust the port number e your console has the wrong network settings Press the Control Pnl button on the Startup Toolbar at the bottom of the screen and adjust the settings in the Network pane see Setting Up the Network p 72 When multiple consoles are working together on a show then you can identify ea
93. teene een ees 21 4 3 Step 3 Starting the Console 0 eee ieens 21 4 4 Step 4 Starting a New SNOW oo cette eenenetnene eens 21 4 5 Step 5 Adding the Fixtures 0 0 ccc enter enene neni n eed 22 4 6 Step 6 Patching the Fixtures 00 teeter tere eenees 22 4 7 Step 7 Assigning Values to Parameters cece eee ee 23 4 8 Step 8 Recording the Cue wees 23 4 9 Step 9 Playing Back the CUe wo ccc neneriens 24 4 10 Step 10 Changing the Cue Time 0 cece cette terete eens 24 5 Tutorial OVE view ai a eee etecck heave de a e a a a aaa e a aaie 25 Flying Pig Systems iii Wholehog III SINKO RUCHOM aio ane tog hasnt teda dita A E 25 5 2 Using Visualisation SOf WOATS wo eerie 25 6 Setting Up the Console ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ese eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 27 6 1 Connecting and Turning On the System cece 27 6 2 Calibrating Screens and Setting Up Peripherals cecce 28 6 2 TOUCHSCICCNS a nic anar eaa AN NAE TAE AA ETA 28 6 2 2 External D SplAYS sssssssrsersrrerrerrrrrersrrrnrnnrerrrrrersrs 29 6 2 3 External Keybord irrien aa aaa nite 30 6 3 Launching A New SNOW uo ree 30 6 4 FING OUT MOP S agiterte prias a ata a 32 6 9 IF YOU GST STUCK iis antenetan inea rE N AENA weet eos 32 7 Seting Up the SNOW vipcieisasi mane ynan aaae na aa opiata eenean 35 71 Adding the Fixture 0 ee enters 35 Z 2 PATChHING NS FIMUIES ona a asuhoa wares tea a 36 7 3 Assigning User NUMDETS 0 00 eee 37 7 4 Automa
94. the I Wheel Now assign the other parameters Pan and Tilt With the fixture still selected change the Trackball to pan and tilt mode by pressing the top right Trackball button The Trackball will glow blue and you can use it to assign the pan and tilt of the fixture When you have finished press the top right button again to change the Trackball back to controlling the on screen pointer Colour Press the Colour key and you adjust the fixture s hue and saturation with the parameter wheels Press Colour again to mix using cyan magenta and yellow You can also choose specific colour slots from the Slot Toolbar on the touch screen Beam Press the Beam key You can now assign beam focus frost and so on using the parameter wheels You can select beam slots such as gobos from the Slot Toolbar 4 8 Step 8 Recording the Cue Once you have assigned values to some fixtures record a cue to a specific master for playback e Press Record then the Choose key above one of the masters The first time you record a cue onto a master the Wholehog III will create a new Cuelist on that master and record the cue as Cue 1 If you record more cues into the same cuelist the Wholehog III will give each the next free cue number Tip By default the Grand Master is on Master 1 so it is best to use a different master for your cuelist If you accidentally load a cuelist onto Master 1 you Flying Pig Systems 23 Tutorial Section 4 Quick
95. to one mode or another in the Track Ball pane of the User Preferences window 1 Setup Preferences Trackball 2 Select Pointer or Position from the drop down menu to lock the Trackball in that mode Select Toggles to restore the ability to change modes with the top right Trackball key 3 Select OK to apply and close Flying Pig Systems Section 12 Setting Up the System Reference Tip Make sure you have an external mouse connected if you lock the Trackball in position mode and you don t want to control the on screen pointer only by pressing the touchscreens Trackball Keys You can configure the function of the four keys above and below the Trackball according to the current mode pointer or position this is known as mapping For example in pointer mode you could have Right Click Left Click Flip and Ball Mode mapped in position mode you could have Flip Next Ortho Toggle and Ball Mode mapped Trackball key mapping can be assigned in the Track Ball pane of the User Preferences window see Figure 12 3 The Track Ball pane of the User Preferences window lolx Console Track Ball Appearance Mode Toggles v Sensitivity Pointer Mode Keymap Position Mode Keymap ma Key Timings Fi v Ball Mode z Flip v Ball Mode v Track Ball Edit Programming O eo Default Timing f Q Default Naming Ea y y Wheelset Editor z Ss Playback Defaults oa D _ Ler Clic
96. to see any information about your programmed show at any time and that you should be able to change that information directly if you wish to In addition to a conventional command line the Wholehog III uses a graphical user interface sim ilar to those found on personal computers Combined with the touch screens this inter face gives a very powerful alternative way of working You can arrange multiple win dows as you want them on the screens in order to display whatever information you need You do not have to write down or remember as much because the window that shows you say groups that you have programmed also allows you to select those groups simply by touching them Any object such as a cue a group or a fixture can be named as you wish for easy identification The advantages of a graphical user interface are far reaching and will become fully apparent as you get more familiar with the Wholehog III For more information see The Graphical User Interface p 83 and Working with Windows p 85 2 2 Referring to Fixtures Lighting consoles that have been primarily designed to work with conventional fixtures that have only one parameter intensity generally refer to fixtures by number These channel numbers usually run consecutively in a single sequence say from 1 to 200 and each one related to a single DMX address and so to a single dimmer With fixtures such as moving lights that have more than one parameter intens
97. using Leave In Background it is possible for the actual position of the physical master faders to be different to the master level of the cuelist For example this will happen if you have the fader at 100 while on Page 1 then go to Page 2 and Flying Pig Systems 279 Reference Section 26 Working with Pages reduce the master to 50 and then go back to Page 1 see Figure 26 2 Matching Levels when Changing Page 1 List1 Cue 1 23 Cue 2 Ss Cue 3 7s Page 1 loaded Page 2 loaded Page 1 reloaded Physical fader fader moved to master level is not moved to 100 50 matched to matched to master physical fader level Figure 26 2 Matching Levels when Changing Page If this happens the master level of the cuelist will be shown on the Playback Bar in blue together with a red dot showing the physical fader position To rematch the levels move the fader until it is at the same level as the blue bar at this point the fader will take control of the cuelist master level in the normal way 26 2 3 Restoring Activity When Changing Pages You can trigger cues to go and assign masters to specific fader levels when changing page by using Restore Activity To do this you capture the desired activities as a macro which is later executed when the page is loaded To capture page activity 1 Page Open open the Page Directory 2 Go to the desired page and assign the page activity you can playback cuelists and scenes
98. which completely re places the software rather than just upgrading parts that have changed in the new release This isn t recommended unless you have been having problems with the console and you have been advised to do a clean install by Flying Pig Systems support staff gt gt Important Before installing new software ensure that your show data is backed up A Full Install will erase all data on the console s hard drive To do a clean install Flying Pig Systems 343 Appendices Section 34 Upgrading and Care of the Console First ensure that your data stored on the hard drive is backed up onto CD or Zip disk See Backing Up p 108 Restart the console holding down the Pig key until a boot menu ap pears Place the software CD ROM in the console s drive and close it Use the Up and Down arrow keys to select Full Install in the menu and then press Enter The installation will occur without further user interaction Note that it will take several minutes to complete Occasionally it may also be necessary to update the console s BIOS which is the software stored in memory that starts the console up This can also be done by selecting an option from the boot menu which will read the BIOS from a CD ROM You should only do this when explicitly instructed and care should be taken to follow all directions as an improper BIOS installation can leave the console unusable 34 1 3 Updating the DMX Processor Software No
99. y z while trying to connect You need to update the Connectivity Application Check www flyingpig com for the latest version 8 No visible fixture output in the visualiser Check that the console Grand Master is up Cycle the Blind key to assert the contents of the Programmer 9 WYSIWYG displays Could not connect the following consoles Wholehog III DP Check that the Wholehog ITI DP window indicates it is connected to the console and is running Check that the address in the Properties window on WYSIWYG matches the DMX Processor in your Wholehog III show and that another device is not already connected to that number 10 WYSIWYG Autofocus does not appear to function Check that the Wholehog III show is using a version 2 5 or greater fixture library Check with Cast regarding the WYSIWYG fixture libraries 30 5 Visualiser Support Contacts ESP Vision www esp vision com support htm WYSIWYG Cast www castlighting com cast software support jsp Flying Pig Systems 319 Section 31 The Fixture Builder The fixture builder enables users the ability to create their own fixture libraries from scratch or from existing libraries within the console The fixture builder should only be used in extreme cases when a new library is needed and there is no time to contact High End Systems support Generally it is best that you contact support flyingpig com to request properly built fixture libraries The fixture builder utility is on
100. you move or copy a palette from location 3 to location 4 references to the palette still refer to it in its new location not to another palette you put in location 3 17 6 17 6 1 172 Record Options Palette Contents Global Per Fixture Type and Per Fixture When you record a palette parameter values can be recorded as global per fixture type or per fixture The three kinds work in different ways when you apply the palette to fixtures during programming e Global the palette s parameter values are applied to all selected fixtures that have that parameter For example a colour palette containing hue and saturation parameters is applied to all selected fixtures that have hue and saturation Per Fixture Type the palette s parameter values are applied to all fixtures of that type For example a palette containing parameter values for Studio Color 575s will only be applied to selected Studio Color 575s Flying Pig Systems Section 17 Working with Palettes Reference e Per Fixture the palette s parameter values are applied only to those specific fixtures that are both in the palette and selected in the editor For example a palette containing parameter values for Studio Color 575 1 will only be applied to that fixture and only then if it is selected By default the following rules determine how the palette is recorded 1 Position palettes are always recorded Per Fixture 2 Ifall the fixtures to be recorded h
101. 110 button 3 C calibration colour 16 148 calibration of touch screens 64 Capture Activity 280 CD ROM using with timecode 298 CD ROM drive 103 106 audio playback 291 creating a CD 110 ejecting a disk 108 changing the current show 107 chases configuring playback controls 287 setting rate with Tap Sync 264 using cuelist as 262 Choose key 241 242 265 cleaning faders 352 front panel 345 touch screens 345 clock console 70 102 Clone 17 clone see copying fixture parameter values cloning patching 127 CMY 15 CMY colour 147 Collapse Aggregated Sections 93 colour modifying values 145 146 colour calibration 16 148 colour matching 14 148 colour models 15 147 Colour Picker 16 149 colour scheme 64 colour temperature 16 command line 5 100 syntax 100 comment macro see macro compact mode spreadsheets 91 console 379 clean software install 343 reporting problems 349 technical specification 355 updating software 343 consoles multiple on the network 11 74 Control Panel 63 Displays 65 Keyboard 69 70 Network 74 104 Printers 70 System Info 349 Time and Date 70 copy 94 scene master 265 copying cuelists 223 cuelists to pages 281 cues 195 effects 240 fixture parameter values 153 fixtures 118 groups 164 inhibitive masters to pages 281 pages 283 palettes 171 parameter values into an editor 182 scenes 227 scenes to pages 281 shows 107 creating cue
102. 2 2 then the value from the most recently activated master will override the value from previously activated masters Parameters that are only pro grammed into a single master will remain at that value When you release the most recently activated master control will be returned to the previ ously activated master Alternatively you can assert a previously activ ated master s parameters so that they override the most recently activated master see Asserting One Scene Over the Others p 269 You can prevent an LTP parameter from being overridden by master actions or asser tions by giving its scene a high playback priority see Changing a Scene s Priority p 270 Tip Z The Programmer or the current editor with blind mode off will always have priority over all masters and virtual masters Using HTP and LTP You can switch a scene s precedence from LTP to HTP allowing intensity parameters that have programming to be output at their highest level rather than the most recently activated level For example when touring with smoke machines you may wish to manually boost the level of smoke by creating a smoke scene with smoke levels higher than those programmed into the main cuelist to combat changes in air conditioning or venue size at specific points in the show For a full explanation of LTP see HTP and LTP p 9 To assign a scene s precedence to HTP 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Scene 2 Select Use HTP Properties
103. 2 3 The Track Ball pane of the User Preferences WINdGOW cccceeeeeee teens 67 12 4 The On screen KEYDOAI 0 EEE trie 70 12 5 The Printers Pane of the Control Panel eect teenie eenees 70 12 6 A Typical Network with Several DMX Processors ccceceseseeeseseeeeeeeeeeees 73 12 7 The Network pane of the Control Panel sssssssrssrrererrrrrrrirrrersrrrererrre 75 12 8 The Network WINKOW 0 UE EEE OEE EL EE Erbe 76 12 9 The LEDs on a DMX PLOCESSOF ccc 80 12 10 Docking Playback Bars with wings and external displays ee 8 12 11 The Wings pane of the Control Panel ened 8 13 1 The Window Control TOOIDO r 0 i o 86 13 2 The View TOOIDOM ticisisecigetassencungetnateluerancendyartecaeed a a bait vecneds 88 13 3 The Views Directory scsccivcccgessracivs Geneon eatatevental sce A ea daa i a 88 13 4 The Views Directory in Spreadsheet VIEW ss ssisrierrerrersrrrerrrrnrrrrrerre 90 13 5 A spreadsheet with and without Compact Mode s sssssserisrrersrrrerera 92 13 6 A Spreadsheet with Aggregation Turned ON 0 eect tte e teeter ernie 93 13 7 An Aggregated Spreadsheet With Collapsed ROWS ccceeceeeee teen 93 13 3 Ihe Jump OOM OM cerae e E a N vee oe Uae UO OENE darts 94 13 9 A Typical Directory ss ssssssenrerrerstrrtrn tiniti trr t orr EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE PEPEES EEEE 95 13 10 A Typical Directory in Spreadsheet VIEW ssssssssrsersrrerrrrrrrrersrrrrrerrre 96 13 11 The Default Naming pane of the Use
104. 20 1 2 Delay Time You can create a delay between the cue being triggered and the fade times beginning to execute by assigning the Delay time 1 List 1 Open open the cuelist 2 Select the cue s Delay cell and press Set Flying Pig Systems 207 Reference Section 20 Working with Cue Timing and Ordering 3 5 Enter enter the delay time As with fade times you can assign separ ate delay times for the incoming and outgoing parts of the cue for ex ample 3 5 Alternatively you can use the command line pressing the Time key twice to assign the delay time e Cue 2 Time Time 5 Enter Tip Z Note that the Delay time should not be confused with the Wait time see Working with Cue Triggers 0 216 20 1 3 Paths Paths determine the way parameter values change during a cue For example with the simplest linear path an intensity parameter travels from its start value to its end value at a steady rate for the duration of the cue The paths available are shown in Figure 20 2 Path Types To select a path for a cue 1 List 1 Open open the Cuelist window 2 Select the cue s Path cell and press Set The Crossfade Paths window will open 3 Select the path type required for the incoming and outgoing parts of the cue 4 Press OK Tip The shape of the paths described above applies when the cue is asserted When it is released the path is effectively reversed For example attributes with a Start path will
105. 20mm 1A T fuses IDI In Out and Thru 5 pin DIN Fully compliant Musical Digital Interface input and output ports RS232 9 pin male D type VITC in amp out BNC Vertical interval Time Code input and output ports LTC in amp out Neutrik 3 pin XLR female in amp male out Linear Time Code input and output ports Ethernet RJ45 Fully compliant 10base T or 100base TX Ethernet port 356 Flying Pig Systems Section 37 Technical Specifications Appendices 37 3 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power 10W Weight 1 2Kg Dimensions 480mm w x 118mm d x 45mm h 1U 19 inch rack compatible 37 4 Rackmount Control Unit 37 4 1 Input and Output Connections Mains in IEC 320 connector 5A 250V rated cable supplied 100 240V 50 60Hz 1A maximum 2 x 5x20mm 5A T fuses Other connections and layout are exactly the same as for the Wholehog III console see Wholehog III Console p 355 37 4 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power 60W Weight 3 7Kg Dimensions 483mm w x 349mm d x 45mm h 1U 19 inch rack compatible 37 5 Touchscreen Monitor 37 5 1 Input and Output Connections Mains in External Power Supply with IEC 320 connector 100 240V 50 60Hz 1 5A maximum Analogue video in 15 pin double density D type Digital video in DVI D connector USB Type B USB input socket Flying Pig Systems 357 Appendices 37 5 2 37 5 3 358 Section 37 Technical Specifications Power Weight and Dimensions Power
106. 215 deleting cuelists 222 cues 194 desktop views 90 effects 240 fixtures from groups 163 groups 163 link cues 218 pages 283 palettes 171 scenes 226 shows 107 deselecting fixtures 141 desk channels 5 117 desk lights 66 desktop views 88 deleting 90 naming 88 options 89 recalling 89 recording 88 DHCP 73 77 DHCP server 74 direct palettes 94 177 directories 94 automatic naming of items 96 default item names 96 directory see folders discrete parameter values see slots Display playback wings 80 displays 64 displays external 65 DMX 11 DMxX address 13 122 DMxX Processor 11 72 adding for patching 122 backlight off time 79 IP address 77 locking the controls 78 Flying Pig Systems mains power 76 multiple 74 Net number 77 port number 78 resetting 79 selecting when patching 122 status 79 technical specification 356 updating software 344 using 76 watchdog 79 DMX universe 122 E Edit button 99 and the command line 100 Edit Fixtures window 133 editing cue contents 196 cue timings 208 effects 233 239 group contents 163 palette contents 169 parameter timings in cues 210 scene contents 227 Editor Toolbar 99 Editor Values Toolbar 98 editors 98 bringing in values from onstage 179 clearing the contents of 159 locking 99 which is the current editor 102 Effect Directory 94 effects 229 can can 229 circle 229 copying 240 de
107. 264 29 1 Macro Commands Macros are text commands that you type or place into a macro cell the syntax used is the same in each case Controlling Masters Macro Syntax Example Comments Go Master GM master cue GM1 3 Use for the current chosen master If you omit the cue number the next cue will Go Go Master GM range GM2 gt 7 Go next cue on a range of masters Halt Master HM master or range HM1 3 HM2 gt 7 Assert Master AM master or range AM1 AM2 gt 7 Release Master RM master or range RM1 RM2 gt 7 Fade Master FM master level FM2 50 Fades Master 2 to 50 Choose Master CM CM1 Flying Pig Systems 303 Reference 304 Section 29 Automating the Console Using Macros Controlling Cuelists Macro Syntax Example Comments Go Cuelist GL list cue GL1 5 GL2 5 If you omit the cue number the next cue will Go Halt Cuelist HL list HL1 6 Assert Cuelist AL list AL10 Release Cuelist RL list RL4 7 9 Controlling Scenes Macro Syntax Example Comments Go Scene GS scene GS12 Halt Scene HS scene HS4 Assert Scene AS scene AS1 Release Scene RS scene RS6 20 Controlling Pages and Views Macro Syntax Example Comments Change Page CP page CP3 Recall View RV view RV2 Controlling the CD ROM drive Macro Syntax Example Comments Go CD GCD track GCD3 Plays the console s build in CD player You can specify a track number oth erwise the
108. 4 5 Drum Riser Specials Group e Technobeams 6 8 Guitar Specials Group e Studio Spots 1 5 Vocals Specials Group e Inner Studio Colors 3 8 e Outer Studio Colors 1 2 9 10 e All Screen desk channels To record a group 1 Fixture 1 Thru 3 select the desired fixtures in the Programmer 2 Record Group the Group Directory window opens 3 Select a location in the Group Directory window by pressing the on screen button see Figure 8 4 The Group Directory Alternatively enter a number for the group on the keypad and press Enter Flying Pig Systems 43 Tutorial Section 8 Programming Fixtures W Group Directory lol x Saa Desk Channel 13 14 All Studio Odd Studio Color 575 Color 575 Color 575 Figure 8 4 The Group Directory Tip S You can name your group by pressing Set directly after recording it or later by pressing Set together with the group you wish to name in the Group Dir ectory window To use groups to select fixtures during programming use the Group key on the console or the buttons in the Group directory window e Group 1 Enter selects group 1 into the Programmer e All Studio Color 575 Enter selects the group All Studio Color 575 into the Programmer 8 3 Assigning Values to Parameters Fixture parameters are accessed through the parameter type keys Intensity Position Colour and Beam When you select a fixture its intensity can be directly assigned by using the l Wh
109. 45 10 Strobe Shutter 255 open The number of DMX entries needs to be increased for this channel 1 Select the Channel cell for channel 10 2 Press the New DMX Entry button to add an additional DMX entry for channel 10 3 Repeat the above until there are 8 channel entries for this channel Define each DMX entry for Strobe 1 Select the function cell for a blank DMX Entry of channel 10 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories Flying Pig Systems 333 Appendices 10 11 12 Section 31 The Fixture Builder Select Intensity on the left column to display a list of Intensity function sub categories Select Strobe as the desired function The window will close and you will see Strobe assigned as the function for channel 10 Note the feature column will auto fill with Shutter Select the DMX value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the DMX value for the Open Shutter according to the DMX protocol 0 and press Enter Select the Real World value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set A dialog box will display a list of shutter options Select the open shutter option and press Enter Repeat the above steps for the closed shutter ability of the fixture Select the function cell for a blank DMX Entry of channel 10 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories Select Intensity on the left column to display a list of Intensity function sub
110. 52 Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters Untouched values appear in the editor with a white backgound Once you have touched parameter values they are available for recording in the same way as any value that you have assigned They are shown with a blue background indicating that they have been modified Using Pig Touch You can bring parameter values into an editor without touching them using Pig Touch As the parameters haven t been touched they won t be recorded as part of the contents of the editor This can be useful if you want to have the parameter values in the editor in order to copy them to other fixtures For example to copy parameter values from fixtures 1 5 that are on stage to fixtures 6 10 in the current editor 1 1 Thru 5 Pig Touch select the fixtures 1 5 and bring their onstage values into the editor without touching them Magenta Yellow 2 Copy 6 Thru 10 Enter copy the parameter values to fixtures 6 10 151 88 i open open open open Flying Pig Systems Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters Reference 3 Record the contents of the editor is recorded with only fixtures 6 10 not 1 5 If the above example had used Touch instead of Pig Touch then you would have to untouch or knockout 1 5 before recording Tip Values with a dark or light blue background in the Programmer or editor are recordable while those with a white or gray ba
111. 56 3 A Tearful 1 A Happy Seq 2 A Tragic Sc 4 Scene 4 ie A Tragic S 2s Scene4 5 13 A Tearful 2s Figure 25 1 The Playback Bar Above the masters is a status bar on screen giving feedback for each master see Fig ure 25 1 The Playback Bar For a scene it displays e The scene name and time e If the scene has been released then is displayed e The master level as a percentage If the master is below 100 then a red bar appears indicating the level It is possible for the position of the physical fader to be different to the master level of the scene in which case the vertical bar will be blue see Matching Levels When Changing Page p 279 e Any options set for the scene The symbols used are shown below Symbol Description The scene is working under the HTP rule The scene is set to Persist on Override See Changing a Scenes Priority 0 270 The scene is set to Release on Other Go See Releasing on Another Go p 268 The scene has a high priority See Changing a Scenes Priority 0 270 The scene has a low priority See Changing a Scene s Priority 0 270 The scene uses the master as an IPCB fader See IPCB Fader Mode p 275 ogooqoos 274 Flying Pig Systems Section 25 Scene Playback Reference 25 5 Advanced Scene Playback 25 5 1 Overriding Rate During Playback You can alter the fade rate timings of the currently chosen scene in two w
112. 65535 0 540 273 Pan Pan 0265535 O gt 540 1415 Tilt Tilt 0265535 O 270 45 Tilt Tilt 0265535 O 270 6 UNUSED Define 16 bit channels for Pan and Tilt 1 Select the channel cell for Channel 2 and press Set Enter 2 3 to indicate that channels 2 and 3 combine to create a single 16 bit fixture 2 Select the channel cell for Channel 3 and press Set Enter 2 3 to indicate that channels 2 and 3 combine to create a single 16 bit fixture 3 Repeat the above for channels 4 and 5 Configure Pan and Tilt Functions 1 Select the function cell for the first 2 3 channel and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories 2 Select Position on the left column to display a list of Position function sub categories 330 Flying Pig Systems Section 31 The Fixture Builder Appendices 3 Select Pan as the desired function The window will close and you will see pan assigned as the function and feature for channel 1 Note the feature column will auto fill with Pan 4 Select the DMX value cell for channel 2 3 and press Set Enter the DMX values range for the intensity channel 0 gt 65535 and press Enter 5 Select the Real World value cell for channel 2 3 and press Set Enter the Real World value to be displayed in degrees 270 gt 270 and press Enter This real world value will map the 540 degrees of movement across the DMX range so the middle of the range 32768 is equal to 0 Note that you could instead
113. 8 Fixture 117 129 Fixture Patch 122 Fixture Schedule 117 Fixture View by DP view 125 Launched Processes 347 Levels View 260 moving 86 opening 85 Output 259 Parked Output 187 pinning 86 resizing 86 scrolling contents 87 Show Manager 106 spreadsheets 90 Wings 80 wings playback 80 257 with state 201 WYSIWYG visualiser software 309 Z Zip drive 103 106 ejecting a disk 108 Flying Pig Systems
114. 8 4 1 Advertencia Para Protecci n Continua Contra Incendios e Este equipo debe conectarse a un circuito que tenga una protecci n m xima contra las sobrecargas de 20 A 38 4 2 Advertencia Para La Protecci n Continua Contra Electrocuciones 1 Si se recibi este equipo sin el enchufe de alimentacion monte usted el enchufe correcto seg n el clave siguente e moreno vivo e azul neutral e verde amarillo tierra Flying Pig Systems 361 Appendices Section 38 Safety Information 2 Desconecte el suministro de energ a antes de prestar servicio de repara ci n 3 Este equipo se adecua a lugares secos solamente no lo exponga a la lluvia o humedad 4 Derive el servicio de reparaci n de este equipo al personal calificado El interior no contiene repuestos que puedan ser reparados por el usuario 5 Equipo de Clase I Este equipo debe conectarse a la tierra 38 5 Importanti Informazioni Di Sicurezza 38 5 1 Avvertenza Per Prevenire Incendi e Questa apparecchiatura e da collegarsi ad un circuito con una pro tezzione da sovraccarico massima di 20 amperes 38 5 2 Avvertenza Per Prevenire Le Scosse Elettriche 1 Se questa apparecchiatura stata consegnata senza una spina del cavo di alimentazione collegare la spina appropriata del cavo di ali mentazione in base ai seguenti codici e marrone sotto tensione e blu neutro e verde giallo terra 2 Disinnestare la corrente prima di eseguire qualsiasi ripara
115. 94 for fine control of parameter values 151 list of commands 341 to unpark parameters 187 when using desktop views 89 when using directories 94 with the I Wheel 143 pile add effects 254 pile add Effects 272 pinning windows 86 playback 9 configuring controls 287 cuelists 241 scenes 265 using pages 277 Playback Priority 250 268 Playback Bar 256 274 279 285 Playback Priority 252 scene 270 playback wing 80 257 playbacks 12 point cues 192 pointer mode see Trackball Flying Pig Systems Index port number 75 104 console 73 DMxX Processor 78 position flip 144 modifying values 144 position mode see Trackball power 64 Preferences 63 Console 69 preferences loading and saving 110 preferences user 63 Prev button 140 printers adding 71 modifying 72 removing 72 setting defaults 71 priority of aggregated sections 93 priority of cuelists 252 priority of scenes 270 problems reporting 349 solving 347 processes restarting 347 Programmer contents after recording 192 Programmer the 98 137 bringing in values from onstage 179 clearing the contents of 159 proportional patch 132 protocol of fixtures 129 Q quit 106 R Rackmount Control Unit technical specification 357 Raise Priority 93 rate override 260 266 Rate Wheel 12 260 275 real world units 13 Record Options Toolbar 175 with cuelists 224 with cues 192 Flying Pig Systems
116. A parameter that effects the beam quality allowing a softening or stretching of the beam Not to be confused with beam focus where the beam edge is adjusted 367 368 digital IO dimmer curve directory DMX DMX address DMX universe DMX Processor down time editor effects engine encoder wheel Ethernet fade time Glossary The ability to control or input electrical digital signals from switch closures For example an input may originate from a motion sensor or footswitch an output may trigger a sound effect See conversion curve A window which displays palettes scenes or groups See Also palette Short for DMX 512 DMX is the communications protocol most commonly used to connect lighting consoles to fixtures and dim mers The Wholehog III creates a DMX signal via a network pro cessor A number between 1 and 512 that identifies a controllable paramet er of a fixture Each fixture or group of dimmers has a start ad dress the first of the range of DMX addresses that it uses A single DMX output with 512 channels is known as one DMX universe The Wholehog III network may support many universes each with fixture addresses between 1 and 512 See Also DMX Processor A nineteen inch rack mounted network node that distributes 1 or 4 DMX outputs There may be many DMX Processors within a lighting control network See Also node See out time A window for editing the contents of cues s
117. All selects all the fixtures currently in the Programmer See Select All p 139 e Flip changes the pan and tilt of a moving head fixture to point at the same position on the stage but from the other end of its movement range See Flip p 144 The default settings for the Trackball keys are Trackball Key Pointer Mode Position Mode top left flip flip top right ball mode ball mode bottom left left click next bottom right right click ortho toggle Trackball Parameter Wheel and l Wheel Sensitivity The sensitivity of the Trackball when in position mode the I Wheel and the Parameter Wheels can be adjusted in the Sensitivity pane of the User Preferences window The sensitivity determines how much the value being controlled changes for a given movement of the control For example setting the sensitivity of the parameter wheels to Slow will mean that you have to turn the wheel a lot to change the controlled value by a given amount A High sensitivity will mean that you have to move the wheel only a little to get the same change of value Using an External Mouse You can also use an external mouse or trackball to supplement the built in Trackball This will always control the on screen pointer irrespective of the Trackball mode The external mouse is connected by a standard PS2 5 pin mini DIN connector and you can adjust its sensitivity in the Sensitivity pane of the User Preferences window The Flying Pig Systems
118. Cues p 194 Important Using Renumber will affect the number column and numeric entries in the Name column Also renumber will not rewrite macros or links that refer to renumbered cues you will need to update these manually 19 6 Editing Cue Contents You can edit the contents of a cue in an editor window see Figure 19 1 The Cue Editor window To open the current cue of the chosen master e Cue Open e Cue Cue To open a specific cue in a specific cuelist for example Cue 2 of Cuelist 1 1 Open List opens the Cuelist Directory window 2 Open Cuelist 1 opens the Cuelist window for Cuelist 1 3 Open Cue 2 opens the Cue Editor for Cue 2 196 Flying Pig Systems Section 19 Working with Cues Reference Alternatively using the command line e List1 Cue 2 Open You can also preview a cue using View Cue in the Cuelist window however you will need to press the Edit button in the Cue Editor window to select this as your current editor in order to make any changes If the cue to be edited is on stage selecting Edit will enable blind mode until changes are updated or Edit is deselected see Blind p 186 You can leave the mode otherwise by pressing the Blind key ioi x y Follow Follow Mis Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table NShots Source Current Next Nest T Show Show Fade ali Technobeam Studio E Palettes Changes Copaci Iris Color 575 l ntensity Stobe Bos
119. Direct Palettes Normally when you use a palette to assign parameter values for recording in a cue or scene a reference to the palette is inserted rather than numerical values To insert nu merical values instead of references use direct palettes Cues and scenes recorded using direct palettes will not update if the palette is later changed because they contain ordin ary parameter values rather than references to a palette You can use a palette as a direct palette on a one off basis as you programme or you can assign it to always act as a direct palette a direct palette is shown by a symbol in the directory window To temporarily use an existing palette as a direct palette when calling it into the Pro grammer or editor e 1 Colour 1 the key indicates that the palette should be used in direct mode To create a direct palette 1 Assign the fixtures as required 2 Record More the More button is on the Record Options Toolbar at the bottom of the right hand screen As Direct 4 Position 2 Enter choose a location for the palette To convert an existing palette to a direct palette 1 Open Colour open the appropriate Palette Directory button 2 Set the directory window to spreadsheet view by pressing the Flying Pig Systems 177 Reference Section 17 Working with Palettes 3 Select the Is Direct cell for the palette you want to change and press Set to toggle the value to Yes Note that convert
120. EE aAa 161 16 1 1 NAMING A Group oo n eene iene 162 16 2 Using Groups in ProgrammMing 0 0 0 e tenet a 162 16 3 Editing Group COntents eerie 163 16 3 1 Removing Fixtures from Group cceeeeeeee teeter een es 163 16 4 Deleting Group 0 nn eee 163 16 5 Copying and MOVING GrOUPS 0 eet eee o 164 16 6 Insert Merge and REPIOCE oo rere 164 17 Working with Palettes cceeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeee eee eee eee esenseeseeeenes 167 17 1 Recording a Palette ccc 168 17 1 1 Naming a Palette ea 168 17 2 Using Palettes in Programming socccccccccrccrccrcrccnnn 169 17 3 Editing Palette Contents cccccrcccrcccrcrcrrcrnnc 169 17 3 1 Updating Palettes with Different Parameter MOES eon aia tended a a a i a a aal ea RaR 170 17 4 Deleting Palettes 0 0 renter 171 17 5 Copying and Moving Palettes eerie a 171 17 6 Record OPTIONS s ssssssssrenrerrttrtrrtrt trantit titr rt trt r nrinn nrrtnrnna 172 17 6 1 Palette Contents Global Per Fixture Type and Per EDT gna aE EE NOE EE N A E A E eal arenes 172 17 6 2 Recording with Specified Masking cccccccccccccccrcs 174 17 6 3 Palette TIMING etter ee ene a 176 17 6 4 Reference Palettes c eee 176 17 6 5 Direct Palette its sear tiare eenen E vane cnet 177 17 7 Insert Merge ANd Replace n e 178 18 Advanced Programming ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ness eeeeeeneneneees 179 18 1 Selecting from What is ONSTAGE eect ee ete ee eee en es 179 18 2 Bringing Parameter
121. End of List menu in the Cuelist pane of the Preferences window e Setup Preferences Cuelist Resetting Cuelists on Release You can assign a cuelist to reset when released so it will proceed from the first cue when Go is pressed again You can assign Reset on Release in the Playback Options window of each cuelist 1 Open Choose Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Reset on Release Pile add Etlects x d va Reset On Release ps f Vitia Nnlu Alternatively you can turn on Reset on Release for all new cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the Preferences window e Setup gt Preferences gt Cuelist Releasing on Another Go When running several cuelists in a show see Running Multiple Cuelists p 250 you may want a cuelist to release when another cuelist is triggered This effectively gives the cuelist the lowest possible playback priority for more on playback priority see Changing a Cuelist s Priority p 252 You can set Release on Other Go in the Playback Options window of each cuelist 1 Open Choose Options gt Cuelist 246 Flying Pig Systems Section 24 Cuelist Playback 24 1 4 Flying Pig Systems Reference 2 Select Release on Other Go Playback Priority q 9 gt On Override L A Release On Other Go Alternatively you can turn on Release on Other Go for all new cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the Preferences window e Setup Preferences Cuelist Cuelist O
122. G CUES rie 194 19 4 COPYING CUES irisse o nee esis ak aces eee eee 195 19 4 2 MOVING CUES neea et erpina neers 195 19 5 Renumbering Cues within a Cuelist cece eeeee eens 195 19 6 Editing Cue CONTENTS eccerre eerie ted 196 19 6 1 Viewing Different Cues in the Editor c eee 197 19 7 Working With TrACKING 1 0 eerie 198 19 7 1 Tracking Values Backwards When Recording 198 19 7 2 Stopping Values from Tracking Forward ccce 199 19 7 3 Stopping Changes from Tracking Forward when DEISTING CCUG Smit in nediats ina dyat satis vba mielautn shuteeoes Ghntaeloatintten 200 19 7 4 Blocking Cues iis nests pacetitaven techies encvedes pegeadaacntite tes 201 19 7 D URBIOCKING naisinime Beata ein eel waar aes 202 20 Working with Cue Timing and Ordering eeeeeeeeeeeee eens 205 20 1 Working with Fade TIMINGS 0 0 cert tnene eens 206 2041 Fade TIME Ariea ieee ened hing eae anaes eae 206 20 1 2 Delay TIME is sent asa aeaiia ee an A vale la heii 207 2013 POMS stein cane aaa tits ar Mee nd cea aee cages clang 208 20 1 4 Assigning Cue Timings in the Cuelist Window 208 20 2 Individual Parameter TIMINGS eet 210 20 2 1 Assigning Parameter Timings with the Parameter WNES ar inea i E indy antag deat inatenatiates incr iiaut tated 211 20 2 2 Assigning Parameter Timings with the Command LING wai ct tanar aiao ATN E ENA A T a orb aga ceed 212 20 2 3 Assigning Parameter Timings in an Editor Win G
123. M 5 30 FPS 25FPS 24 Frs Figure 20 10 The Trigger Toolbar The trigger options are Halt When the cuelist reaches a Halt it stops executing cues and waits for the Go key to be pressed A Halt is shown by an empty Wait cell and it is the default cue trigger Wait The Wait time is the time between the triggering of the previous cue either automatically or by pressing Go and the next cue to be triggered It should not be confused with the Delay which is the time between the cue being triggered after a Wait if there is one and the fade starting The Wait time schedules cues within the cuelist whereas the Delay time schedules the fades of each parameter within the cue A cue can contain multiple Delay times but it can only have one Wait time See Figure 20 1 Cue timings A waitr is displayed as the time value in the Wait cell Follow A follow will trigger the next cue once the previous cue has completed all its fade and delay times You can enter a time after pressing the Follow button which determines the time between the previous cue completing and the follow cue being triggered See Fig ure 20 1 Cue timings The follow is displayed in the Cuelist window as Follow time The follow time should not be confused with the wait time The follow time controls the time between the end of one cue and the triggering of the next while the wait time controls the time between the triggering of one cue and the
124. MX Processor Figure 12 9 The LEDs on a DMX Processor 12 4 80 Adding Playback Wings You can increase the number of physical masters by adding up to four Playback Wings to the console Once connected a Playback Bar appears for that wing which you can dock at the bottom of the nearest external display to aid identification during playback see Figure 12 10 Docking Playback Bars with wings and external displays To attach a Playback Wing connect it to the console via a free USB port the console will automatically recognize the connection of anew wing You can then view and configure connected wings via the Wings pane of the Control Panel window see Figure 12 11 The Wings pane of the Control Panel e Setup gt Control Panel gt Wings There are three options for each wing Beacon flashes the Choose LEDs for easy identification the wing e Remove allows disconnected wings and their cuelist allocations to be forgotten by the console It will not appear until the wing is unplugged e Display allows you show or hide the wing s Playback Bar Flying Pig Systems Section 12 Setting Up the System Reference Playback bar for External display Masters 11 20 Playback bar for Masters 1 10 LZ PO Playback wing Wholehog III console Masters 11 20 Masters 1 10 Figure 12 10 Docking Playback Bars with wings and external displays iix Wings S m Displays 4 Type Serial Num
125. MX uni Ethernet switch MX universes Oo O000 DMX Processor 2 Figure 12 6 A Typical Network with Several DMX Processors Connecting and Configuring More Complex Networks If you have a more complex network with more than one console or with items other than DMX Processors connected you will need to use an Ethernet switch and certified Category 5 non crossover Ethernet cables to connect them together In such a system you may need to manually configure the network settings You will find basic guidance here but if you are planning a complex network please contact Flying Pig Systems for advice on getting the most effective setup for your particular needs There are three main settings involved in a network Flying Pig Systems 73 Reference 74 Section 12 Setting Up the System e The Net Number identifies a DMX Processor on the network and is used when Patching Fixtures p 122 The IP Address identifies any device console DMX Processor switch personal computer on the network A network device can have its IP address assigned by the user known as a static address or it can obtain one automatically from a DHCP server By default consoles act as DHCP servers giving IP addresses to DMX Processors e The Port Number identifies information transmitted across the network A DMX Processor will only respond to information sent by a console with the same port number Tip The maxim
126. Master Cuelist LB OD 04 DA Jeee p Play Leam View Enable Follow Fo Options Controls Timing Cue Timecode Cue Chi Number Wait _ Name Comment The controls are from left to right the Go Halt Back Skip Back Skip Forward and Release buttons These function in the same way as their front panel equivalents see The Main Controls p 243 24 3 3 Running Virtual Masters from the Command Line To run a cuelist on a virtual master from the command line Flying Pig Systems List 1 Enter sends a Go command to cuelist 1 255 Reference Section 24 Cuelist Playback 24 4 Understanding Feedback for Cuelists There are several ways in which you can tell the status of the console s output e The status of masters is shown by the playback control key LEDs and the on screen Playback Bar e You can use a cuelist window to follow the progress of running cuelists e The total output of all fixtures parameter values is shown in the Output window and the total output of all fixture s intensities is shown in the Levels View window 24 4 1 Control and Playback Toolbar Feedback Playback Control LEDs The LEDs of the playback controls give information about the cuelist s status e Go key Green When solidly lit this indicates that a fade is in progress When flashing it indicates that a fade has been paused e Halt Back key Red When solidly lit this indicates that this playback is controlling parameters
127. Modifying Parameters The Nudge Up and Nudge Down keys above and below the l Wneel can be used to increase and decrease the intensity by a preset amount The size of the increment is 10 by de fault but you can change it in the Programming pane of the User Preferences window Remainder Dim The Rem Dim button on the Main Toolbar takes to zero the intensity of any unselected fixtures in the current editor that currently have above zero intensity You can use the Undo button to reverse the Rem Dim command Position Using the Trackball To switch the Trackball from controlling the cursor to controlling fixture position press the top right selection key adjacent to the Trackball When controlling fixture position the Trackball will glow blue and can be used in two modes To change mode press the bottom right Trackball selection key e Position Mode In the default mode the pan and tilt of the fixture follows the movement of the Trackball e Ortho Mode Ortho mode helps the accurate positioning of fixtures by constraining pan while changing tilt or vice versa The Status Bar at the right hand end of the Command Line Toolbar shows when the Trackball is in Position Mode with the legend POS and when it is in Ortho Mode with the legend POS ortho You can assign the way that fixtures move in relation to the Trackball See Inverting and Swapping Pan and Tilt Axes p 131 Tip An external mouse will always control the graphi
128. Number The Net Number is displayed on the main screen of the DMX Processor in the top right hand corner To assign the Net Number 1 Main Network navigate to the Network Configuration screen 2 Assign the Net Number to any value between 01 and 99 3 OK return to the Main screen Checking and Setting the IP Addresses By default DMX Processors are set to use DHCP to get an IP address automatically from a Wholehog III console You can turn this off in the IP Config screen 1 Main Network IP Status IP Config navigate to the IP Config screen Set DHCP On or Off OK return to the IP Status screen Close return to the Network Configuration screen OK return to the Main screen Main Control Panel navigate to the Control Panel NOD oR WON Hard Reset the DMX Processor needs a hard reset for changes to take effect You may want to assign a fixed or static IP address perhaps if the Wholehog III system is sharing a network with non lighting devices such as personal computers You should contact your system administrator to determine the optimum settings for your network To assign a static IP address Flying Pig Systems 77 Reference 12 3 3 78 Section 12 Setting Up the System 1 Main Network gt IP Status IP Config navigate to the IP Config screen Set DHCP Off Set the IP Address and Subnet Mask as required OK return to the IP Status screen Close ret
129. OMMON Sins ccretss an a opgiet EE AEE E a E A aE neg RA 242 24 2 The Main Playpack Controls ss sssssssrrsrsrrirrrnrnnrrnrnrrerrerirrnernrrnerera 243 24 3 The Cuelist Pane of the Playback Options WINdOW s ssssessereererrerrrrre 247 24 4 The Playpack BAr m nte erate et auena bade ged bade ETEA a Eaa E Danan aya 256 24 5 The Cuelist Window with a Cue RUNNING teeters 258 24 6 THE QuTpUT WING OW niire iaee a T E E E A E E 259 24 7 The Levels View WINKOW sscsccscceiiiiiiii iE 260 Z5 A TNE Playback Barsi annae eio aun kni d DEEE a ESOR DEE anid 274 26 1 The Misc pane of the User Preferences WINKOW ssssssrsererrrrrrrrerrrrrns 279 26 2 Matching Levels when Changing PAGE cette ees 280 26 3 The Playback Bar with Master 10 loaded from the Template Page 284 26 4 The Playback Bar with the Template Page lodded cece tees 284 27 1 The display of Inhibitive Masters on the Playback Bar n se 287 27 2 The Master pane of the Cuelist OPTIONS WINGOW cccececeeeseseeeeneeees 288 27 3 The Main Controls pane of the Cuelist Options WINdOW c eee 288 28 1 The Sound panel of the Control Panel s sssssserssrsersrrnrrerrnrrersrrrerena 291 28 2 The CD Control TOODI caving cigs aa a T Ea EAE evden EEE 292 28 3 The MIDI pane of the Console Settings WINGOW sccccccccccccrcccrrcrcrco 294 28 4 The Timecode pane of the Console Settings WINdOW 1 0 0 cece 297 28 5 The Timecode TOOIDOr 0 ita 301 31 1 The Create New Cust
130. OW aae od nls Peabo eran wer eep dan san ania widen buick atten ta ae A ure LRT a 213 20 2 4 FANNE TIMINGS eerie 215 20 3 Working with Cue Triggers eter teenetene reine 216 viii Flying Pig Systems Wholehog II 20 3 Learn MING aa tan ceret stata tdatae endian tetas RA 217 20 4 Working with Loops AN LINKS 0 0 eee ener 218 20 4 1 Creating A LINK isie aeiio e tenner teeta nen en es 218 20 4 2 Creating A LOOP a ra o a a a a e A EN 218 20 4 3 Tracking Through LOOPS ccccccercccreccrcnrrrirec 220 21 Working with Cuelists eceeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 221 21 1 Creating Cue lists isror arire a ia EE E EEE ete Gence 222 212 NOMING CUGIISTS iaangat eaaa aA a a aanta 222 21 3 Deleting Cuelists aseena 222 21 4 Copying and Moving Cuelists eet 223 214 1 Copying Cuclists jaicnionieecci eves ioiii eea NRE 223 214 2 MOVING GUGIISTS ah aanita eai a aiaa 223 21 4 3 Insert Merge and REPIACE oo cece eee nen es 224 22 Working with SCENES ccceeeee cece eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee esis 225 22 1 Recording GA SCONC oi isis cotretintadiese aiieeees cos enge tenet oe einen ke 225 22 1 1 Recording to the Scene Directory eee ees 225 22 1 2 Recording to a Physical Master cece eee eeee 226 22 1 3 NAMING A SCONE oc erent 226 22 2 Deleting SCONES ci isicnddi acehivacticiirev gone EEEE EEEE enti ei eeddeuer 226 22 3 Copying ANd Moving SCENES 1 0 ee ee 227 22 4 Editing Sce
131. SCIESN wi csiceieriia r aana E eTA Ea A ETIE 27 6 2 DMX Processor SCIECNS oo EL EE Er ners 28 6 3 The Startup Window and TOOIbOr oes 28 6 4 The Calibration Sereen oo EE Ene teaE 29 6 5 The Displays Pane of the Control Panel sssssssrrsrserrerrersnrerrnrrrrrrrrrrses 29 6 6 The Keyboard Pane of the Control Panel ssssssssrerrersrrrersnrsnrrernrrrrenrs 30 Ohe Start WINGOW ressast niina Snara a AA LAE E E E 31 7 1 The Fixture Patch WINAOW cccccccccccn o ote 37 7 2 The Fixture Window SNOWING PATCHING 00 ee rinena 38 7 3 The Auto Palettes WINKOW 0 0 I EL Eire 39 8 1 The Programmer WINdOW 00 Entire 41 8 2 Ihe Command LING nasie siira Betws cde a EEE EE a nae 42 8 3 The Fixture Types TOOIDOT sssssssssrsrsnrsnrnrrt rrtt rtrt tratr rtra n rtur Pr rrun trar EErEE 42 8 4 Th Gr up Directory cread rehini annii Einara A a AES naea RouE 44 8 5 The Slot Toolbar for a Studio Color 575 wo ie 45 8 6 The Slot Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 oo a 45 8 7 The Fixture Control Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 oo etree 46 10 1 Play back Controls aii scat tnielss cate aa AERA a A EDT Ea Sion 53 11 1 The CD Burning pane of the Show Manager WiINdOW eect e eee 57 11 2 The Current Show pane of the Show Manager window cere 58 11 3 The Show Manager WINdOW sssi iee 59 11 4 The Shut Down DidlOg cecce 60 12 1 Pane lists for the Control Panel and User Preferences windows 5 63 12 2 The Calibration Scree oo EE Ener 64 1
132. Size Gobo lt gt Assigning Slotted Colour and Beam Parameters To assign slotted colour or beam parameters 1 Fixture 1 Colour select the required fixtures and parameter type 2 Gobo gt Stars Click on one of the parameter functions on the Slot Toolbar A submenu of slot positions will appear from which you can select the desired slot open triwing lava stars wavycone shatters Colour Colour 2 Strobe Gobo Gobo 2 Macro Enable Mode Control l Controlling Fixture Functions You can control fixture specific functions such as Lamp On Lamp Off and Reset from the Fixture Control Toolbar The available functions will depend on the currently selected fixture To use the Fixture Control Toolbar select a fixture or group then select Control on the right of the Slot Toolbar and select the fixture function you require Make sure that you restore the setting to Fixture Idle afterwards noting that some fixtures require control commands to be sent for a few seconds before restoring idle Fixture Idle Fixture Shutdown Fixture Global Res Lamp Strike Figure 8 7 The Fixture Control Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 Important Fixture function commands can be placed in the Programmer and recorded into cues While this is a very powerful feature it must be used with care to ensure that you don t include fixture reset commands into cues by accident for example You should also check the fixture s manual as som
133. Spot 575 on the back truss e 10x Studio Color 575M on the front truss e 8x Technobeam Iris on the back truss e 16x Desk Channels with 8 x Source 4 Parnels on each circular truss screen 5 2 Using Visualisation Software You can use visualisation software such as ESP s Vision www esp vision com or Cast Lighting s WYSIWYG www castlighting com to work through the examples in the tutorial The software allows you to directly see the effects of your actions without hanging any fixtures In fact you don t need to hang any virtual fixtures since visualiser files with the rig used in all training and examples in this section can be downloaded from the Flying Pig Systems website Flying Pig Systems 25 Section 6 Setting Up the Console Wholehog II lighting systems can be quite complex with multiple consoles DMX Processors and other devices networked together This tutorial uses a basic system of one console and one DP2000 DMX Processor 6 1 Connecting and Turning On the System 1 Connect the DMX Processor using a Category 5 cross over cable sup plied with the console An ordinary non crossover cable won t work 2 Ifyou wish connect an external keyboard mouse and displays Adding a mouse frees up the console s Trackball for positioning fixtures 3 Connect the DMX Processor and the Wholehog III console to mains power and turn on You can connect the Wholehog III to any mains supply between 100 and 240V AC After a few
134. Systems Section 13 Using the Console Reference O Programmer Value Fade Dela Path Size Rate 0 Show Fade Afa Ed Palettes gt gt Aggregation headings gt gt Figure 13 6 A Spreadsheet with Aggregation Turned On Collapsing Aggregated Sections You can collapse aggregated sections to hide all the rows in that section see Figure 13 7 An Aggregated Spreadsheet With Collapsed Rows To collapse an aggregate section right click the black heading bar and select Collapse To expand the aggregation section again right click the section s black heading bar and select Expand O Programmer E Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate Show Fade i Edt Palettes Changes IE Note Intensity Strooe_ Position Collapsed rows Figure 13 7 An Aggregated Spreadsheet With Collapsed Rows Priority of Aggregated Sections You can change the position of an aggregation section in the list by altering its priority Raising a section s priority will make it appear nearer the top of the spreadsheet To move an aggregate row up or down in priority right click the section s black header bar and then select Raise Priority or Lower Priority Flying Pig Systems 93 Reference 13 3 3 Section 13 Using the Console Jumping Between Aggregated Sections You can quickly bring aggregated sections into view using the Jump Toolbar located on the upper right of a spreadsheet
135. T Choose files to burn to the CD Browse the files to be burnt to the CD D Curent Show fq Ajbak Look In S Shows v Ew EJ Look In i cdmaster v Ew Name Description Created Name Description Created La aBio Show Hog3showtv3oaz 14737200 Q Fie Browser EA Big Show Hog3 Show v3 0 47 14 73 200 P Tutorial No Patch Tutorial Show with no pat 13 3 200 Add to CD Clear CD Master Bum ala Apply S OK X Cancel Figure 13 21 The CD Burning pane of the Show Manager window 1 Setup Preferences open the User Preferences window 2 Click on the Export button and select a location to save the preferences file to You can save directly to the console s hard disk or to a Zip disk or save to the console s hard disk for later copying to CD ROM see Copying Files to a CD ROM p 110 To load your preferences into the current show 1 Setup Preferences open the User Preferences window 2 Click on the Import button browse to the location of your preferences files and select a preferences file to import 13 9 Merging Shows Show merging allows you to take fixture types fixtures and the programming associated with fixtures from another show and merge them into your show The show currently loaded into the console is known as the current show and the show you are taking data from is called the source show You can also merge a fixture library into the current show this is use
136. The Auto Palettes Window The Auto Palettes function has a number of advanced options described in Creating Palettes and Groups Automatically p 120 Flying Pig Systems 39 Tutorial Section 7 Setting Up the Show 7 5 40 Find Out More For more information see the Reference p 61 section of the manual For Adding and Patching Fixtures See Adding a Fixture to the Show p 117 Patching Fixtures p 122 For Configuring Fixtures See Configuring Fixtures p 129 For User Numbers See Modifying the User Number p 130 For Groups See Working with Groups p 161 For Palettes See Working with Palettes p 167 Flying Pig Systems Section 8 Programming Fixtures Once you have patched the fixtures you can start building your show Despite the ease with which you can programme on the Wholehog III it is advisable to plan your show beforehand creating building blocks to speed the actual recording of cues Remember that there are many more parameters to process than just lamp intensity when tackling a moving light rig Careful creation of palettes and groups will give your plot structure and enable you build up complex layers and looks not otherwise possible All fixture manipulation takes place in editor windows see Working with Editors p 98 There are editors for cues palettes and so on but you will do your initial programming in the Programmer see Figure 8 1 The Programmer Window Open the P
137. USED ILLA P 5 Colour Slots jiss slot 61250 5 Colour Slots fiso slot 8 0 5 Colour Slots fias slot 6 12 50 5 Colour Spin 2127 75 gt 75rpm 5 Colour Slots jiao sit 312 50 5 Colour Slots fiss slot 31250 5 Colour Slots jia slot 30 5 Colour Slots fiaa slot 30 5 Colour Sits jia slot 312 50 5 Colour Slots fias slot 90 5 Colour Slots fiss slot 6 0 5 Colour Slots fias slot 50 5 Colour Slots 232 slot 3 12 50 5 Colour Sits siot 30 5 Colour Slots slot 0 5 Colour Slots slot 312 50 5 Colour Slots slot 912 50 KA New Dmx Enty Delete Dmx Enty Build Type New Dmx Enty Delete Dmx Enty Build Type Figure 31 3 The Fixture Builder window Use the fixture s DMX Protocol to edit the cells as needed to build the custom library The various cells and their uses are Type Information e Model Name the name assigned to this library e Author the author of the library e Date Modified the date of the last modification to this library Notes any notes entered by the author e DMX Footprint total number of DMX channels used by this fixture e Patchpoints total number of unique patch points and their location for this fixture e Edit press this button to edit the information about this library Channel This cell represents the DMX Channel number per the fixture s protocol Several entries for a single DMX channel may exist each defined with different functions or features Typically each DMX
138. Values Into the Programmer 0665 179 1821 SUCK eree eE ede att tate E AN teetedetacs 179 18 2 2 Using Live and TOUCH eea 181 18 2 3 Using Copy to Bring Values into an Editor acca 182 Flying Pig Systems vii Wholehog III 18 3 Highlight ANd LOWIIQNT eee 183 18 3 1 Customising Highlight 0 0 0 eee ees 184 18 3 2 EOWA piece ds oana nnd Balan caste wie AET 184 18 4 AUTO UPA Ole eiiici as nat a E EOE E EG EE AS 184 18 5 Editing Discreetly eens 186 18 5 Fade Changes arson a dna eensaaneateeteares 186 185 2 BINO eiA ee aE A E AEE inne Give O 186 18 6 POMKING se seraa anr EE AE O ENEE NEATA 187 18 6 1 Viewing and Editing What is Parked eee 187 19 Working With CUGS 2cc ccc ceccececacasdseceecvetectsencdeaetencvectseseceeteenaees 191 19 1 Recording a GUC eisrean indie eri av ded rae noe emer a 191 19 1 1 Recording to a Cuelist on a Master eee 191 19 1 2 The Contents of the Programmer after Recording a CCUG sj ecccsgieecsdeavaseagenbdewerven A ne 192 19 1 3 Insert Merge ANd REPIACE oo eect teenies 192 19 1 4 NUMBGIING Cues a sonein anir ea ATAT 192 19 1 5 NAMING CUES iendane ana ADEA EAEE neers 193 19 2 Record OPON S irr a einai e i a 193 19 2 1 Recording Selected Fixtures Only ceeeeeee trees 193 19 2 2 Removing Fixtures and Parameter Values from USS stein E E E hinstae Moons sinks daditer snes 193 19 3 DelSTiING CUES reinet tints vested eines gia aad REA 194 19 4 Copying ANd MOVIN
139. Weight Dimensions Performance Display Native resolution Input frequency Contrast ratio Viewing angle Response Brightness 45W 9 8Kg 434mm w x 238mm d x 430mm h 1U 19 inch rack compatible 17 0 Diagonal active matrix TFT LCD 1280 x 1024 31 5 80 kHz H 56 75 Hz V 450 1 typical 160 x 160 degrees typical 16 ms typical 205 cd m2 typical Flying Pig Systems Section 38 Safety Information 38 1 Safety Information 38 1 1 Warning For Continued Protection Against Fire e This equipment for connection to branch circuit having a maximum overload protection of 20 A 38 1 2 Warning For Continued Protection Against Electric Shock 1 If this equipment was received without a line cord plug attach the appropriate line cord plug according to the following code e brown live e blue neutral e green yellow earth 2 As the colours of the cores in the mains lead of this equipment may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows e the core which is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the earth symbol or coloured green or green and yellow e the core which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or col oured black e the core which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is mar
140. Windows You can open as many windows as you wish but you can only work in one at a time To work in a window make it the frontmost by clicking or pressing the touch screen within it or use the Focus button on the Window Control Toolbar The window s title bar will become bright blue to show that the window is frontmost otherwise it is dark blue Windows and toolbars can be placed any where within the console s internal touch screens or on the optional external displays You can move and resize windows using keys and buttons or by using the mouse or trackball Using Keys and Buttons The Window Control Toolbar sits at the top of the right hand touch screen and provides a quick and easy way to manipulate windows see Figure 13 1 The Window Control Toolbar Its functions are also available as key shortcuts Help Al Up F Doun El Left D gt Rion cn Size E Move EMi Focus E tock X cose Figure 13 1 Tne Window Control Toolbar 86 Flying Pig Systems Section 13 Using the Console Reference Button Function Shortcut Al ed Page Up Page Down Page Left and Page Right scroll Open cursor key the currently selected window The cursor isn t moved EI ao Size rotates through a range of set positions and sizes Open plus or minus for the selected window within its current screen The options are full screen and top bottom left and right half and quarter screens Holding down the Pig
141. You can drag these and dock them at the edge of an external display placed adjacent to the wing to make cross referencing the screen display and the physical wing playback controls easier If your external display is set to a resolution higher than 1024x768 you can drag the ends of the Playback Bar to stretch it to better align with the spacing of the controls of the wing For information on adding and setting up playback wings see Adding Playback Wings p 80 Flying Pig Systems 257 Reference 24 4 2 258 Section 24 Cuelist Playback Cuelist Feedback You can view in detail the running of the cues of a specific cuelist by opening the cuelist window see Figure 24 5 The Cuelist Window with a Cue Running e Open Choose Or e Double click the Playback Bar above the required cuelist Or e Open List 1 select the cuelist from the cuelist directory CRE 15 x Leam View Enable Follow Follow Insert View LA J Timing Cue Timecode Cue Chosen Link Renumber Timecode Name Comment Fade Delay Path Macros Blocking cue 2 5s Os No A Cue 3 Ssi7s jos No SRH Cue4 10s os No Cue 5 2s 5s los M Cue 6 2s 3s 5s 4s 0s No A v Figure 24 5 The Cuelist Window with a Cue Running The current cue is displayed with an arrow in the wait column of the cuelist when triggered the arrow turns green and the letter R for Running is displayed the cue s
142. Z lot off open OHZ lot yellow OHZ ellow OHZ 0 0 100 EZA 0 100 Figure 17 6 A Palette with Per Fixture Values You can override the default settings using the Record Options Toolbar for example to record a single fixture s parameter values as per fixture 1 Assign the parameters of the fixture as required 2 Press Record 3 The Record Options Toolbar will appear on the bottom of the right hand touch screen Select More then Per Fixture see Figure 17 7 The More Section of the Record Options Toolbar 4 Press the key to choose the palette type for example Colour The Palette Directory will open 5 Select the palette location by pressing it in the Palette Directory window Global __ Per Type _ Per Fixture Allow Refs As Direct _ Whole Fist Selected Insert Merge Replace j Close J Figure 17 7 The More Section of the Record Options Toolbar Similarly to force a palette with one of each fixture type to be recorded as Per Fixture Type rather than the default Per Fixture use the Per Fixture Type button on the Record Options Toolbar Forcing a palette to be Per Fixture Type can be useful if you want a palette that contains programming for more than one type of fixture but that you can apply to any fixture of a type included in the palette For example you want to create a red palette that can be applied to both Studio Colors and Studio Spots If
143. a aaa N 151 1510 THES Fanning Toobar iisas ana no aiai ia e ea EE 157 TSH The Grouping ToolBar ie vais fan a oe a A A A ATE ete 158 15 12 The Programming pane of the User Preferences WINdOW cee 160 16d TNE Sroup Dire Cony dais facdatn in tiane sa dike ete eac dues cae daha fe eae e AE EAA ene 16 TZTThe Colour Dir6CrOry ater aude e ae a we iid ok nor ene ee ninth da ee et 167 17 2 Example of Parameters set to reference q Palette cc ceccceeeeee eens 169 17 3 The Palette Editor WINKOW cccccccccccecec ee ee ee ee sees eeeeeee seen ee tetesasaeneaeaeas 169 17 4 A Palette with Global Parameter ValUES sssssssrsrrsrrerrerrrrreririrerrrrerre 173 17 5 A Palette with Per Fixture Type VIUGES sssssisrsrrrrrsrrrrrerrerrerirrrersrrrere 173 17 6 A Palette with Per Fixture VOIUGS sssssssrrerrsrrersrrrrrnnrnrrrrrnrrrrerrrersrine 174 17 7 The More Section of the Record Options TOODO ccc eee cece eee 174 17 8 Example of Palettes containing different parameter types icce 175 17 9 The Record Options TOOIDOL ccccccccee cece eects eee ee sees seer seen ereeeeeeeenenenes 175 18 1 The Auto Update WINKOW ss ssssrrerserrtrstrstrnt intir rtr ease seen en trni rrr EErEE t 185 18 2 The Update TOO ccecce c EE 186 18 3 The Parked column of the Fixture WINAOW ssssssssrsrsrrsrrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrne 188 Flying Pig Systems Wholehog II 18 4 The Parked OUTPUT WINKOW ss sssssssursnrtrrttrtr rtro rintrar s
144. alled colour models Any colour can be represented equally well by either of these two colour models they are just different ways of conveying the same inform ation Many other colour models exist perhaps the most useful of which for lighting control anyway is the HSI Hue Saturation Intensity system e Hue Thisis the term used to specify the colours position in the possible range a colours from red going through yellow green cyan blue and magenta and finally returning to red As the range wraps around you can visualise it as a circle with the colours positioned around the edge with red at the top green at the lower right blue at the lower left and the intermediate colours in between The angle between 0 and 360 de grees specifies the hue of the colour red has a hue of 0 degrees yellow has a hue of 60 degrees and cyan has a hue of 180 degrees see Figure 3 1 The HSI Colour Wheel e Saturation This is how strong or pale the colour is Pale colours have low saturations while strong colours have high saturations Saturation is specified as a percentage between 0 white and 100 the strongest possible saturation Intensity This is simply a measure of how much light is being emitted from 0 black to 100 the brightest possible This is identical to the dimmer control on most fixtures Red Magenta Yellow hue y Blue Cyan Figure 3 1 The HSI Colour Wheel Wit
145. alog box When a Wholehog III server is detected on the network the Status field will change to Connecting Idle and finally Running Status r Status Status Status Connecting Status Idle Status Running Session No server Session 172 31 0 1 6600 Session 172 31 0 1 6600 Info Initialising network 0K Info Loading Show Data Info Outputs Active The Session and Info fields will contain additional network information The Wholehog II DP application can be configured similar to an actual DMX Processor You can assign Wholehog III network port and the net number for this application The Port field must be assigned to the same port as your Wholehog III console on the network The User Number field represents the net number and is similar to the number in the upper right hand corner on a DMX Processor Assign the User Number to a unique device net number that is not used by any other devices on the Wholehog III network 30 3 2 Configuring WYSIWYG To configure WYSIWYG 1 In WYSIWYG open the Device Manager Live gt Device Manager Device Manager Device Manager Name Connect on load 2 Click on New to add an additional device Select Wholehog III DP as the new device Flying Pig Systems 315 Appendices Library Selection Manufacturer AVAB Avolites Cast Software Color Kinetics Colortran NSI Compulite E e cue ETC Flying Pig System Hog II Hog II Overdrive Whole Hog Who
146. also use an eraser tipped pencil or a PDA stylus which can feel more precise than a finger If the touch screens are sluggish or make inaccurate selections you can fine tune them by adjusting the Calibration p 64 Flying Pig Systems 83 Reference 13 1 3 13 1 4 84 Section 13 Using the Console Tip Z You can keep your eraser tipped pencil and other useful knick knacks under the arm rest at the front of the console Modifier Keys Modifier keys may be depressed simultaneously with other keys on the console to extend their functions they work in a similar way to a Shift or Control key on a personal com puter The Open Delete Backspace Set Cue and Move keys are sometimes used as modifiers while the Pig key is always a modifier key see below In the User Manual the use of modifiers is show by e Open Fixture hold down the Open key and press the Fixture key The Pig Key Most of the Wholehog III s modifier keys have functions that relate to particular tasks but the Pig key is a general purpose modifier which is context sensitive It usually provides more advanced functions such as fine control with the parameter wheels or a visual cut and paste with the Delete and Copy keys For example 1 Pig l Wheel Changes wheel to proportional intensity mode 2 Pig Record Pastes information into the selected location Pig Key Commands p 341 has a full list of commands that use the Pig key Und
147. alue of zero This helps to ensure that you don t have redundant values in the cues that you create which can cause problems later by blocking values that should track through The Suck button is located on the Main Toolbar You need to have fixtures selected before using the Suck command For example if Group 3 contains Studio Color 575s 1 to 3 e Group 3 Suck assigns the fixtures in Group 3 to their current on stage values Output Jo 100 _ 100 GS 100 100 Programmer Similarly you can apply this to palettes scenes and cues using the Live key to bring in fixtures and their parameter values that are on stage e Live Red Palette Suck fixtures on stage assigned to Red Palette are brought into the Programmer Output ni Hu Z 15 J A20 15 0 ARed Palette Red Palette ZE 100 58 180 Flying Pig Systems Section 18 Advanced Programming Reference Programmer Red Palette Or you can use a mask to bring particular parameter type values from specific palettes that are on stage For example to bring the intensity values of Red Palette into the editor e Live Red Palette Intensity Suck the intensity values of fixtures on stage assigned to Red Palette are brought into the Programmer Output Nan Hu E 15 20 34 7 420 15 0 100 16 38 Red Palette Red Palette
148. alues in the active editor or pro grammer on the Wholehog III console Note that the Autofocus feature requires that the Wholehog ITI show file uses a fixture library version 2 5 or greater 30 4 318 Troubleshooting 1 When launching a visualiser a message saying Error loading lt path gt 1lxhog3dp d1l or hog3 d1l1 appears The driver can not be located Run the installer again 2 Windows 98 or ME will not run the msi installer Download and install the Windows Installer 2 0 update from Microsoft and run the Wholehog II Connectivity installer again 3 The Wholehog III DP window does not open when the visualiser is launched Run the installer again 4 The Wholehog III DP window always says Locating Wholehog III Net work Check the port matches on the settings on the console Check Ethernet connections Check that there is only one DHCP server in your network Reboot the visualiser computer 5 The Wholehog III DP window displays Connection Error while trying to connect Check the network settings on both the visualiser computer and the Wholehog III console Reboot the visualiser computer 6 The Wholehog III DP window displays Couldn t get file handle while trying to connect Flying Pig Systems Section 30 Visualiser Connectivity Appendices Check that another visualiser is not running on the same computer Reboot the visualiser computer 7 Wholehog III DP window displays Loader version is old need x
149. an intensity of 80 and one of 50 would be output as 40 You can use this to limit the maximum intensity of a fixture so that it never goes above 80 for example by assigning the proportional patch to 80 To assign a fixture s proportional patch 1 Open Fixture 2 Select the Intensity cell for the fixture required 3 Set percentage Enter enter a percentage 4 To return the proportional patch to normal assign the value to 100 You can assign a proportional patch value of above 100 For example if you patch at 200 the intensity value that the console outputs will be twice that programmed A programmed value of 25 will give 50 output and 50 will give 100 Programmed levels above 50 will not regrettably give fixture intensities above 100 Note that if you proportionally patch a fixture its intensity will still be displayed on the console in the range 0 to 100 even though the output value will be varying over the range defined by the proportional patch value Colour Calibration The Fixture window has a column labeled Col Cal which shows whether the fixture has colour calibration data in the fixture library You cannot edit this column but it is Flying Pig Systems Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures 14 3 2 Reference useful to be able to check if the fixture is colour calibrated when working with the Colour Picker see Working with Colour p 147 Parameter Configuration You can con
150. and Inhibitive Masters from a Page To remove a cuelist scene or inhibitive master from a page e Delete Choose Note that this will only remove the item from the master the item will not itself be de leted from the show Clearing Cuelists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters from a Page To clear all cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters from the current page 1 Open Page opens the Page Directory window 2 Press Clear Current Page in the Page Directory Note that clearing the current page will remove items from the masters the items themselves will not be deleted from the show Important When you clear the current page any cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters that were previously loaded onto the physical masters will be released and their contents will no longer be output from the console Flying Pig Systems Section 26 Working with Pages Reference 26 4 Copying and Moving Pages You can copy and move pages 1 Open Page open the Page Directory 2 Make sure that the Guard button is selected otherwise pressing a dir ectory button will activate the page rather than just selecting it 3 Page 1 Copy Page 3 copies Page 1 to Page 3 Similarly using the command line e Page 2 Move Page 4 Enter moves Page 2 to Page 4 Tip The order of the pages in the directory determines which page you get when changing pages using the Next Page key You can copy and move your pages so that they appear in the correct o
151. and set fader levels For example Master 1 Go Master 4 at 50 Master 8 at 25 3 Select Capture Activity from the Page Directory to store the activity as a macro for the page To directly edit a page s macro 1 Page Open open the Page Directory Select to change to the spreadsheet view 280 Flying Pig Systems Section 26 Working with Pages Reference 3 Select the Macro cell and press the Set key Type in the macro you re quire and press Enter For details of the macro syntax see Automating the Console Using Macros p 303 Tip You can display a list of available macro commands on the console by se lecting the Macro cell and pressing the Set key To clear the macro 1 Page Open open the Page Directory Deselect to change to the button view 3 Right click on the page and select Clear Activity Macros from the con textual menu Similarly you can enable or disable Restore Activity without deleting the macro itself by right clicking on the page and selecting from the contextual menu A icon will appear as a reminder that Restore Activity is on 26 3 26 3 1 Modifying Pages You can copy or move cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters to a page or remove them as well as clearing the whole page If you change which cuelists scenes or inhibitive masters are assigned to the current page then that assignment will automatically be recorded as part of the page Changes made to cuelists scenes and
152. as colour mixing are controlled by the para meter wheels Some parameters such as gobo and fixed colour wheels are in discrete steps known as slotted These are controlled by the Slot Toolbar on the right hand touch screen The functions available on the Slot Toolbar will vary according to the se lected fixtures see Figure 8 5 The Slot Toolbar for a Studio Color 575 and Figure 8 6 The Slot Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 Colour Strobe Macro Enable l Mode Control Figure 8 5 The Slot Toolbar for a Studio Color 575 Colour coo Strobe Gobo Gobo 2 Macro Enable l Mode Control Figure 8 6 The Slot Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 Assigning Continuous Colour and Beam Parameters To assign continuous colour or beam parameters 1 Select the required fixtures 2 Select either colour or beam using the parameter type keys located be low the parameter wheels Legends will appear above the parameter wheels If there are more parameters than parameter wheels you can page through these by pressing the parameter type key again Flying Pig Systems 45 Tutorial Section 8 Programming Fixtures 3 Assign the parameters using the parameter wheel Some parameters of some fixtures have several modes for example the gobo wheels of the Studio Spot 575 can be in Slots Spin or Random mode The modes are shown next to the parameter wheel legend and you can select the mode by pressing the legend Gobo Shake
153. asking Using the Record Options Toolbar To specify masking when recording a palette using the Record Options Toolbar 1 Assign the parameters of the fixtures as required 2 Press Record The Record Options Toolbar will appear at the bottom of the right hand touch screen see Figure 17 9 The Record Options Toolbar 3 Select the parameter types to be included in the palette by toggling on or off the buttons Use for intensity Use P for position Use C for colour Use B for beam Use E for effects Use T for timing 4 Press a key to choose the palette type for example Colour The Palette Directory will open 5 Select the palette location by pressing it in the Palette Directory window Ui Forward Backward Remove State Usel UseP Use C Use B Use E Use T More J Figure 17 9 The Record Options Toolbar Masking Using the Command Line When recording a palette using the command line choose the parameters to include before the Record command Flying Pig Systems 175 Reference Section 17 Working with Palettes e Colour Position Record Colour 3 Enter records the colour and position parameters of the Programmer or editor contents into Colour Palette 3 Recording Only Selected Fixtures By default all fixtures currently in the Programmer or editor are recorded To record only selected fixtures 1 Fixture 2 select the fixture s you want to record in the palette 2 Record 3 On the Record Options Tool
154. aspects of how the directory window displays information Guard When this is depressed pressing the directory s buttons does not activate them Instead it selects the item and inserts it in the command line Flying Pig Systems 95 Reference Section 13 Using the Console dark blue cyan Figure 13 10 A Typical Directory in Spreadsheet View Tip gZ You can override the effect of the Guard button by holding down the Pig key while pressing a directory button 13 4 1 Automatic Naming of Directory Items When you create or copy a directory item the console automatically generates a name for the new item For example if you have two position palettes and them create a third the new one will be recorded into location 3 in the directory and named Position 3 If you then copy this position palette the copy will be recorded into location 4 in the dir ectory and named Copy of Position 3 You can customise how the console automatically generates these names in the Default Naming pane of the User Preferences window see Figure 13 11 The Default Naming pane of the User Preferences window To open the Default Naming pane e Setup Preferences gt Default Naming To customise the generated labels 1 Click or press on the text box for the required type of directory group intensity position and so on Labels for when the new directory item is created by recording or by copying are handled in sepa
155. at navigate through windows and toolbars In the manual the word key is used to indicate a hardware button on the Wholehog III s front panel For example press the Enter key The word button refers to virtual buttons that can be pressed on the touch screens or clicked on with the trackball or mouse You will also find important or useful information highlighted Caution A caution which has information about hazards to equipment or personnel Important An important note usually alerting you to situations that require special at tention Tip A tip to help you be more productive in your programming Flying Pig Systems Section 2 Users New to Moving Light Consoles If your previous experience with lighting consoles has been mainly with theatre desks Strand ETC etc then this section will introduce you to some fundamental differences that you will find with the Wholehog III When you have finished this section you may also find the sections on Abstraction p 13 and Colour Matching p 14 useful 2 1 The User Interface Most theatre desks use a command line to control them This means that you enter instructions using a keypad in the form channel 36 at 50 Information shown on displays is limited to pure text and only one screen layout can be displayed on one monitor at a time The Wholehog III is rather different It has been designed on the principle that you should be able
156. at would you programme in the cues that turn the room lights on If you recorded the full state you wouldn t know what level to assign the sunset fixtures to as during playback they will have faded down to some indeterminate level during the action of the scene The cue to turn the room light on is a snap cue and the result would be a snap change in the sunset as well not very realistic A tracking console allows you to programme just the room lights into a cue so that the cue won t interfere with the cue for the sunset fixtures which will proceed with their long fade undisturbed Similarly tracking allows multiple chases to be run at the same time without them conflicting For example you could plot a simple colour chase with fixtures alternating between red and blue and an intensity chase in which fixtures step through 0 50 and 100 before looping back to 0 With tracking these two chases can be run on the same fixtures without the chases interfering with each other This is possible because only the colour parameters of the fixture are recorded in the colour chase and only the intensity parameters in the intensity chase Maintain State Sometimes you will need to play back cues out of sequence Typically this will happen during rehearsals when you want to go back over a section of the show but it can happen during performance if the performers make a mistake and miss out a part of the show for example With some tracking con
157. ate palettes to use as simple building blocks which you then make more complex building blocks from For example you might create a position palette that focuses some Studio Spot 575s onto the lead singer and further position palettes that position other fixtures onto the remaining band members You could then make an All Band position palette with one fixture lighting each band member in which each fixture references another palette instead of having 176 Flying Pig Systems Section 17 Working with Palettes Reference parameter values If the drum riser was later moved you could adjust the position palette that focused onto it and the change would not only be updated in all scenes and cues programmed with that palette but also all programming done with the All Band palette By default palettes are not recorded as reference palettes any fixture parameters assigned using another palette is recorded as a numerical value If you want to record a palette as a reference palette select the Allow Refs record option 1 Assign the parameters of the fixtures using other palettes as required 2 Press Record 3 The Record Options Toolbar will appear at the bottom of the right hand touch screen Select More then press the Allow Refs button 4 Press a key to choose the palette type for example Colour The Palette Directory will open 5 Select the palette location by pressing it in the Palette Directory window 17 6 5
158. ath 15 cycles 45 15 cycles 45 O gt 270 Figure 23 4 The Effects Engine Once the effect table is assigned you can modify the effect attributes either by editing the values in the spreadsheet or using the parameter wheels when the Effect key is se lected Tip You can quickly edit the attributes of all one parameter type All Intensity All Position All Colour All Beam or for all parameters within the top five rows of the Effects Engine To edit the values in the spreadsheet 1 Select the cells for the parameters that you want to edit and press Set 2 Type anew value and press Enter Or using the parameter wheels 1 Press the Effect key 2 Select the individual parameters that you want to edit in the left hand Function column of the Effects Engine window 234 Flying Pig Systems Section 23 Working with Effects Reference 23 3 2 3 Adjust the Size Rate Offset and Length parameter wheels as required Note that the parameter wheels only control the current effects row selected using the buttons in the Function column There are buttons for all parameter types for all intensity all colour all position all beam and for each individual parameter type see Figure 23 4 The Effects Engine Tip S All effect attributes can be fanned using the Fan key and parameter wheels remember to select the required parameter types in
159. ave exactly the same parameter values then the palette is recorded as Global 3 Otherwise the palette is recorded Per Fixture In the palette s editor the parameter values in a Global palette will appear as All Types Similarly a palette with Per Fixture Type values will show them grouped by fixture type see Figure 17 4 A Palette with Global Parameter Values Figure 17 5 A Palette with Per Fixture Type Values and Figure 17 6 A Palette with Per Fixture Values Make sure that you have aggregation turned on see Aggregation p 92 I Yellow Global Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table shat mM ae m Show f Show _ Fade All eae Compact ae N Tes B Figure 17 4 A Palette with Global Parameter Values W Yellow Per Fixture Type Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table Nshats a all Show f Show Fade All Studio gar Edit State Palettes Changes Compac Gg Spot 575 Color 575 Position z Num Intensity Strobe Typ olour Mi A Pan Tilt Time q Figure 17 5 A Palette with Per Fixture Type Values Flying Pig Systems 173 Reference 17 6 2 174 Section 17 Working with Palettes W Yellow Per Fixture Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table NShots Jefe alll Show f Show _ Fade al Studio Studio Edit el Gheogsz Compact 3 Spot 575 Color 575 H Miena B otf open OH
160. ayback Defaults pane of the Preferences window e Setup gt Preferences Playback Defaults You can also customise the function of each of the master controls and main controls see Configuring Playback Controls p 287 Tip You can revert all of the settings in the Cuelist pane of the Playback Defaults window by pressing the Reset to Defaults button in the bottom left corner of the window Cuelist Timing and Rate Settings You can assign several settings that control cuelist timing Timing Function Default Notes Release Time 2s The time over which parameter values go to their de fault values when the cuelist is released see Releasing a Cuelist on a Master 0 244 Assert Time 2s The time in which parameters go to their values determ ined by the cuelist when the cuelist is asserted see Asserting One Cuelist Over the Others 0 251 Back Time 2s The time in which the cuelist steps back to the previous cue when the Halt key is pressed twice to first halt the cuelist and then send it back Cuelist Rate 100 Default proportion rate of the cuelist A rate of 50 will double all cue timings a rate of 200 will halve all cue timings Tip If you have assigned a release assert or back time to a cuelist and you want to revert to the default time press the Default button adjacent to the appropriate cell Cuelist Wrapping Wrapping decides what happens to a cuelist when it reaches the final cue Configu
161. ays With the Rate Wheel The centre sprung wheel on the left of the console allows the fade rate to be momentarily modified to speed up or slow down the fading in of a scene e With the left hand Parameter Wheel When you hold down a Choose key you can use the left hand parameter wheel to control the crossfade rate of the selected master This modified rate will persist until you make another change Rate 100 The rate level is displayed as a percentage with a default of 100 A scene with a fade of 10 seconds will complete in 5 seconds with an accelerated rate of 200 or in 20 seconds with a decelerated rate of 50 25 5 2 IPCB Fader Mode You can inhibit the output values of any intensity position colour or beam parameter information in any other scene or cuelist by using a scene as a IPCB Fader For example when touring a rig distances between the stage and the FOH positions may vary and therefore there maybe instances that you may wish to limit the level of these fixtures in order to maintain a balanced look on stage To create an inhibitive master using IPCB fader function 1 Open the Programmer from the Main Toolbar In the Programmer select the fixtures and parameters you wish to inhibit then assign a maximum inhibit level 2 Record Scene 1 Enter record the scene 3 Scene 1 Move Choose place the scene on a free master 4 Pig Choose Playback Options open the scene master s options window 5 In t
162. bar at the bottom of the right hand screen 3 Group 5 Enter removes Fixture 2 from Group 5 16 4 Deleting Groups To delete a group 1 Group 1 Delete deletes group 1 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Or from the group directory 1 Press and hold Delete whilst selecting the group to be deleted from directory 2 Release the Delete key A dialog will appear asking you to confirm the delete 3 Click OK You can also delete several groups at once 1 Group 1 Thru 5 Delete deletes groups 1 through 5 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Or from the group directory Flying Pig Systems 163 Reference Section 16 Working with Groups 1 Press and hold Delete whilst selecting all the groups to be deleted from directory 2 Release the Delete key A dialog will appear asking you to confirm the delete 3 Click OK Tip Z If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirmation by going to Setup gt Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items 16 5 Copying and Moving Groups To make a copy of a group e Group 1 Copy Group 2 Enter copies the contents of Group 1 to Group 2 Similarly to move a group to a new location e Group 1 Move Group 2 Enter moves Group 1 to Group 2 If the destination group already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert M
163. bar select More Per Fixture 4 Position Enter records only the position values for fixture 2 into the next available position palette rather than values for all fixtures in the Programmer 17 6 3 Palette Timing Parameter timings that have been assigned in the Programmer or editor can be recorded when you record a palette and applied when the palette is used By default timings are not included in a palette to include them you should include time by unmasking it during recording see Masking Using the Record Options Toolbar p 175 You can also assign an overall palette timing when recording the palette For example to record a colour palette with a fade time of 6 seconds 1 Assign the parameters of the fixtures as required 2 Time 6 Enter assign their fade time to 6 seconds 3 Colour Time Record Colour 2 Enter record colour and timing informa tion into Colour Palette 2 You can also edit timings in the palette s editor See Editing Palette Contents p 169 17 6 4 Reference Palettes When you record a cue using a palette a reference to the palette is recorded instead of a numerical value for the parameters Similarly you can record palettes using other palettes so that the new palette contains references rather than numerical values A palette recorded in this way is known as a reference palette and is marked in the palette directory window by a amp icon Reference palettes are useful when you want to cre
164. ber Status Surface Number Beacon Remove Display Sound Pack Miniwing 723 Connected Default 1 10 s an Keyboard Ss Widgets Time and Date B Auto Launch oh Network i System Info GE Beas Figure 12 11 The Wings pane of the Control Panel The Wholehog III remembers the settings for specific wings when they are reconnected this means that if a wing s Playback Bar is hidden it will remain so each time the wing is connected However a Playback Bar selected to be shown will not appear until its wing is connected Also once a wing is connected then it is assigned to its playback bar until the Remove button is pressed If you plug in wing 200 it will get assigned to Playback Bar 1 Then if you unplug it and plug in wing 253 it will get assigned to Playback Bar 2 as Playback Bar 1 is still assigned to wing 200 If you are replacing one wing with another then you must use the Remove button to remove the first wing before connecting the second Flying Pig Systems 81 Section 13 Using the Console 13 1 Basic Concepts The Wholehog III has two methods for entering information into the console the com mand line and the graphical user interface GUI on the touch screens Many of the most common operations on the console can be done in more than one way and as you become familiar with the Wholehog III you will develop your own preferred methods 13 1 1 The Graphical User Interface The
165. cal pointer so you can keep the Trackball in position mode to save having to change modes as you programme Using the Parameter Wheels The pan and tilt parameters also appear on the parameter wheels after the Position key is depressed and can be used as an alternative to the Trackball Flip With some moving lights there is more than one combination of pan and tilt that results in the beam hitting the same point on the stage You may sometimes want to change the pan and tilt combination being used for example to ensure that the fixture takes the most direct route during a position change Flying Pig Systems Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters Reference 15 3 3 The Flip function cycles the selected fixtures through the possible combinations in turn To do this select the fixture or fixtures and press Flip on the Main Toolbar Holding the Pig key down while pressing Flip cycles through the combinations the other way Tip When the Trackball is in position mode the top left Trackball key also acts as a Flip key for quick access while positioning fixtures Continuous Parameters Colour and Beam Colour and beam parameters can be either discrete known as slotted or continuous An example of a slotted parameter is the gobo and colour wheels in a moving light which can be assigned to values such as Gobo 1 and Colour 3 Examples of continuous parameters are the colour mixing controls on some moving light
166. categories Select Strobe as the desired function The window will close and you will see Strobe assigned as the function for channel 10 Note the feature column will auto fill with Shutter Select this cell and press Set Choose Rate from the dialog box Select the DMX value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the DMX range for the Linear Strobe according to the DMX protocol 1 gt 127 and press Enter Select the Real World value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the Real World value to be displayed in Hertz 0 gt 30hz and press Enter Repeat steps 8 13 for the random strobe ability of the fixture Fixture Control commands from Strobe channel 1 5 Select the function cell for a blank DMX Entry of channel 10 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories Select Control on the left column to display a list of Control function sub categories Select Fixture Control as the desired function The window will close and you will see Fixture Control assigned as the function for channel 10 Note the feature column will auto fill with Idle Select this cell and press Set Choose Global Reset from the dialog box Select the DMX value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the DMX for the fixture reset according to the DMX protocol 205 and press Enter Repeat the above steps for the shutdown ability of the fixture Note that Real World values are not allowed for Contr
167. ccording to the fixture selection e With no fixtures selected you just see the colour wheel with saturated colours around the outside and paler colours towards the centre e When a calibrated fixture is selected a dashed line will be superimposed on the colour wheel This line represents the fixture s gamut or range of colours that it can achieve To select any colour within this range simply click on it The new selection will be marked by a superimposed cross and circle If you select a colour outside the fixture s gamut one marker X indicates the colour that was chosen while a second O indicates the closest colour that the fixture can produce The two markers are joined by a line to indicate they are related Flying Pig Systems 149 Reference Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters alo Figure 15 8 The Colour Picker e Fixtures that do not have colour mixing capabilities do not appear in the Colour Picker e Ifyou have several different fixture types selected the lines on the colour picker change to display the range of colours that all of the selected fix tures can achieve shown as a dotted line as well as the range of colours that at least one of the fixtures can achieve shown as a dashed line When you select a colour a single target marker X is displayed con nected to a series of O markers one for each fixture type e The Colour Picker also displays the gamuts an
168. cenes groups or palettes See Also Programmer The Wholehog III effects engine provides the opportunity to create movement sequences The engine contains library shapes whilst allowing for custom effects to be created See Parameter Wheel A defined way of connecting computer equipment together It comes in a variety of flavours See Also 10 Base T 100 Base T IP address hub Time in which fixtures crossfade between the parameter levels of two cues one incoming one outgoing See Also split fade in time out time Flying Pig Systems Glossary fanning FAQ fixture fixture library focus function gamut gang gobo graphical user in terface group GUI hard command hard value Flying Pig Systems A way of quickly assigning fixture parameters to an evenly spaced range of values For example you could use fanning to assign the intensity of 10 fixtures to 10 20 90 100 in a single opera tion See Also buddying Short for Frequently Asked Questions Lantern instrument lamp or moving light unit In this manual the word fixture is used to refer to automated lights as opposed to conventionals which are usually controlled by dimmers and assigned to the Wholehog III as desk channels A data file that contains details of a fixture s parameters required so that the Wholehog III understands how the fixture works and what it can do The fixture libraries are an important part o
169. ch console with a separate number This can also be assigned in the Settings section of the Start window Tip What is the difference between launching or starting a new show and connecting to a running one Normally your console will start a show server When you connect to a running show no server is started instead you use the server of the remote console Automatically Launching a Show You can assign the Wholehog III to automatically launch a show at startup 1 Setup Control Panel Auto Launch see Figure 13 16 The Auto Launch pane of the Control Panel 2 Select Enable Auto Launch 3 Choose a show file to launch 4 Assign a delay time before the chosen show is automatically launched Flying Pig Systems Section 13 Using the Console Reference aio1x Auto Launch Ld Displays Auto Launch Settings 4 Sound Auto Launch allows you to specify a show to load when the console starts up If you specify a delay greater than 0 seconds a countdown will be displayed 3 Keyboard and you will be able to cancel and go to the Connect dialog Wings Enable Auto Launch Time and Date Show Shows Tutorial Show Browse Si Auto Launch Delay secs oh Network System Info 5 y a gi Reports Figure 13 16 The Auto Launch pane of the Control Panel At startup a window will tell you that the show will be launched automatically after the assigned delay see Figure 13 17 The A
170. ch fixture s patch address so that it follows on from the last Flying Pig Systems 123 Reference 124 Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures For example to patch 5 Studio Colors starting at DMX address 1 1 Open Fixture open the Fixture window 2 Fixture 1 Thru 5 Patch 1 Enter You can use the key as an alternative to the Patch button Studio Colors 1 to 5 will now have the incremental patch addresses of 1 1 1 17 1 33 1 49 and 1 65 Note that the fixtures selected do not have to be from a contiguous range and they can be of different types Tip S When you patch a range of fixtures the Wholehog Ill takes the selection order into account so that Fixture 1 Thru 10 1 patches the fixtures starting with Fixture 1 and going up in numerical order while Fixture 10 Thru 1 1 patches the fixtures starting with Fixture 10 and going down in reverse numer ical order Patching Fixtures to Multiple Addresses You can patch one fixture to multiple different DMX addresses this can be useful with desk channels where you want one desk channel to control several dimmer channels This is sometimes known as soft patching To patch a fixture to a second DMX address select the fixture again and patch it as before Alternatively using the command line e Fixture Desk Channel 1 2 1 1 4 2 5 Enter patches the desk channel to DMX Processor 2 universe 1 address 1 and to DMX Pro cessor 4 universe 2 add
171. ch fixtures to DMX Processors that are not currently connected to the console you can add the DMX Pro cessors to the show without them being physically connected 1 Setup gt Patch gt Patch open the Fixture Patch window The Patch button is on the toolbar at the top of the Fixture window 2 Click on Add DP in the list of DMX Processors and press Set 3 DMX Processor number Enter type in the Net Number of the DMX Processor 4 OK close the Fixture Patch window Selecting the DMX Processor Universe and Patch Point Many fixtures such as moving lights use several DMX channels to control their various parameters Generally these DMX channels are in a continuous numerical range and it is the first of these channels known as the start address that is the DMX address that you assign during the patching process The Wholehog III uses the information about the fixture contained in the Fixture Library to calculate how many DMX channels are used by the fixture and assigns them accordingly starting at the Start Address you have given To patch a fixture 1 Setup Patch open the Fixture window Flying Pig Systems Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures Reference 2 Select the fixture by clicking on it then select Patch to open the Fixture Patch window See Figure 14 6 The Fixture Patch window 3 Select a DMX Processor in the list on the left hand side of the window If there are no DMX Pr
172. chosen 4 digit code number and cursor right to confirm The code number will be the default 1234 if you have not changed it to your own You can lock and unlock remotely from a console via the DMX Processor Settings win dow for each specific DMX Processor 1 Setup Network the Network button can be found on the Setup Toolbar 2 Select the required DMX Processor in the Network window and click Settings to open the DMX Processor Settings window 3 Lock or unlock the DMX Processor and OK to apply and close the window Important Make sure that you keep a record of your lock code close to hand if your DMX Processor is located away from the console The DMX Processor cannot be unlocked without it or a console operator Backlight Off Time Selecting Backlight in the Control Panel opens a screen where you can assign the delay time before the backlight goes off The Permanent setting keeps the light on continually Watchdog The Watchdog feature automatically restarts the DMX Processor if its software stops running for some reason Watchdog is on by default and generally it is best to leave it switched on However if you suspect that an DMX Processor is not working correctly you may want to turn Watchdog off so that you can see any error messages before re starting it 1 In the Control Panel select Watchdog 2 Deselect the Watchdog checkbox and select OK Resetting the DMX Processor There are two types of reset soft and
173. ckground are not recordable 15 3 8 Copying Parameter Settings You can copy the parameter values of one fixture to another This was known as cloning on the Wholehog II Important If you copy parameter settings between fixtures of different types only those parameters that the fixtures have in common will be copied Using the Command Line To copy from the current selection e Copy 8 Enter copies the parameters of the current selection to fixture 8 To copy from specified fixtures e Fixture 1 Thru 4 Copy 8 Thru 11 Enter copies the parameter settings of Fixtures 1 4 to 8 11 You can add parameter location and destination masks to any copy command e 1 Thru 4 Intensity Copy List 3 Cue 1 Fixture 8 Thru 11 Enter copies the intensities of fixtures 1 to 4 in the current selection to fixtures 8 to 11 in cue 1 of cuelist 3 You can use Copy to reverse the order of values For example if fixture 1 is at 10 fixture 2 at 20 and fixture 3 is at 30 e 1Thru 3 Copy 3 Thru 1 Enter the fixtures will now be at 30 20 and 10 respectively Tip When you press the Copy key the words Copy to appear on the command line This is a useful reminder of the syntax of the copy command Flying Pig Systems 153 Reference Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters In the Programmer or Editor Window You can copy fixture data by using the Copy and Paste commands click the right hand mouse or Trackba
174. consoles 2 Connect the MIDI out of the master console to the MIDI in of the slave console 3 Turn on MSC Out on the master console see Sending MSC from the Wholehog III p 293 4 Turn on MSC In on the slave console see Bringing MSC into the Wholehog III p 293 When you play cues and scenes on the master console they will now also play on the slave console 28 3 Working with MIDI Syntax You can send MIDI syntax from the Wholehog III console or from a networked MIDI Timecode Processor using macros when you launch a show change page or play a cue or scene See Automating the Console Using Macros p 303 28 4 Bringing Timecode into the Console You can bring timecode into the console in several ways Flying Pig Systems 295 Reference 28 4 1 296 Section 28 Working with Audio MIDI and Timecode Timecode Type Input Using MIDI Timecode The MIDI input on the console The MIDI input on a MIDI Timecode Processor on the network Linear Timecode A Linear Timecode USB Widget connected to the console s USB port The LTC input on a MIDI Timecode Processor on the network An audio CD in the console s CD ROM drive Video Timecode The VITC input on a MIDI Timecode Processor on the network Timecode brought into a console or MIDI Timecode Processor is automatically distrib uted over the network and can be used by any other console or taken out of a MIDI Timecode Processor s MIDI LTC or VITC outp
175. ction 13 Using the Console You can toggle compact mode on and off with the Compact button in the window s toolbar B Programmer B Programmer Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate 0 Show Fade i Show Fade BEF Palettes Changes Eonian ae J Edit Palettes Changes Tilt Compact GZ a Note Intensity Srohe ra Technobeam Iris _ Strobe _ Pan Tilt Colour _ Calg Technobeam Iris Strobe Pan esk Channel Moos Figure 13 5 A spreadsheet with and without Compact Mode Note that you cannot sort a spreadsheet that is in compact mode Aggregation In windows such as the Programmer it is often useful to keep fixtures of the same type together this is known as aggregation The spreadsheet effectively becomes a list of fixtures in fixture type order with headings in the list separating each fixture type see Figure 13 6 A Spreadsheet with Aggregation Turned On To use aggregation 1 Make sure the spreadsheet is sorted by Fixture Type right click on the Type column and select Sort If the Type column isn t visible right click on any column heading and select Type 2 Press to open the Configuration window 3 Select Enable Aggregation 4 Click on OK Note that aggregation is always on if the spreadsheet is in compact mode see Compact Mode p 91 Tip Z Aggregation is turned on by default in all editors such as the Programmer Flying Pig
176. ctions editing or programming Typical masks are the parameter masks intensity position colour and beam A master comprises of Go Pause Flash and Choose buttons as well as a fader One cuelist maybe run upon one master at one time Cuelists need not be permanently stored on specific masters and may reside in the cuelist directory See Also cuelist See cue 371 MIDI MIDI show con trol MIDI Timecode Processor modifier moving light multicast network processor node off line editor on stage out time Glossary Musical Instrument Digital Interface Allows communication of musical notes programmes and timing data between electronic instruments and other devices such as lighting consoles See Also timecode Subset of MIDI used in the entertainment industry for integrated control of lighting sound and stage automation MIDI Timecode Processors are used to bring MIDI and timecode into or out of the network They support MIDI MIDI Show Control MIDI Timecode Linear Timecode and Video Timecode See Also timecode A key that is used in conjunction with other keys or buttons to change the effect that it has For example the Pig key See Also Pig key See fixture A network protocol or language that computers use to talk to each other over Ethernet The Wholehog III uses this standard protocol which means that it can safely be connected to other networks of computers and will not interfere w
177. cue or scene and Open Press the Edit button in the editor window if you want to change not just view parameter values If you have several editors open only one will receive commands from the command line use the Edit button in each editor window to select which one When you open an editor with the Open key it is automatically made the editable editor Tip To have editors open without automatically becoming the editable editor go to Setup Preferences Programming Preview Editors and select Open As Inactive Flying Pig Systems 137 Reference Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters 15 1 15 1 1 138 Selecting Fixtures On the Wholehog III you select fixtures and desk channels using the command line with the numeric keypad or visually in the editor For an overview of the command line see Using the Command Line p 100 Selecting Individual Fixtures To select a fixture visually in the editor window click on its number in the Num column of the spreadsheet To select a fixture using the command line you need to select the fixture type followed by the fixture s number For example to select Studio Color number 1 e Fixture Studio Color 575 1 when you press the Fixture key types of available fixtures will appear at the bottom of the right hand touch screen where you can select Studio Color 575 Desk Studio Studio Technobeam Channel Color 575 Spot 575 Iris The Wholehog III
178. d figure data including colour and beam between fixture functions it cannot match the performance of a higher specification unit with a greater number of functions to that of a lower specification unit Flying Pig Systems 119 Reference 14 1 4 14 1 5 120 Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures Pe Patch Patch Type Patch Note 1 DP 2000 1 1 Fixture Patch Patch Type Patch Note Intensity Col Ca 100 Figure 14 4 Changed Fixture Type Removing a Fixture from the Show To remove a fixture 1 Setup Patch open the Fixture window 2 Fixture 1 Remove Select the fixture s you want to remove and press Remove 3 You will be asked to confirm Select OK Important If you remove a fixture all of its associated programming in groups palettes cues and so on will be removed from the show To disable a fixture while retaining its programming unpatch it see Unpatching Fixtures p 128 Creating Palettes and Groups Automatically The Wholehog III can create groups and palettes automatically based on the fixtures in your show This rapidly gives you a set of building blocks to start programming with To use the Auto Palettes function 1 Setup Patch open the Fixture window 2 Click on the Auto Palettes button located in the toolbar at the top of the Fixture window and select from the options in the Auto Palettes window see Figure 14 5 The Auto Palett
179. d markers for fixtures that are currently in the editor but not selected These are shown in grey e Fixtures that are not color calibrated use a standard HS method and the Colour Picker will appear without any dashed lines The Gel Picker You can use the Gel Picker to select colours matched to traditional gels Clicking on a button in the Gel Picker sets the Hue and Saturation parameters of the selected fixtures to values that match the selected colour as closely as possible You can select colours from the Lee Rosco E Colour Rosco Supergel and GamColor ranges using the buttons in the toolbar at the top of the window You can also select whether to match to the gel as it would appear in a Par 64 or similar conventional tungsten source or in a Source 4 which has a slightly bluer light output There is a button to open the Gel Picker in the Colour Directory window 150 Flying Pig Systems Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters Reference 5 x Rosco E e Rosco ET Genco Rose Pink Laver ie Medium Pale Yellow my Pale Amber Bastard Salmon Gold a 5 pike 7 aan 9 Straw Tint pegs Straw Spaces MET veer ro a 24 5 2 ax 2 5 Z Gold Amber Dark Amber Scarlet Sunset Red Bright Red Medium Red 29 35 36 39 46 48 Figure 15 9 The Gel Picker Note that the Gel Picker colours are not palettes and will not be embedded in program ming they are simply shortcuts to the appropriate HS values Gel Pic
180. d parked parameters It provides an accurate indication of the status of shared intensity values when multiple cuelists are running simultaneously see Figure 24 7 The Levels View Window To open the Levels View window e Press and hold the Open key then select Levels from the Main Toolbar io x Show Values Source Palett es Desk Channel 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 70 100 50 50 50 50 50 50 70 70 70 70 70 70 Studio Color 575 Studio Spot 575 11 12 13 14 100 100 q gt Figure 24 7 The Levels View Window The Levels View window by default displays raw intensity values you can configure it via buttons at the top of the window to display output information in the following ways e Values displays the raw parameter values e Source displays the source that currently has control of an intensity for example the Programmer or a cuelist and cue number e Show Palettes as with source displays the palette that is supplying the intensity value 24 5 Advanced Cuelist Playback 24 5 1 Overriding Rate During Playback You can alter all rate timings of the currently chosen cuelist in two ways 260 Flying Pig Systems Section 24 Cuelist Playback Reference e With the Rate Wheel The centre sprung wheel on the left of the console allows the fade rate to be momentarily modified to speed up or slow down crossfades e With the left hand Parameter Wheel When you hold down
181. d preset arrangements of cuelists onto the masters see Working with Pages p 277 2 6 HTP and LTP Generally theatre desks that are not designed to handle moving lights work on a Highest Takes Precedence HTP basis This means that if a fixture s intensity is being controlled by two different parts of the console such as a playback and a submaster the intensity will be at the highest of the two levels For example if in the playback fixture 1 is at 50 and in the submaster it is at 100 then the level seen on stage will be 100 If the submaster is reduced to 40 then the on stage level will be 50 because the level in the playback is higher and will take precedence This system generally works well for non moving light consoles but moving lights in troduce a problem Parameters other than intensity don t have higher and lower values a colour of red is not higher or lower than green and a pan of 50 is not higher or lower than one of 20 Working with moving lights needs a new way to decide the precedence called Latest Takes Precedence LTP With this system the fixture parameters are at the value they have been most recently assigned In our example moving the submaster to 40 would result in a level of 40 because this is the latest instruction and will take precedence The submaster would effectively grab control of the parameter from the playback Of course running another cue in the playback might grab i
182. der remains unchanged while the first one s value changes the most For example Before fanning 30 30 30 30 30 After fanning 70 60 50 40 30 e Fan To Centre the middle fixture remains unchanged while the first and last fixtures values change the most in the same direction For ex ample Flying Pig Systems Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters Reference 15 4 5 15 4 6 Before fanning 30 30 30 30 30 After fanning 50 40 30 40 50 You can set the fanning mode from the Fanning Toolbar e Press and hold the Fan key to display the Fanning Toolbar see Fig ure 15 10 The Fanning Toolbar All subsequent fans will follow the currently selected fanning mode until the editor is cleared yf Normal a Start ps End gt Centre Reverse Shuffle Reorder J Figure 15 10 The Fanning Toolbar Multipart Fanning With the command line you can enter multipart fanning e 1Thru 9 10 Thru 50 Thru 10 The fixtures at either end of the range take the value of 10 that in the middle 50 and the others spread between 10 20 30 40 50 40 30 20 10 You can fan in as many parts as you want separating values with the Thru key Note that multipart fanning only works with the command line not when editing values in the spreadsheet Fanning with Groupings Grouping allows you to control the way that parameters are fanned to make complex patterns You can group fixture
183. dow while settings that are specific to individual parameters are configured in the Edit Fixtures window 14 3 1 Fixture Configuration To open the Fixture window Figure 14 11 The Fixture window e Setup gt Patch Or e Open Fixture In the Fixture window you can view but not alter the fixture type and communications protocol for each fixture To show these columns right click on any column header and select either Type or Protocol Flying Pig Systems 129 Reference 130 MM Fixture Window OP 2000 DP 2000 DP 2000 DP 2000 DP 2000 DP 2000 DP 2000 DP 2000 DP 2000 EA Patch Unpatch Apply Patch Remove pe Patch Note Fixture Fixture Fixture Fixture Fixture Fixture Fixture Figure Fixture Fixture Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures Tilt Invert Replicate Change Edit Fixture Auto se a Fixtures Type Fixtures Builder Palettes By DP j A la x gt DP 2000 4 DP 2000 Figure 14 11 The Fixture window Modifying the User Number The User Number is the number that you use to select a particular fixture when pro gramming By default the Wholehog II gives each fixture type its own range of user numbers so that there might be several fixtures numbered 1 of different types If this is the case the fixture number has an asterisk next to it in the Fixture window
184. ds the previous page With the Views Directory window press the view s button in the Views Directory window Make sure that the Guard button is not depressed otherwise you will only select the view rather than activating it Desktop View Options By default when you recall one desktop view it replaces the previous one so that all windows not part of the new view are closed However you can set views so that they are additive instead 1 Open View opens the Views Directory 2 Select the directory s spreadsheet view see Working with Directories p 94 Select the view s cell in the Additive column 4 Press the Set key to toggle between Yes and No Flying Pig Systems 89 Reference Section 13 Using the Console ioixi Palettes Cuelist Yes Nick s View No Matt s View No Brad s View No Output Yes Programmer Lo Yess Figure 13 4 The Views Directory in Spreadsheet View Deleting a Desktop View To delete a desktop view using the View Toolbar 1 Hold down the Delete key and press the appropriate button on the View Toolbar 2 Press OK to confirm To delete a view using the Views Directory 1 Open View opens the Views Directory 2 Check that the directory s Guard button is depressed so that you can select buttons within the directory without activating them 3 Press the appropriate directory button and then the Delete key 4 Click OK to confirm the delete T
185. e reverses the selection sequence so that the last is first and the first is last For example the fixture selection 1 5 becomes 5 1 Flying Pig Systems 141 Reference Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters Shuffle randomises the selection order of the current selection For example the fixture selection 1 5 becomes 3 5 2 1 4 Reorder sorts the selection order to match the User Number order For example the fixture selection 3 5 2 1 4 becomes 1 5 v Tip The Reverse Shuffle and Reorder buttons can also be found on the Fanning Toolbar which you can open by pressing and holding the Fan key See Fanning p 154 15 3 142 Modifying Parameters Once fixtures are selected within an editor you can modify their parameters The Wholehog III classifies parameters into four parameter types intensity position colour and beam There are also three special types effect time and control The Wholehog III provides several ways to adjust the different parameter types Command Line Use for intensity and selecting palettes I Wheel Use for intensity Trackball Use for position pan and tilt Use the top right Trackball key to switch the Trackball between controlling the on screen pointer and the position of selected fixtures Parameter Wheels Use for intensity position colour beam effects time and control To change the parameter type currently controlled by the parameter wheels select
186. e Builder 2 Enter your name for Author 3 Enter any notes 4 Adjust the channel count to match Protocol 10 channels E Create New Custom Type a This fixture is modeled after the tutorial 5 Click OK to close this window and start the fixture creation The blank new fixture will be displayed a PP ae oor oe CHA eee nnn te e T T a 7 E A no Junus PAA OTTA Flying Pig Systems Appendices 329 Appendices Section 31 The Fixture Builder 31 2 3 Step 3 Configure Channel Functions and Features Intensity Channel Function Feature Dmx Value Beal World Intensity Intensity 0 gt 255 02100 2 UNUSED 1 Select the Function cell for channel 1 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories 2 Select Intensity on the left column to display a list of Intensity function sub categories 3 Select Intensity as the desired function The window will close and you will see intensity assigned as the function and feature for channel 1 Note that the feature column will auto fill with Intensity 4 Select the DMX value cell for channel 1 and press Set Enter the DMX values range for the intensity channel 0 gt 255 and press Enter 5 Select the Real World value cell for channel 1 and press Set Enter the Real World value to be displayed in percentage 0 gt 100 and press Enter Pan and Tilt 16 bit Intensity Intensity 0 255 02255 1 23 Pan Pan 02
187. e Cue Editor window you can also step through the cues using the Next and Back keys while holding down the Cue key 19 7 19 7 1 198 Working with Tracking The Wholehog III is a tracking console which gives it some very powerful abilities Tracking can also add extra complexity but the Wholehog III has several functions that make working with tracking straightforward For a detailed discussion about tracking see Tracking p 6 Tracking Values Backwards When Recording You can use the Track Backwards feature when you record a cue to assign the parameter values to the last cue they appeared in rather than the cue being recorded For example suppose that you have a series of cues with intensity values for three fixtures Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 50 50 50 Cue 2 60 60 Cue 3 70 If you assign all three fixtures to 100 and record with merge into Cue 3 see Insert Merge and Replace p 192 for recording with merging you would get these values Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 50 50 50 Cue 2 60 60 Cue 3 100 100 100 However if you did the same thing with Track Backwards you would get Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 50 50 100 Cue 2 60 100 Cue 3 100 The value of 100 has been applied to the last cue that the intensity parameter had a value in If you Track Backwards a parameter that hasn t been given a value since the start of the cuelist the value is added to the first cue in the cuelist Flying Pig
188. e console or a MIDI Timecode Processor networked with the console 2 Setup Network open the Network window 3 Select the console or MIDI Timecode Processor in the list 4 Settings open the Settings window see Figure 28 3 The MIDI pane of the Console Settings window 5 Inthe MIDI pane turn on MSC by clicking on the checkbox 6 Select a Device ID 7 Select a Format ID Tip Z You can enable incoming MSC commands for individual cuelists using the cuelist s options see Using MIDI Show Control p 294 28 2 2 Sending MSC from the Wholehog III To send MSC from the Wholehog II 1 Connect an MSC device to a MIDI output on either the console or a MIDI Timecode Processor networked with the console 2 Setup Network open the Network window 3 Select the console or MIDI Timecode Processor in the list 4 Settings open the Settings window Flying Pig Systems 293 Reference Section 28 Working with Audio MIDI and Timecode O Console Settings 21x Midi Midi Sysex Realtime config Timecode Device Id po Device Groupld 112 MSC Command format 01 General Lighting Zz MSC in K amp P MSC out Notes vf Notes in Rix channel f Tx channel f Update Nosy Data Modity All whe Apply TA Ok X Cancel Figure 28 3 The MIDI pane of the Console Settings window 5 Inthe MIDI pane turn on MSC Out Tip Z You can enable MSC out for individual cuelists using t
189. e console s USB ports Choose a keyboard model and assign the keyboard layout according to the language of the keyboard you have connected in the Keyboard pane of the Control Panel You can adjust the timings for Repeat Delay Repeat Period and Double Press in the Key Timings pane of the User Preferences window Tip You can use an external keyboard to control many of the Wholehog III s functions as well as entering numbers and text see Keyboard Mappings p 339 This is particularly useful if you are using the Rack Mount Unit version of the console Flying Pig Systems 69 Reference 12 1 8 12 1 9 70 Section 12 Setting Up the System Using the On screen Keyboard You can use the on screen keyboard to enter text when an external keyboard is not present see Figure 12 4 The On screen Keyboard When prompted to insert text press the Set key to launch a touch screen keyboard You can use the Pig key as a shift for uppercase characters Press the Enter key when you have finished typing To close the on screen keyboard without making any changes press Set instead of Enter sj Figure 12 4 The On screen Keyboard Date and Time The console has a built in clock Assign the date time and time zone in the Time and Date pane of the Control Panel You can also assign the format that the date and time is displayed in You will have to restart the Wholehog III and its currently running show for change
190. e destination effect palette already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 178 240 Flying Pig Systems Section 24 Cuelist Playback To play back a cuelist it needs to be attached to a master Masters can be either Physical using the faders and controls on the front panel of the console or Virtual using on screen master controls 24 1 24 1 1 Playing Back from a Physical Master The Wholehog III console has ten physical masters that cuelists can be attached to for playback You can also move cuelists between masters or copy them so that you create a copy of the cuelist on a new master By attaching playback or expansion wings you can add more physical masters to a Wholehog III system Attaching Cuelists to Masters Cuelists are automatically attached to a master when you create them with the Record Choose syntax see Recording to a Cuelist on a Master p 191 Otherwise to attach a cuelist to a master e List 1 Move Choose attaches Cuelist 1 onto the chosen master Tip You can reference several cuelists to different masters using pages see Working with Pages p 277 Moving and Copying Cuelists between Masters Moving a cuelist between masters will detach it from its original master Copying a cuelist between masters will leave the cuelist in its original location and attach a copy of the cuelist to the new location To move a cuelist 1 Press the Choose key of the maste
191. e h A Ki Skip Forwards Skip forward v Skip Backwards Skip back 7v Main Il Halt v Main gt k Go W Fade Default A Use default cuelist time Figure 27 3 The Main Controls pane of the Cuelist Options window Configuring Master Controls When you configure master controls these settings are part of the cuelist and will be applied to the master that the cuelist is on The configuration options for the master controls are shown in the following tables Flying Pig Systems Section 27 Working with Playback Controls Reference The Master Go and Master Halt keys Function None Assert Release Go Halt Back Restart Goto cmdline Options and Notes Disables the control Asserts the master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own assert time for the master overriding the cuelist s assert time Releases the master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own release time for the master overriding the cuelist s release time Go s the master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own fade time for the master overriding the Cuelist s time Halts the master stopping any fades that are in progress Reverses the currently running crossfade Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own back time for the master overriding the cuelist s back time Goes to the first cue in the cuelist Enters the Goto
192. e in both cuelists the new parameter values of the cues will replace the old e Replace Overwrites the cuelist information in that destination If you are copying a cuelist all three options are available If you are moving a cuelist only the Insert option is available Tip If you know that you are about to copy or move a cuelist to an existing destination you can pre select Insert Merge or Replace from the Record Options Toolbar This appears after you press the Record Copy or Move keys 224 Flying Pig Systems Section 22 Working with Scenes A scene is a single cue with full timing features that does not belong to a cuelist Scenes can be used to store a single look that may be called back for use in later programming or to play back many simple looks directly from physical or virtual masters Scenes are stored in the Scene Directory see Figure 22 1 The Scene Directory window For general information on working with directories see Working with Directories p 94 To open the Scene Directory e Open Scene opens the Scene Directory See also Scene Playback p 265 W Scene Directory i 10l x Figure 22 1 The Scene Directory window 22 1 22 1 1 Recording a Scene You can record scenes either directly to a physical master for immediate playback or to the Scene Directory Recording to the Scene Directory To record a scene 1 Create the look for the scene in the Programmer or editor
193. e new patch information to the DMX Processors Or using the command line 1 Setup Patch open the Fixture window 2 Fixture 1 Pig Enter 3 Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch information to the DMX Processors Unpatching by DMX Address To unpatch a specific DMX start address you need to change the Fixture window to View by DP 1 Setup Patch open the Fixture window 2 View by DP change the Fixture window to View by DP Flying Pig Systems Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures Reference When View by DP is selected the UnpatchAtbutton is available on the top toolbar of the Fixture window To unpatch start address 200 in the currently selected DMX universe highlighted in blue e UnpatchAt 200 To unpatch several start addresses e UnpatchAt1 2 200 2 3 300 To unpatch a range of start addresses e UnpatchAt 200 Thru 300 unpatches all start addresses between 200 and 300 To unpatch an entire universe 1 Click or press on the universe to unpatch so that it is highlighted in blue 2 Press Unpatch Universe at the top of the Fixture window Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch information to the DMX Processors 14 3 Configuring Fixtures Each fixture has a variety of settings that control how the Wholehog III handles it Settings that control how the fixture as a whole behaves are configured in the Fixture win
194. e require shutters or dimmers to be closed before sending control commands 46 Flying Pig Systems Section 8 Programming Fixtures Tutorial 8 3 4 Fanning Parameters Sometimes you may wish to assign parameters with an offset across consecutive fixtures so that the value for a particular parameter differs by a fixed step from one fixture to the next This is known as fanning For example you could e Fan the positions of the Studio Spots across the stage from corner to corner e Fan the intensities of the desk channels 100 80 60 40 To fan a parameter 1 Fixture 1 Thru 7 50 select the fixtures and bring their intensity to 50 2 Press and hold the Fan key whilst moving the I Wheel To fan other parameters press and hold the Fan whilst moving the desired parameter wheels When fanning the fixtures at either end of the range take the higher and lower values with those in between evenly spread across the intervening range The value change when fanning is always relative to the starting value if there is no starting value the parameter will fan from 0 8 4 Creating and Using Palettes Palettes are the visual building blocks of each specific look on stage and they are cat egorised into the four parameter types intensity position colour and beam Palettes can be used to apply these building blocks across large numbers of fixtures so for ex ample you do not have to remix a particular colour each time
195. e scene see Running Multiple Scenes p 268 Release Time When you release a scene and fixture parameters go to their default value they do so over the release time and this change may be visible if you have fixtures that are visibly live on stage i e with intensities above zero To assign the scene s release time 1 Open Choose open the Scene window for the scene on the selected master 2 Options gt Scene open the Options window and select the Scene pane 3 Select the Release Time cell Release Time 2s 74 4 Default 4 Set 5 Enter assign the desired release time You can also set a default release time for all newly created scenes in the Scene pane of the Preferences window e Setup gt Preferences Scene Flying Pig Systems 267 Reference Section 25 Scene Playback Tip If you have assigned a release time to a scene and you want to revert to the default release time press the Default button adjacent to the Release Time cell Releasing on Another Go When running several cuelists or scenes in a show you may want a scene to release when another cuelist or scene is triggered This effectively gives the scene the lowest possible playback priority for more on playback priority see Changing a Scene s Priority p 270 You can set Release on Other Go in the Scene window of each scene window 1 Open Choose Options gt Scene 2 Select Release on Other Go Playback Prionty a
196. e tags are resolved once only when the name is applied while uppercase tags remain unresolved until the name is displayed known as dynamic So pressing Set and entering the name of colour palette 3 as amp d amp n will assign the name to be Colour 3 If you assign the name to be amp D amp N the name will also be assigned to Colour 3 The difference is that moving this palette to position 4 will automatically correct the name to Colour 4 Flying Pig Systems 97 Reference Section 13 Using the Console 13 5 13 5 1 98 Working with Editors MM List 1 Cue 1 CEE 151 x Follow Follow View Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table NShots Source a T Next Cue 1 Show Show Fade Technobeam Studio Ed State Palettes Changes Compact 2 Iris Color 575 Num Intensity Strobe _ Postion Colour Mixing Typ Ci Zf E Figure 13 12 A Typical Editor Editors are windows where you can view and assign the parameter values of fixtures There are editors for cues scenes and palettes and the Programmer is also an editor Editing parameter values works in essentially the same way for all of them see Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters p 137 You can open an editor window for any cue scene or palette by holding down the Open key and selecting it from its directory window Alternatively you can use the command line e Cue 1 Open opens an ed
197. e track You can adjust the play or pause location by moving the slider You can use macros to control the CD ROM drive when you launch a show change page or play a cue or scene see Automating the Console Using Macros p 303 You can also use the CD ROM drive as a source for timecode see Using a CD p 298 Flying Pig Systems Section 28 Working with Audio MIDI and Timecode Reference 28 2 Working With MIDI Show Control You can use MIDI Show Control MSC to control the Wholehog III MIDI Show Control is a technology that allows you to control all the elements of a performance lighting sound video pyrotechnics effects and so on from a single controller It uses a variation of the well established MIDI standard to send cuing information between the show controller and the controllers specific to each performance element You can use the Wholehog III as the lighting controller in an MSC show control system receiving com mands from a show controller you can also use the Wholehog III as a show controller sending MSC commands to other controllers For more information on MSC see www midi org In addition John Huntington s defin itive book Control Systems for Live Entertainment contains technical information guidance on show control system design and case studies of show control in use 28 2 1 Bringing MSC into the Wholehog III To bring MSC into the Wholehog III 1 Connect an MSC controller to a MIDI input on either th
198. ecorded For an overview of tracking see Tracking p 6 Insert Merge and Replace When recording copying or moving a cue if the destination location already has a cue recorded in it you will be prompted with record options of Insert Merge or Replace e Insert creates a new destination cue The new cue will be assigned a free location lower than the one chosen using a point number if neces sary e Merge Incorporates the new information into the destination cue If the same fixtures and parameters are in both cues the new values being merged will take priority e Replace Overwrites the cue information in that destination If you are copying a cue all three options are available If you are moving a cue only the Insert option is available Tip If you know that you are about to record copy or move a cue to an existing destination you can pre select Insert Merge or Replace from the Record Options Toolbar This appears after you press the Record Copy or Move keys Numbering Cues If you leave out the cue number when recording cues the Wholehog ITI will give the cue the next whole number in the list If you specify a cue number you can use numbers with up to five digits before the decimal and four digits after for example 11111 1111 This can be useful to insert cues between previously recorded ones You can later renumber a complete cuelist see Renumbering Cues within a Cuelist p 195 Flying Pig Systems Secti
199. ed Wholehog III Product units or parts with a written explanation of the alleged problem or malfunction Ship returned Product units or parts to 53 Northfield Road London W13 9SY UK Note Freight Damage Claims are invalid for products shipped in non factory boxes and packing materials Freight All shipping will be paid by the purchaser Under no circumstances will freight collect shipments be accepted REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED FOR UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER HIGH END SYSTEMS INC MAKES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO ANY PRODUCT AND HIGH END SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE HIGH END SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE INCLUDING LOST PROFITS SUSTAINED OR INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PRODUCT OR CAUSED BY PRODUCT DEFECTS OR THE PARTIAL OR TOTAL FAILURE OF ANY PRODUCT REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER OR NOT SUCH DAMAGE WAS FORESEEN OR UNFORESEEN Warranty is void if the product is misused damaged modified in any way or for unauthorized repairs or parts This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights specific to your locality Declaration of Conformity According to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN45104 Manufacturer s name Flying Pig Systems High End System
200. ed to cyan and magenta e Iris Chase A Sawtooth table is applied to the iris Tip Z You can create many of these useful combinations of tables using the pre defined effects palettes see Applying Predefined Effect Palettes 0 232 Effect Attributes The appearance of the effect table can be manipulated through a combination of adjust ments to its attributes rate size offset length and N shot Effect Rate The effect rate controls the speed of the effect in cycles per minute Adjusting an effect s rate globally will increase or decrease the number of cycles it completes per minute When combining effects you can use the rate attribute to build a specific look For example if you create an effect where a fixture performs a circular motion fading in on the first circuit out on the second then the effect on the intensity parameter would need to be half of the rate on the position parameters The following diagram shows how the value of a parameter assigned to the sawtooth table changes over time with different rate values Flying Pig Systems Section 23 Working with Effects Reference 60 cpm 30 cpm 120 cpm Effect Size The range over which the parameter value varies This is described in terms appropriate for the parameter for example degrees for position parameters or slots for slotted colour parameters For example applying a Sine wave with the default size of 5Hz to a base value strobe rate of 5Hz will vary it fro
201. editor view Table Size Rate Offset Length N Shot you wish to edit in Also ensure that the editor is active with its Edit button selected You can also open an effects palette with the command line For example e Effect 1 Open Flying Pig Systems 239 Reference Section 23 Working with Effects 23 8 Deleting Effect Palettes To delete an effect palette using the commandline 1 Effect 1 Delete deletes Effect Palette 1 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Or from the Effect Directory 1 Press and hold Delete whilst selecting the palette to be deleted from directory 2 Release the Delete key A dialog will appear asking you to confirm the delete 3 Click OK Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirmation by going to Setup Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items 23 9 Copying and Moving Effect Palettes To make a copy of an effect palette in a new location e Effect 1 Copy Effect 2 Enter copies the contents of Effect Palette 1 to Effect Palette 2 e Effect 1 Position 2 Copy Effect 2 Enter copies fixtures that are in Effect Palette 1 and in Position 2 into Effect Palette 2 Similarly to move an effect palette to a new location e Effect 1 Move Effect 2 Enter moves the contents of Effect Palette 1 to Effect Palette 2 leaving 1 empty If th
202. eel on the right of the console and position pan and tilt can be assigned by using the Trackball when in position mode 8 3 1 Assigning Intensity As well as using the I Wheel you can assign intensity with the key and numeric keypad e Fixture 1 5 assigns Fixture 1 to 50 e Fixture 1 70 assigns Fixture 1 to 70 e Fixture 1 05 assigns Fixture 1 to 5 44 Flying Pig Systems Section 8 Programming Fixtures Tutorial There are also quick ways to assign fixtures to full or zero e Fixture 1 Full assigns Fixture 1 to full e Fixture 1 Out assigns Fixture 1 to zero The Out button is on the Main Toolbar at the bottom of the right hand screen 8 3 2 Assigning Position Position can be assigned using the Trackball in position mode or by using the parameter wheels To put the Trackball into position mode toggle the adjacent top right trackball key the Trackball will glow blue Alternatively press the Position key and you can control the pan and tilt movements of the fixture on the parameter wheels This can be useful for adjusting pan and tilt separately Tip Z Pressing the bottom right trackball key puts the Trackball into Ortho mode Pan and tilt will be adjusted independently as you move the Trackball to give fine control of one without disturbing the other 8 3 3 Assigning Colour and Beam There are two ways to assign colour and beam parameters depending on the fixture type Some continuous parameters such
203. een Masters Moving a scene between masters will detach it from its original master Copying a scene between masters will leave the scene in its original location and attach a copy of the scene to the new location To move a scene 1 Press the Choose key of the master that you want to move the scene from 2 Move 3 Press the Choose key of the master that you want to move the scene to Flying Pig Systems 265 Reference 25 1 2 266 Section 25 Scene Playback To copy and so duplicate a scene 1 Press the Choose key of the master that you want to copy the scene from 2 Copy 3 Press the Choose key of the master that you want to copy the scene to Detaching a scene from a Master To detach a scene from a master e Delete Choose detaches the scene from the chosen master Note that this will not delete the scene itself or remove it from the scene directory only detach it from the master Playing Back the Scene To play back the scene press the Go key The scene will fade in with the times recorded with it and the fader acts as an inhibitive master for the scene If the fader is below 100 then the Flash key will momentarily bring the intensity parameters in the scene to their full programmed level just as if the fader had been put to full You can also play scenes back using the Go key of the main playback controls positioned to the right of the masters see Figure 24 2 The Main Playback Control
204. eer ersten ener eenenenes 189 19 1 The Cue Editor WING Ow sssi tititi inna 197 20T CUS TIMINGS inienn eave oe a aia Ta Aa tein al onan bag o a AARE eli oes 206 20 2 POTN WOES EE E E E E A noctasadecdandaderttact 209 20 3 Selecting a Path in a Cuelist WINAOW 00 etter 210 20 4 The Wheels Toolbar showing TIMING ce eerie 211 20 5 Selecting Parameter Types from the Wheels Toolbar ceeeeeeees 212 20 6 The Slot Toolbar showing Paths eee 212 20 7 Ihe Paths TOODA ienero nean dialysate A A o a tanya durian 212 20 8 The Cue Editor window with Fade selected cc cecceeeeeeeeeee eee neenes 214 20 9 Selecting a Path in an Editor oo ee 215 2070 he iG Ger TOOID Ol a e te Ave deve a a a i 216 20 11 A Cuelist with a LOOP sssssssrrsrsrsnrtnrnrrttrtrrt tnt r Strt trar seen sreesnsnenenenenes 219 21 1 The Cuelist Directory WINKOW s ssssrssrssrsrrsrrerrnrirrarrirrnrrnrirererrrrrrrrnrt 221 21 2 The Cuelist WINKOW 00 EEEE 222 22 1 The Scene Directory WINKOW ccccccecec cece eset esse ee ee sree sees erst eeeenenenenes 225 23 EMSSTTODISS Sane a haa A E beats cv bigutel ad aE ui bul nad AnA EA PU 230 23 2 THEAETSCT Direciono aaoi oz eahvnc eteesbeqeaShaeredbaventerdadae 233 23 3 The Wheels Toolbar showing Effect Attributes teeter eee es 233 23 ANTING EMSCTs ENGIN Grid iW cctiavavatise kcal aniseed echt E N A TAEDE 234 23 5 Controlling Effect Transitions with TIMING cece eet ee eee nee eens 237 24 1 The Master C
205. elete a range of scenes 1 Scene 1 Thru 4 Delete deletes scenes 1 to 4 2 Click OK to confirm the delete 226 Flying Pig Systems Section 22 Working with Scenes Reference Tip To detach a scene from its master rather than deleting it completely hold Delete while pressing the master s Choose button This removes the scene from the master but not from the scene directory 22 3 Copying and Moving Scenes To make a copy of a scene e Scene 1 Copy Scene 2 Enter copies the contents of Scene 1 to Scene 2 Similarly to move a scene to a new location e Scene 1 Move Scene 2 Enter moves Scene 1 to Scene 2 effectively deleting 1 If the destination scene already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 228 22 4 Editing Scene Contents You can edit the contents of a scene in an editor window For example to open Scene 1 for editing 1 Open Scene opens the Scene Directory 2 Open Scene 1 opens the scene editor for Scene 1 3 Alternatively using the command line Scene 1 Open 4 Press the Edit button in the editor window to select this as your current editor Within the editor you can assign fixture parameters and timing in the same way as in the Programmer see Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters p 137 For general inform ation on working with editors see Working with Editors p 98 Flying Pig Systems 227 Reference Section 22 Working with Scenes
206. elist PIAYDACK cece eee eee ee ees 242 24 1 3 Releasing a Cuelist ON A Master cece eee eee 244 24 1 4 Cuelist OPTIONS 00 0 cece cece ee cece ee eeeeeeeeneneeaeanaes 247 24 2 Running Multiple Cuelists c cee eeiteener einen 250 24 2 1 Using HTP AN LIP einn eet i me aai 25 24 2 2 Asserting One Cuelist Over the Others 0 0 251 Flying Pig Systems ix Wholehog III 24 2 3 Changing a Cuelist s Priority cece tenes 252 24 2 4 Multiple Cuelists with Effects ccccceseseseeeeeeeeeeees 254 24 3 Playback with a Virtual MOSTEF ss sssssssrirrsrirersrrrrrrrrerrrree 254 24 3 1 Running Virtual Masters from the Cuelist Directory NN IPO E E otitis I T EDA EN EAE DETS EA NEAT harman ae 254 24 3 2 Running Virtual Masters from the Cuelist Win AOW re ENTA ONEA calle ta AEAT ERIA E dl 255 24 3 3 Running Virtual Masters from the Command E AE AAEE TE A O 255 24 4 Understanding Feedback for Cuelists acccccccccrcrcca 256 24 4 1 Control and Playback Toolbar Feedback acc 256 2A A 2 Cuclist FECA DAK ss eiorinn ra A AAG 258 24 4 3 The Output WINKOW 0 0 cece ec eceeeeeee ee ee ease eeeeeeeneeeens 259 24 4 4 The Levels View WINKOW 00 ccc ceee ett eee teeter eenees 260 24 5 Advanced Cuelist PlAYDOCK etree a 260 24 5 1 Overriding Rate During PIQYDACK ccce 260 24 5 2 Manual Crossfading c cette neni eed 261 24 5 3 Using a Cuelist OS A CRASE wo ieee tee teeta eenes 262 24 5 4 Cuelists AN TrACKING cece tee e ete ne tent e
207. ell for channel 9 Flying Pig Systems 331 Appendices Section 31 The Fixture Builder 2 Press the New DMX Entry button to add an additional DMX entry for channel 9 3 Repeat the above until there are 8 channel entries for this channel 8 Yellow Variable 255 gt 0 02100 g UNUSED _ UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED a UNUSED i UNUSED 10 UNUSED ww lwo wojo Define each DMX entry for Slots Yellow Variable 255 gt 0 O 100 E Gobo Slots iy open 0 EJ _ Gobo _ Slots 25 d p Gobo Slots 35 pem Cam ig Gobo Slots 45 3 Gobo Slots amp _j indigo dye 9 Gobo Slots 100150 ig Gobo Slots 151 gt 200 alien star 9 Gobo Slots 200 255 A ho UNUSED shim stars valiant 1 Select the function cell for a blank DMX Entry of channel 9 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories 2 Select Beam on the left column to display a list of Beam function sub categories 3 Select Gobo as the desired function The window will close and you will see Gobo assigned as the function and feature for channel 9 Note the feature column will auto fill with slots 4 Select the DMX value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the DMX values range for the first gobo value 0 and press Enter 5 Select the Real World value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set A dialog box will display a list of slot names Select a slot name and press Enter 6 Repeat the above ste
208. emporarily simulate a timecode source perhaps because the actual source is not available during programming Timecode simulation is controlled from the Timecode Toolbar 1 Open Choose open any Cuelist window 2 Press View Timecode to open the Timecode Toolbar 3 Press Simulate to show the timecode simulation controls To set up timecode simulation 1 Configure Timecode open the Timecode pane of the Console Settings window Or Press the Configure button on the Timecode Toolbar 2 Select a timecode format to simulate from the list SMPTE 30 NTSC 30 EBU 25 Film 24 3 If required assign up to three Jump points These are timecode values that you can jump straight to from buttons on the Timecode Toolbar 4 Press Close to finish You can control timecode simulation from the Timecode Toolbar with the Go Stop and three Jump buttons Flying Pig Systems 301 Section 29 Automating the Console Using Macros You can use macros to automate tasks on the console Tasks that can be automated in clude e Going Halting Asserting Releasing and Fading Masters e Going Halting Asserting and Releasing Cuelists e Going Halting Asserting and Releasing Scenes You can have a macro run at these times e When a show is launched see Launch Macros p 105 e When a page is loaded see Restoring Activity When Changing Pages p 280 e When a cue or scene plays see Triggering Automatic Tasks When a Cue Runs p
209. ene 264 24 5 5 Triggering Automatic Tasks When a Cue Runs 264 25 Scene PIGY DOCK 5 ccseteds exes ccaexeeeiied suns abeswen snes ied aae EE EEEa riB 265 25 1 Playback Attached to a Physical Master ccccceceeeee eens 265 25 1 1 Attaching a Scene to a Master oo cece eerie 265 25 1 2 Playing Back the SCENE oo cece terete een ees 266 25 1 3 Releasing a Scene ON A Master cece eee 267 25 2 Running Multiple SCENES 0 entree ne teeters 268 29 2 1 Using HTP ANG LIPS ii sdecucke date iniiae Macnee 269 25 2 2 Asserting One Scene Over the Others ccce 269 25 2 3 Changing a Scene s Priority eect eeees 270 25 2 4 Multiple Scenes with Effects ccccccccceeeeeeeee ee eaes 272 25 3 Playback with a Virtual MOSTED cccccceceseeeseeeseee ease ee ee eae 272 25 3 1 Running Virtual Masters from the Scene Directory WR CLOW sea ise tenets wee talon tarts niet aT tings tin E aa DAPI 272 25 3 2 Running Virtual Masters from the Scene Win GOW ss sotiederagenintinnnntideiee E E 273 25 3 3 Running Scene Virtual Masters from the Command LIMO Saan onenau haan sage aea aE SA ANAR R ASIERE 273 25 4 Understanding Feedback for SCENES ccccccccccrcccrcccrrno 274 25 5 Advanced Scene PIAYDOCK terriers 275 25 5 1 Overriding Rate During PIQYDACK liccc 275 25 5 2 IPCB Fader Mode cceccceeeetee eee eeeee eee eee neeneneaes 275 26 Working With PAGES cceeeeee eee ee cece teense eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 277
210. ength values UN 100 50 200 N Shot This is the number of times that the effect repeats before finishing A dash in the N Shot cell denotes that the effect will run indefinitely 23 2 Applying Predefined Effect Palettes You can quickly apply effects to the current selection using predefined effects palettes in the Effect Directory see Figure 23 2 The Effect Directory Effects palettes for parameter functions not available in the current selection will be greyed out for example the Iris Step palette is not available for Studio Color 575s as they do not have an iris parameter To open the Effect Directory e Open Effect e Effect Effect 232 Flying Pig Systems Section 23 Working with Effects Reference W Effect Directory lol x CENE C EJ18 oe green step blue step Figure 23 2 The Effect Directory To apply an effects palette 1 1Thru5 50 Enter select the required fixtures and assign an intensity value 2 Effect 13 Enter assigns Effect Palette 13 Studio Colors 1 to 5 fade their intensity between 0 and 100 You can also select the effect palette by pressing or clicking on its button in the Effect Directory window 23 2 1 Adjusting Predefined Effects Once you have applied a predefined effects palette to the selected fixtures you can alter the attributes Rate Size Offset and Length of the effect using the parameter wheels for explanations of the different attribut
211. enty minutes by default To use Auto Backup 1 Setup Shows Auto Backup see Figure 13 20 The Auto Backup pane of the Show Manager window 2 Press Enable Auto Backup 3 Choose the number of copies to keep The console will automatically delete older backups as new ones are made to maintain the assigned number of most recent backups 4 Choose the time between backups the backup location and the file name for backups 5 Select Apply to commence Auto Backup The status of the automatic backup is shown at the bottom of the Auto Backup pane with a time to the next backup and the progress of the backup when it is being made Flying Pig Systems 109 Reference 13 8 4 13 8 5 110 Section 13 Using the Console zmizi current Show Aap m Current Show Using this panel you can control where and how often the server makes a backup of your show You can also specify how many backup copies are kept Each copy is numbered the largest number is the latest Once you start AutoBackup the backup process happens automatically ta AutoBackup Enable AutoBackup 9 CD Burning Number of copies to keep 3 Maximum 100 Q File Browser Time between backups 12 Backup location Shows Browse AutoBackup File Name A Big Show_bck Selected Name and Location will be replaced by the AutoBackup sequence number c Documents and Settings All Users Documents A Big Show_bek hog3 tar gz Serve
212. er 9 1 Open Choose open the Scene window for Master 10 2 Options open the scene s Scene Options window 3 Select the Scene pane and select Pile Add FX 25 3 25 3 1 272 Playback with a Virtual Master You can play back scenes without assigning them to a physical master by using Virtual Masters run directly from the Scene Directory Virtual masters are always at full intens ity so the level of fixtures is that recorded in the scene An almost unlimited number of virtual masters running different scenes can be in operation at any one time You can operate scene virtual masters from the Scene Directory window or from the command line Tip You can press Scene Release to release all running scenes playing back as virtual masters Running Virtual Masters from the Scene Directory Window You can run scene virtual masters from the Scene Directory window e Open Scene e Scene Scene To run a scene make sure that the Guard button in the Scene Directory window is deselected Then press a scene button in the directory and it will playback onstage as if Go had been pressed on a physical master Holding your finger down on the scene s button is the equivalent of holding the master s Choose key and you can then use the central playback controls The scene buttons in the directory are coloured red to indicate that they are live onstage and change to green when the scene is fading in Flying Pig Systems Sect
213. er with pan that determines the direction that the fixture points in A method of synchronising the console with other playback sources such as music video or film The Wholehog II supports MIDI Linear Timecode and Video Timecode See Also MIDI SMPTE video timecode Cues have several values that control timing fade wait delay and path See Also fade time wait time delay time path The output of a master running a cuelist is a mix of hard and tracked parameter values Hard values are those that are in the current cue while tracked values are those that have tracked through from previous cues See Also tracking A method of dealing with cuelists that does not record information in a cue unless it is a change from the previous cue This allows multiple cuelists to be running at the same time without them in terfering with each other See Also hard value tracked value touched value default value A network protocol or language that computers use to talk to each other over Ethernet The Wholehog III uses this standard protocol which means that it can safely be connected to other networks of computers and will not interfere with them For show critical situations you should run the Wholehog III on its own independent network See Also Ethernet See DMX universe Flying Pig Systems Glossary up time USB video timecode virtual master visualiser wait time white point widget wysiwig zip disk
214. erge and Replace p 164 16 6 164 Insert Merge and Replace When recording or copying a group if the destination location already has a group re corded in it you will be prompted with record options of Insert Merge or Replace If you are moving a group only the Insert option is available e Insert creates a new destination group The new group will be assigned a free location just before the one chosen using a point number if neces sary e Merge Incorporates the new information into the destination group e Replace Overwrites the group information in that destination Flying Pig Systems Section 16 Working with Groups Reference Tip If you know that you are about to record copy or move a group to an ex isting destination you can pre select Insert Merge or Replace from the Re cord Options Toolbar This appears after you press the Record Copy or Move keys Flying Pig Systems 165 Section 17 Working with Palettes Palettes allow intensity position colour and beam parameters to be recorded as easily accessible building blocks to be used when programming Palettes are stored in a dir ectory accessed by holding the Open key and a parameter type key e Open Colour opens the Colour Directory Alternatively e Colour Colour For general information on working with directories see Working with Directories p 94 W Colour Directory Y m x C412 C 411 A dark blue Figure
215. ering Cues within a Cuelist If your cuelist has many point cues 1 2 1 5 2 5 etc or if cues have been deleted you may wish to renumber the cues so that they are all whole numbers You can renumber cuelists using the Renumber button press More on the Main Toolbar Flying Pig Systems 195 Reference Section 19 Working with Cues e Renumber Choose renumber cues in the cuelist on the selected master starting at 1 and increasing by 1 e List 1 Cue 3 Thru Renumber Enter renumber all cues from Cue 3 up wards in Cuelist 1 starting at Cue 3 and increasing by 1 e List 1 Cue 3 Thru 10 Renumber Enter renumber Cues 3 through 10 in Cuelist 1 starting at Cue 3 finishing at Cue 10 with other cue numbers equally spaced between Alternatively you can specify the range of new numbers to be given e List 1 Cue 3 Renumber 5 Enter renumber cue 3 as cue 5 in cuelist 1 e List 1 Cue 3 Thru 10 Renumber 20 Enter renumber cues 3 through 10 in cuelist 1 with new numbers starting at 20 The rest of the new numbers will have the same order and spacing as before e List 1 Cue 3 Thru 10 Renumber 20 Thru 30 Enter renumber cues 3 through 10 in cuelist 1 starting at 20 finishing at 30 with other cue numbers equally spaced between Note that renumbering does not moves cues within the cuelist if you try to renumber Cue 5 as Cue 3 you will get an error message You should use Move for this purpose see Copying and Moving
216. ers belonging to fixtures that are decreasing in intensity Delay time The time between the cue being triggered and parameter values starting to change As with fade times you can assign a single delay time or have separate in delay and out delay times The in delay time is the delay between the cue being triggered and parameters belong ing to fixtures that are increasing in intensity starting to change while the out delay time is the delay between the cue being triggered and parameters belonging to fixtures that are decreasing in intensity starting to change Path How parameter values change during the fade The simplest path is a straight line so that parameter values change smoothly and evenly throughout the fade but you can use paths that make all of the change happen at the start of the fade for example The different types of trigger values are Wait time The time from the previous cue being triggered to the current cue being triggered Follow on time The time from the end of the previous cue to the current cue being triggered Timecode A specific timecode value when a cue is triggered see Trig gering Cues from Timecode p 299 Figure 20 1 Cue timings shows how the main kinds of timing and triggering values control the playback of cues Flying Pig Systems 205 Reference Section 20 Working with Cue Timing and Ordering Cue 1 Cue 1 Cue 2 trigger completes trigger 4 100 2 2 0 gt
217. es 6 7 151 201 headphones 291 help full tutorial 25 getting help 347 getting started 3 key to this manual 3 quick tutorial 21 Help button 94 98 highlight 183 customising 184 highlight palette 94 Hold Over If Active 278 HSI 15 HTP 9 250 251 268 scene 269 hub see switch hue 15 Hue 147 I Wheel 12 143 sensitivity 68 Ignore MSC In 294 Import preferences 110 inhibit 275 inhibitive masters 266 286 copying to pages 281 moving to pages 282 removing from pages 282 Insert button with cuelists 224 with cues 192 with groups 164 with palettes 178 with scenes 228 installing software 343 intensity 15 modifying values 143 interface see graphical user interface inverting pan and tilt 131 inverting parameter values 146 inverting the fixture selection 139 IP address console 73 DMX Processor 77 using a custom 74 IPCB fader 275 383 J jump points in timecode 301 Jump Toolbar 94 99 K key 3 double press time 69 repeat delay 69 repeat period 69 keyboard external 69 mappings 339 on screen 70 keys 143 Back 140 197 blackout 285 Blind 186 Choose 241 242 265 cursor 117 Effect 233 Fan 155 Flash 242 Go 242 Goto 243 Halt Back 242 Highlight 183 Live 179 181 meaning of LEDs 256 modifier 84 new 12 Next 140 197 Next Page 278 Open 85 Pig 84 152 187 341 see Pig key Release 244 267 Set 70 Skip Back 243 Skip Forward 243 s
218. es p 5 useful After that you can either follow the Tutorial p 19 or simply start using the console and use the Reference p 61 as needed 1 2 Key The following conventions are used in the text of the manual Position p 144 A cross reference to another part of the manual In electronic versions of the manual HTML and PDF these references are clickable hyper links fixture A reference to a term in the Glossary In electronic versions of the manual HTML and PDF these references are clickable hyperlinks Enter A name of an interface element such as a button key or window Flying Pig Systems 3 Introduction Studio Color 10 12 password Record Enter Open Fixture Setup Patch gt Fixture Schedule Section 1 Getting Started A button that has a label that is specific to the show created by the console or the user The brackets indicate a label that will vary depend ing on your particular show Text or other information that you should enter using the numeric keypad or the on screen or external keyboard A description of information that you should enter that is not the lit eral text Buttons or keys separated by commas show that the keystrokes are sequential In this case press the Record key then the Enter key Buttons or keys followed by are held down while the second key is pressed In this example hold down the Open key and press the Fixture key A series of operations th
219. es see Effect Attributes p 230 The Wheels Toolbar shows the current parameter value being assigned by each wheel whenever the Effect key is selected see Figure 23 3 The Wheels Toolbar showing Effect Attributes For more on the different effect attributes see Types of Effect p 229 Effects Rate Effects Size Effects Offset Effects Length 5 cycles min 60 o 100 Figure 23 3 The Wheels Toolbar showing Effect Attributes 23 3 Applying and Editing an Effect 23 3 1 Applying Effects with the Effects Engine To apply an effect 1 Inthe Programmer or editor select the required fixtures and assign their base parameter values These settings will be the underlying Flying Pig Systems 233 Reference Section 23 Working with Effects state for the effect for example the centre position of a fixture doing a circular movement effect Equally an intensity ripple between 0 100 will need a base value of 50 in order to use the full length of the effect 2 Open Effect the Effects Engine and Effect Directory will open see Figure 23 4 The Effects Engine and Figure 23 2 The Effect Directory 3 Inthe Effects Engine select the Table cells for the fixture parameters that you want to apply the effect to 4 Press Set choose the effect table from the menu and press Enter lolx Function All Intensity All Position All Colour All Beam Intensity Bate Size Offset Length N Shot Fade Delay P
220. es in the desired order in the Page Directory See Copying and Moving Pages p 283 26 2 1 Options When Changing Page When you change page there are three options for what happens to any cuelists scenes or inhibitive masters that are still active e Release All releases all cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters on the old page and replaces them with the cuelists on the new page e Hold Over If Active keeps active cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters from the old page on their master until you release them They are then replaced with the contents on that master on the new page e Leave In Background leaves the old cuelist scene and or inhibitive master active in the background and attaches the new one to the master To get to the background item go back to the page that it is on 278 Flying Pig Systems Section 26 Working with Pages Reference 26 2 2 Tip You can think of changing pages using the Leave In Background option as being similar to having one very long page and moving the masters to look at different sections of it A further option Remember Fader Values allows a page s fader levels to remain where they were last time the page was loaded If the physical faders have moved from these values a blue matching bar will appear see Matching Levels When Changing Page p 279 By default Release All and Remember Fader Values are selected for new pages but you can change this in the User Preferences w
221. es window 3 Click on Generate Flying Pig Systems Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures aio x Make Groups Maximum Group repeat q 3 Make Intensity palettes A Make Position palettes A Make Colour palettes vA Separate by wheel A Make Beam palettes be _ Separate by wheel Alignment spacing q 6 X Cancel A Generate Figure 14 5 The Auto Palettes window Reference You can choose to have the console automatically make Flying Pig Systems Groups If the Make Groups button is depressed the console will make groups for each fixture type You can specify the repeat multiple for the groups to be created For example with a value of 3 Group 1 will contain fixtures 1 4 7 10 Group 2 fixtures 2 5 8 11 Group 3 fixtures 3 6 9 12 Intensity Palettes If the Make Intensity Palettes button is depressed the console will make intensity palettes Position Palettes If the Make Position Palettes button is depressed the console will make position palettes Colour Palettes If the Make Colour Palettes button is depressed the console will make colour palettes If you press the adjacent Separate by Wheel button the console will create separate colour palettes for each colour wheel in fixtures that have more than one This ensures that you can use the palettes to programme looks that use both wheels simultan eously without the palettes conflicting with each other Bea
222. etwork that may include other Wholehog III desks expansion wings external devices offline editors and visualisers along with dimmers and fixtures See Also off line editor visualiser playback wing The number that identifies the console when it is operating as part of a network A curve that defines the relationship between the plotted parameter value and the DMX value sent to the dimmer or fixture Conversion curves are like dimmer curves or profiles on other consoles and should not be confused with paths Conversion curves are proper ties of the fixture while the path is a property of a cue See Also path A transition between two cues one replacing the other When you connect two Wholehog II components or computers together directly you need to use a special type of Ethernet cable called a cross over cable This is different from the normal type of Flying Pig Systems Glossary cue cuelist default default value delay time desk desk channel desktop view DHCP diffusion Flying Pig Systems Ethernet cable used with hubs and switches see below A cross over cable is supplied with each console and DMX Processor See Also Ethernet A look on stage achieved through the manipulation of fixture parameters recorded as part of a cue list A cue requires a trigger either manual or automatic and has attributes such as fade wait and delay times See Also scene fade time wait time delay time
223. f CE is limited to one universe you will need to specify which universe is active within the WYSIWYG file 1 With the WYSIWYG file open go to the Live Module and select Edit gt Universes 2 The Visualisation Universe Selection window will open This window will display all the currently configured universes within your drawing Use this window to select the universe you wish to visualize from the console Visualisation Uikverse Selection Current Universe name Set Current EDMX OK Cancel 30 3 4 Using the Connectivity with WYSIWYG Once the above configuration is complete the connectivity between the Wholehog ITI system and WYSIWYG should begin working You can close the Wholehog IIT DP Flying Pig Systems 317 Appendices Section 30 Visualiser Connectivity window and the connectivity will continue as long as the Wholehog III logo remains in the task bar Ur exe 3 13PM Autofocus Feature WYSIWYG can send information back to your Wholehog III console to allow lights to be automatically positioned to a particular location on stage rather than individually positioning the fixtures using the console s controls Refer to the WYSIWYG Users Manual for further details on the Autofocus feature When WYSIWYG Autofocus is enabled selecting and deselecting fixtures in WYSIWYG will do the same on your console You can also use the functions in WYSIWYG to assign the intensity iris pan tilt and CMY colour mixing v
224. f making the console s abstraction layer work See Also abstraction layer The position of the light beam of a fixture within space or the surface it hits Not to be confused with the beam edge quality See parameter The range of colours that a fixture is capable of producing Each fixture type has its own gamut See buddying Image placed within the optical system of the fixture projected onto lit object Also known as a pattern A way of displaying information and allowing the user to work with it in a visual form Most personal computers use a GUI with windows buttons and a pointer See Also command line A way of storing and recalling a selection of fixtures quickly See graphical user interface See hard value The output of a master running a cuelist is a mix of hard and soft parameter values Hard values are those that are in the current cue while soft values are those that have tracked through from previous cues See Also tracking 369 Hog Edit HTP hub hue I Wheel in time inhibitive master instrument intelligent light intensity IP address Glossary A PC based program that allows the editing of show information With the use of a DMX Processor Hog Edit can output this inform ation to visualisers lighting consoles or fixtures See Also widget visualiser Highest Takes Precedence In this system of operation the highest value assigned for a parameter is the one that ap
225. f the lighting state on stage so that rehearsals can continue To do this using Highlight 1 Select the Studio Spot in the Programmer 2 Press the Highlight key The Studio Spot will retain its position on stage but the intensity will go to full the colour to white the gobo and frost to open and the iris to 100 so that you can see the beam clearly on the lit stage 3 Adjust the pan and tilt parameters to position the Studio Spot as re quired 4 Adjust the iris parameter to give the correct beam size Press the Highlight key again to release the colour gobo and frost parameters from Highlight so that they return to their original pro grammed values The values for pan tilt and iris retain their new values in the Programmer 6 Press Update and OK to record the changes in the appropriate cue see Auto Update p 184 Flying Pig Systems 183 Reference 18 3 1 18 3 2 Section 18 Advanced Programming Customising Highlight By default highlight brings intensity to full with all colour and beam parameters at their default values However you can use a palette to assign the highlight values for each parameter of each fixture This can be useful as the default highlight values for some parameters may not be what you want for example you may prefer to leave zoom focus and iris settings unaltered by Highlight so that you can see the programmed beam size and edge quality To assign a pre existing palette to be the
226. figure settings that are specific to individual parameters in the Edit Fixtures window Figure 14 12 The Edit Fixtures window e Setup gt Patch gt Edit Fixtures W Edit Fixtures a loj xj Sotby 7 Function mi E Me io Ve il Function Releasal Feature Default Min Max Offset Default Patt Max Speed Desk Channel Studio Color 575 Intensity Yes Intensity 0 0 100 0 Linear Os a m g Pan Yes Pan g 185 185 o Linear Os f Studio Spot 575 Tilt Yes Tilt gs 135 135 o Linear Os f 7 P Track 100 100 100 0 Linear Os a Position Ti Yi Technobeam Iris asition Time es Use Global j j j j Random 0 0 100 0 jLinear Qs Colour Yes Slots open I li 1 open Spin 0 rpm 300 rpm 300 rpm O rpm Linear Os Random 0 0 100 0 Linear 0s Colour 2 Yes Slots open 1 1 1 f open Spin Orpm 300 rpm 300 rpm O rpm Linear Os Colour Time Yes Track 100 100 96 _ 100 0 Linear _ _ Os pC Use Goba VA ALA Colour 1 Blink Yes Blink off Colour 2 Blink_ Yes Blink off 7 AA LL WLLLLLLL A Ramp Snap OHz OHz 10 Hz QHz Linear Os v Random 0 Hz 0 10 Hz 0 Hz Linear Os Figure 14 12 The Edit Fixtures window You can select a fixture type from the list on the left hand side of the window The main part of the window then shows the configurable settings for each fixture of that type The numbered buttons in the Jump Toolbar at the top of the window take you quickly to a particular fixtu
227. firm before deleting directory items Tip S To detach a cuelist from its master rather than deleting it completely from the show file hold Delete while pressing the master s Choose button This removes the cuelist from the master but not from the cuelist directory 21 4 21 4 1 21 4 2 Copying and Moving Cuelists Cuelists can be copied and moved within the Cuelist Directory To open the Cuelist Dir ectory e Open List Copying Cuelists To make a copy of a cuelist e List 1 Copy List 2 Enter copies Cuelist 1 to Cuelist 2 If the destination cuelist already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 224 Moving Cuelists To move a cuelist to a new location within the Cuelist Directory e List 1 Move List 2 Enter moves Cuelist 1 to Cuelist 2 If the destination cuelist already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 224 Flying Pig Systems 223 Reference Section 21 Working with Cuelists 21 4 3 Insert Merge and Replace When copying or moving a cuelist if the destination location already has a cuelist in it you will be prompted with record options of Insert Merge or Replace Insert creates a new destination cuelist The new cuelist will be assigned a free location just before the one chosen using a point number if neces sary e Merge Incorporates the source information into the destination cuelist If the cue numbers ar
228. fixture library within the show will be displayed Select a manufacture and fixture to copy the existing library to the fixture builder Select OK to submit the library information and begin the building process see Building the Fixture p 324 31 1 3 Building the Fixture Once you have added a fixture library from blank or from a copy you will see the DMX channels in the fixture builder 324 Flying Pig Systems Section 31 The Fixture Builder Appendices W Fixture Builder lolx COE E lol x Tutorat 7 Creste New Copy From Delete Curent Super Cyber a Create New Copy From Delete Curent Type Information Type Information Model Name Tutorial Author Me Model Name Super Cyber Author Brad Date Modfied 20 04 2005 19 4254 Date Modified 26704 2005 09 17 00 Notes This fixture is modeled after the tutorial eee Started from a copy of Cyberight M2 Litho This Cybetight has special functions Di Footprint 10 Patchpoints 1 channels 1 Edt Dr Footprint 2 Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 Edt Channel Function Feature Dmx Value Real World fi UNUSED i Channel Function Feature Dm Value Reawoid luNusED LLL VLILI TA Pan Pan 0265535 21 2522125 3 UNUSED 34 Tit Tit 0 gt 65535 E a 4 UNUSED f 5 Colour Slots Jiss b ws A 5 Colow sots hes sit 4 12 50 fe UNUSED 5 Colour Slots fier slot 31250 z MUSED f z E Sa IEA EA fa UNUSED f 5 Colour Slots iE slot 50 3 UNUSED f 5 Colour Sits liza slot 12 0 lio UN
229. ful if you want to use an updated fixture library to take advantage of enhanced or more recent fixture definitions If you do this you will only be able to merge fixture types since there are no fixtures or programming in a library file Important You cannot merge information between libraries or shows created with libraries with different library version numbers For example a show created Flying Pig Systems 111 Reference 112 Section 13 Using the Console with a v2 library cannot be merged with a show created with a v3 or V4 lib rary To select a show or fixture to merge 1 Setup Shows Current Show open the Current Show pane of the Show Manager N Press Merge to be guided through the merge process The Merge Show window will open see Figure 13 22 The Source Location page of the Merge Show window 9 Choose a source show file or library Note that if you have chosen a backup bck file it may take a few moments for the console to recog nise it as it has to uncompress the file to read its contents gt Once you have chosen a show or library you will be offered the possible merge options Merging Fixture Types Merging Fixtures and Merging Programming Merge Show Source Location Look In ta Shows z Ew ba Name J Description J Created w Big Show Hog3 Show v3 0 47 14 3 2005 11 42 a Big Show Hog3 Show 3 0 47 14 3 2005 11 39 g F Tutorial No Patch Tutorial
230. g 227 moving to pages 282 naming 226 playback 265 recording 225 removing from pages 282 status 274 timing 228 Scenes Multiple 268 scrolling window contents 87 select all 67 139 Select Toolbar 140 selecting fixtures 138 from what is onstage 179 selection order the 141 161 388 Index separating parameters 160 servicing 351 set 67 Set key the 70 show connecting to a running 104 launch automatically 104 launching a new 103 launching an existing 104 name 103 show control MIDI 294 Show Manager 106 Show Palettes button 98 show server 104 shows backing up 108 changing current 107 copying 107 creation date 107 deleting 107 managing 106 merging 111 moving 107 multiple on the network 11 75 naming 107 renaming 107 starting new 107 updating fixture types 111 shuffle 67 Shuffle button 141 shutting down 106 simultaneous cues 8 effects 13 Skip Back key 243 Skip Forward key 243 slots 146 naming 135 Soft Keys 12 83 soft patching 124 software beta 350 clean install 343 updating 343 version numbering 350 sound 291 Source button 98 specifications 355 split times 207 Flying Pig Systems Index spreadsheets 90 aggregation 92 compact mode 91 Start Window the 103 starting a new show 107 starting up 103 State button 201 static address 73 Status Bar 102 sub selections of fixtures 140 Suck button 179 support 347 Suppress MSC Out 294
231. g dif ferent cuelists can be in operation at any one time You can operate virtual masters from the Cuelist Directory window from the Cuelist window or from the command line Tip You can press List Release to release all running cuelists playing back as virtual masters Running Virtual Masters from the Cuelist Directory Window You can run cuelist virtual masters from the Cuelist Directory window e Open List e List List To run a cuelist make sure that the Guard button in the Cuelist Directory window is deselected Then press a cuelist button in the directory and it will playback onstage as Flying Pig Systems Section 24 Cuelist Playback Reference if Go had been pressed on a physical master Holding your finger down on the cuelist s button is the equivalent of holding the master s Choose key and you can then use the central playback controls The cuelist buttons in the directory are coloured red to indicate that they are live onstage and change to green when a crossfade is running W Cuelist Directory if 8 11 List 7 List 8 List 10 List 11 24 3 2 Running Virtual Masters from the Cuelist Window To run a cuelist virtual master from the cuelist window 1 2 3 4 Open List open the Cuelist Directory window Check that the Guard button is depressed Open List 1 open the required cuelist Press the Play Controls button in the Cuelist window The on screen playback controls will appear W
232. ged through the introduction of parameters such as gobo gobo rotation soft or sharp edges iris and diffusion See Also gobo iris diffusion A blocking cue prevents changes made to earlier cues from tracking through to later cues See Also tracking See console 365 366 booting up brightness buddying button cell chase chroma colour command line console console identify ing number conversion curve crossfade cross over cable Glossary See start up See intensity During fanning buddying keeps fixtures in gangs that all take the same parameter value See Also fanning An on screen control operated by clicking with the mouse or trackball or directly by pressing then on the touch screens In this manual the word key is reserved for hardware buttons on the console s front panel A single rectangle in a spreadsheet containing a value See Also spreadsheet A series of cues that run automatically connected with link and delay attributes See Also cue cuelist See hue Fixture colour achieved through colour wheel gel string or colour mixing A colour may have three attributes intensity hue and saturation See Also intensity hue saturation A method of entering information into the Programmer using the numerical keypad and the button See Also Programmer The user interface of a lighting control system The Wholehog III console is one component of a n
233. guridad de los Estados Unidos e internacionales Las modificaciones al producto podrian afectar la seguridad y dejar al producto fuera de conformidad con las normas de seguridad relevantes Wholehog II HRMS SSS HighEnd Systems N mlt 7 X VARRERU BRAPRROUMBRREAS HI k RRUGES NTL EF COA Nm HI SRESRSICML CHEERS BARU BERERE CML GUKEICT BIRAMBHVYET Important Safety Information Instructions pertaining to continued protection against fire electric shock and injury to persons are found in Safety Information p 359 Please read all instructions prior to assembling mounting and operating this equipment Important Informations De S curit Les instructions se rapportant la protection permanente contre les incendies l lectrocution et aux blessures corporelles se trouvent dans Importantes Informations Sur La S curit p 360 Veuillez lire toutes les instructions avant d assembler de monter ou d utiliser cet quipement Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise Sicherheitsanleitungen zum Schutz gegen Feuer elektrischen Schlag und Verletzung von Personen finden Sie in Wichtige Hinweise Fiir Ihre Sicherheit p 360 Vor der Montage dem Zusammenbau und der Inbetriebnahme dieses Ger ts alle Anleitungen sorgf ltig durchlesen Informazioni Importanti Di Sicurezza Le istruzioni sulla protezione da incendi folgorazione e infortuni sono contenute nell Importanti Informazioni Di Sicurezza p 362 Si prega di leggere tutte le istruzioni p
234. h these three pieces of information hue saturation and intensity every possible colour can be represented As most fixtures already feature a dimmer to control the in tensity it is only necessary to specify the Hue and Saturation to uniquely represent any colour Flying Pig Systems 15 Introduction Section 3 Wholehog II Users 3 6 2 16 The Hue and Saturation of White Light White is defined as the colour with 0 saturation the hue doesn t matter However while tungsten and arc lamps both produce white light when you compare them side to side their colours are considerably different The tungsten lamp has a warmer colour with a higher red and yellow content while arc lamps usually have a cooler light with more blue in it One version of white is not more correct than the other so either may be chosen to be the reference point depending on the situation In a theatrical environ ment where tungsten sources are more common tungsten white is likely to be most appropriate base In other environments predominantly using arc sources it will be more convenient to use arc white for information on changing the white point see Using Colour Matching p 148 The Colour Matching System The Wholehog III s colour matching system is based on a fixture library that contains colour calibration data for the fixture types in use This calibration ensures that fixtures of different types can easily be assigned to the same c
235. he Fixture Builder window Select an option from the buttons at the top of the window W Fixture Builder Create New Copy From Delete Current The options are 322 Create New creates a new fixture from scratch See Creating a New Fixture Library From Scratch p 323 Flying Pig Systems Section 31 The Fixture Builder Appendices Copy From creates a new fixture based on an existing fixture within a fixture library See Creating a New Fixture Library Using an Existing Library p 324 e Delete Current deletes the user created library selected in the drop down list To edit any existing User Created libraries select it from the drop down list Super Cyber v Create New Copy From Delete Current mine Author Brad Super Cyber 7 00 Creating a New Fixture Library From Scratch When you press the Create New button the Create New Custom Type window will open see Figure 31 1 The Create New Custom Type window Create New Custom Type 2 x Create New Custom Type Model Name ETA Author Notes Create Blank 4 Create From Existing Channel Count it p Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 Add patchpoint channel 1 Reset Patchpoints P A T x Cancel Figure 31 1 The Create New Custom Type window Within this window you can define the Model Name Author and enter any Notes You can also choose to create blank or create from existing from within this window
236. he Master pane select IPCB Crossfader from the Fader drop down menu Once created you can inhibit the value of parameters contained in the IPCB fader scene by adjusting the scene s fader level Flying Pig Systems 275 Section 26 Working with Pages Pages allow you to predefine layouts of cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters so that they can be loaded quickly on to the available playback masters For a concert for example cuelists can be organized in one page per song so that before each performance it is possible to re arrange the pages to reflect the current running order of the songs One cuelist can be used several times within a page or on several pages or it can be unique to a specific page A template page can define certain masters to be the same on every page Pages can be accessed from the Page Directory e Open Page e Page Page For general information on working with directories see Working with Directories p 94 26 1 Creating a New Page Selecting a page that currently does not exist will automatically create a blank page and load it onto the masters Cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters can then be assigned to the masters on the newly created page To create anew page 1 Open Page opens the Page Directory 2 Make sure that Guard is not selected in the Page Directory otherwise you will not be able to create a new page using this method 3 Press a button in the Page Directory where y
237. he Release Time cell Release Time 2s vA Default 4 Set 5 Enter assign the desired release time You can also set a default release time for all newly created cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the Preferences window e Setup gt Preferences Cuelist Tip If you have assigned a release time to a cuelist and you want to revert to the default release time press the Default button adjacent to the Release Time cell Auto Release You can use auto release options to send fixture parameters to their default values at the end of a show or to relinquish control of parameters for use by other cuelists when a cuelist is no longer needed There are two Auto Release options for cuelists e Auto release at End Use this to automatically release the Cuelist at the completion of the fade and delay times of the last cue Flying Pig Systems 245 Reference Section 24 Cuelist Playback e Add Release End Cue After the last cue has run another press of the Go key will release the cuelist rather than running the first cue again You can assign auto release options in the Playback Options window of each cuelist 1 Open Choose Options gt Cuelist 2 Select the desired release option from the Action at End of List menu Action at end of list Auto elease atend Y Action of Go when loopina Exit loop immediately or You can also assign the default Auto Release options for new cuelists in the Action at
238. he cuelist s options see Using MIDI Show Control 0 294 28 2 3 Using MIDI Show Control The Wholehog III recognises and sends the following MSC commands Hog III Command MSC Command MSC Data Go 0x1 GO cue number cuelist number Halt Ox2 STOP cuelist number Resume Ox3 RESUME cuelist number Skip Forward 0x4 TIMED_GO time 0 cue number cuelist number Skip Back 0x4 TIMED_GO time 0 cue number cuelist number Release Oxb GO_OFF cuelist number Change Page Ox1ld OPEN_CUE_PATH page number MIDI show control is enabled by default for all cuelists and scenes You can assign a cuelist or scene to ignore incoming MIDI show control commands 294 Flying Pig Systems Section 28 Working with Audio MIDI and Timecode Reference 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Ignore MSC In Similarly you can prevent the MIDI show control commands for a cuelist being sent out from the console 1 Open Choose Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Suppress MSC Out Tip Z MSC doesn t distinguish between cues and scenes as the Wholehog IlI does so there are no MSC commands to control scenes To work round this you can send an MSC command with a CUE_PATH value of 5 The Hog Il will treat the Cue number as a scene number instead 28 2 4 Tracking Backup Using MIDI Show Control One important application for MIDI show control is to slave one console to another as a tracking backup 1 Load the show file onto both
239. he name Tip To name a palette immediately after recording it pressing the Set key will open a Quickname window Enter the palette name and select OK Flying Pig Systems Section 17 Working with Palettes Reference 17 2 Using Palettes in Programming In the Programmer or editor you can apply a palette by selecting it from its directory window The palette will be applied to the current fixture selection as long as the palette contains parameter information for the selected fixtures Doing so assigns the parameter value to be a reference to the palette A palette that puts all Studio Colors in the rig to deep red will therefore apply this immediately to any Studio Colors that are in the current selection see Figure 17 2 Example of Parameters set to reference a Palette For example 1 Open Colour open the Colour Directory window 2 3 Thru 5 select the fixtures 3 Colour 2 select the palette from the Colour Directory window Or using the command line e 3 Thru 5 Colour 2 Enter Figure 17 2 Example of Parameters set to reference a Palette 17 3 Editing Palette Contents I nix Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table NShots l MMES B a ry Show Fade All ae Palettes Changes Eaa a Types Num Intensit Stabe Eestion Lt Colour 1 Colour 2 il i Cya it i Shak i Figure 17 3 The Palette Editor window Flying Pig Systems 169 Reference Section 17 Working w
240. highlight palette right click it in the palette directory and select it as the highlight palette The highlight palette is shown by the icon in the palette directory window Tip Z You can use masking when creating the highlight palette to ensure that all the required parameter types are included see Recording with Specified Masking p 174 Lowlight By default the parameters of fixtures that are not selected when you use highlight remain at their current output values You can customise the output values of these parameters during highlight by creating a lowlight palette For example you could create a lowlight palette that sets the intensity of all fixtures to 30 to give the highlighted fixture greater contrast Note that lowlight only affects parameter values of the non selected fixtures in the current editor Parameter values being output by playbacks will not be affected To assign a pre existing palette to be the lowlight palette right click it in the palette directory and select it as the lowlight palette The highlight palette is shown by the icon in the palette directory window Tip You can use masking when creating the lowlight palette to ensure that alll the required parameter types are included see Recording with Specified Masking p 174 18 4 184 Auto Update When you are programming a complex show the look on stage may be built up from cuelists and scenes on several masters You can change the lo
241. ic groups of fixtures to be controlled by specific operators and their consoles Zones give more efficient plotting of large rigs for example allowing concurrent plotting of stage and audience lighting states This function can also be used when operating lighting over several interlinked environments 377 Glossary for example in a theme park ride or in an architectural environ ment zoom Allows the size of beam image to be adjusted whilst maintaining its focus See Also iris 378 Flying Pig Systems Symbols key 143 A abstraction 13 Action of go when looping 249 Active 17 aggregation collapsing sections 93 jumping between sections 94 section priority 93 aggregation spreadsheets 92 All button 139 Allow Refs button when recording palettes 176 Apply Patch 122 arrow keys see keys cursor Assert 251 269 Assert Time 252 270 audio see sound auto backup 108 Auto Launch 104 Auto Palettes 120 auto release 245 Auto Update 184 back 67 Back button 197 Back key 140 Back Time 248 backlight off time console touch screens 65 DMxX Processors 79 backup 64 108 tracking 295 Backwards button 198 ball mode 67 battery 64 Beacon 80 beam modifying values 145 146 blackout key 285 blind mode 186 blocking 181 201 cues 7 removing blocking 202 brightness Flying Pig Systems desk lights 66 touch screens 64 buddying with fanning 157 bugs reporting 349 Burning a CD
242. ign effect timing values in the Effects Engine window Effect timings l Eisi Engine E 1o0 x 0 gt 270 100 E All Colour 23 5 Recording an Effect Palette You can record any combination of effect parameter values into a palette 1 Inthe Programmer or editor select the fixtures and assign the required effects You can do this directly in an editor or using the Effects Engine 2 Record Effect the Effect Directory window opens 3 Select a location by pressing a button in the directory window This will only record parameters that have been touched in the Effect window and does not include the parameters underlying values To include underlying intensity position colour beam and time information use the mask function 1 Select the fixtures and assign the desired effect table 2 Record Effect 3 Select Mask from the Record Options Toolbar and select the parameter types that you wish to record Use for intensity Use P for position Use C for colour Use B for beam and Use T for time values For more on masking when recording palettes see Recording with Spe cified Masking p 174 4 Select a location from the Effect Directory window 23 5 1 Naming an Effect Palette You can give an effect palette a name that will be displayed in the Effect Directory 1 Open Effect opens the Effect Directory 2 Check that the Guard button is selected so that you d
243. ill be used to update the selected cue or Track Backwards For scenes you have the option to merge the programming into the scene or into the palettes that are referred to in that scene Once you have chosen your options press OK to perform the update Note that the parameter values remain in the Programmer Tip gZ If there is no playback on stage when you press Update the Auto Update window will not appear and the Update key press is ignored When you press the Updote key the Update Toolbar will also appear see Figure 18 2 The Update Toolbar This allows you to select which parameter types are updated whether changes should track forwards and whether references should be allowed when updating palettes See Recording with Specified Masking p 174 Stopping Values from Tracking Forward p 199 and Reference Palettes p 176 Flying Pig Systems 185 Reference Section 18 Advanced Programming JL Forward Backward Remove State Usel UseP UseC UseB UseE UseT More Figure 18 2 The Update Toolbar 18 5 18 5 1 18 5 2 186 Editing Discreetly It is often useful to make changes to parameter values discreetly or without them ap pearing on stage at all during a rehearsal or performance for example To do this use the Wholehog III s Fade Changes and Blind functions Fade Changes If you select the Fade Changes button in an editor window any changes you make will appear on stage over the cu
244. ill use a standard DMX mapping to determine hue and satura tion Different types of fixture have different colours for white because of the different types of lamp used Tungsten lamps have a warmer colour with a higher red and yellow content while arc lamps usually have a cooler light with more blue in it One version of white is not more correct than the other but there needs to be a single agreed white point for all fixtures to match when the Saturation parameter is assigned to 0 The Wholehog III allows you to assign the White Point to Tungsten or Arc 1 Setup Preferences Misc 2 Choose between Arc and Tungsten In a theatrical environment where tungsten sources are more common tungsten white is likely to be most appropriate base In other environments predominantly using arc sources it will be more convenient to use arc white Important Before assigning the colour of fixtures using Hue and Saturation make sure that you have selected your preferred white point Changing it after you have started programming will change the appearance of previously pro grammed colours The Colour Picker You can use the Colour Picker to graphically select Hue and Saturation values To open the Colour Picker e Hold down the Open key and select HS Picker e Pig Open Colour There is also a button to open the Colour Picker in the Colour Directory window The Colour Picker will change its display a
245. immer 14 DP 2000 _ 2 501 Fixture 1 DP 2000 4 2 intensity Figure 14 9 A Fixture with Multiple Patch Points 14 2 4 Cloning Patching of Universes Cloning patching copies fixture and associated patch information from one DMX universe to another A selected fixture will therefore control recurring patch locations across several universes To clone the patching of one universe to another 1 Setup Patch gt View by DP open the Fixture window in View by DP view 2 Select the universe to clone by clicking on the column in the spread sheet The selected universe is highlighted in blue 3 Press Clone Universe The Clone Universe window will open see Fig ure 14 10 The Clone Universe window 4 You will be asked for a destination DMX Processor and universe You can create a new DMX Processor if you want to clone to a universe on a DMX Processor not currently connected to the console and you can specify an offset for the patch addresses to position them differently in the universe Click on OK when you have finished 5 Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch information to the DMX Processors Clone the patch from universe 1 on DP 1 DP Select a target DP AE a vA Create a new DP Number f Universe Select a target universe ojo oaas Offset Specify a value to offset the addresses by DK Cancel T A Figure 14 10 The Clone Universe window
246. in playback control keys are e Assert reasserts control of fixture parameters by the chosen master if other masters have taken control under the Latest Takes Precedence rule see Asserting One Cuelist Over the Others p 251 e Release releases the chosen master s control of fixture parameters making the cuelist inactive see Releasing a Cuelist on a Master p 244 e Goto you can use the Goto key with the command line to go to a spe cified cue in the chosen cuelist For example e Goto 3 Enter the cuelist on the chosen master plays cue 3 Skip Forward Skip Back steps forward or backward through the chosen cuelist by one cue Cue timing information will not be used the cue appears on stage immediately e Halt Back pauses any running crossfades on the chosen master If there are no running crossfades then pressing Halt Back will start a fade back to the previous cue e Go if the chosen cuelist is inactive pressing Go will activate it onstage If the cuelist is already active then pressing Go will run the next cue or restart paused crossfades see Halt Back below 24 1 3 Releasing a Cuelist on a Master You can remove a cuelist s look from the stage so that it relinquishes control of all fixture parameters and effectively turns the cuelist s output off this is known as releasing the cuelist To release a cuelist on a master e Release releases the currently chosen master e Release Choose use the Choose
247. indow e Setup gt Preferences gt Misc see Figure 26 1 The Misc pane of the User Preferences window W User Preferences loj xj p n 3 Sensitivity Pz 7 j Playback Bar Options Colour Space Options a Key Timings Show cuelist numbers a Show cue times Hue Saturation White Point Arc v Track Ball Note Changing the white point will change the appearance a Show cue numbers A Show cue names of any existing colours programmed using Hue and Saturation Edt Use with care Programming 0 Highlight template cian Maso Default Timing Page Change Options _ Startup Macro Page Change Action Release All v 5 Ey Default Naming Grand Master Options Wheelset Editor a Remember fader values DBO on Flash Playback Defaults Cuelist Window Options a Cuelist Clear follow cue on scroll ia Scene l mmama amp Reports Import Export ake Apply ala Ok x Cancel Figure 26 1 The Misc pane of the User Preferences window If you want to hold over a particular cuelist scene or inhibitive master when changing page hold the master s Choose key when changing the page The item s name in the Playback Bar will have a blue background to indicate it is in holdover mode To remove a held over master simply release it and the cuelist scene or inhibitive master for that master on the new page will replace it if there is one Matching Levels When Changing Page When you change page
248. ing Pig Systems Section 18 Advanced Programming Reference You can chose which fixtures or parameter types are copied into the Programmer For example e Cue 1 Position Copy Enter copies only the position values from Cue 1 into the current editor 18 3 Highlight and Lowlight Pressing the Highlight key temporarily adjusts the selected fixtures to open white with intensity at full and all other parameters at their default settings This function can be useful when you want to see the beam of a fixture on a lit stage when assigning focus positions for example Highlight only changes the parameter values in the output not in the current cue or in the Programmer or editor and highlight has the highest priority when the console determines a parameter s output value Highlight will remain active until you press the Highlight key again and you can use the Next and Back keys to highlight in turn each fixture in the current selection You can release each parameter from highlight by adjusting its value in the Programmer or editor letting you modify parameters whilst keeping the fixture beam as visible as possible For example suppose that you have a Studio Spot 575 subtly lighting a part of the stage setting with a dark blue breakup gobo softened using the frost parameter and with the iris controlling the beam size The piece of set that the Studio Spot is lighting has been moved and you need to refocus it while keeping the rest o
249. ing a palette to a direct palette will not alter any programming done previously using the palette cues and scenes already recorded will still contain references to the palette Only subsequent programming will be effected 17 7 Insert Merge and Replace When recording or copying a palette if the destination location already has a palette recorded in it you will be prompted with record options of Insert Merge or Replace If you are moving a palette only the Insert option is available e Insert creates a new destination palette The new palette will be assigned a free location just before the one chosen using a point number if neces sary e Merge incorporates the new information into the destination palette If the same fixtures and parameters are in both palettes the new values will replace the old e Replace overwrites the palette information in that destination Tip Z If you know that you are about to record copy or move a palette to an existing destination you can pre select Insert Merge or Replace from the Record Options Toolbar This appears after you press the Record Copy or Move keys 178 Flying Pig Systems Section 18 Advanced Programming 18 1 Selecting from What is Onstage You can select fixtures from what is on stage using the Live key Fixtures are considered to be on stage if their intensities are non zero For example e Live Enter selects all fixtures that are on stage You can apply a
250. inhibitive masters such as editing their contents remain with that item and not with the page Copying Cuelists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters to a Page Copying a cuelist to a page creates a new cuelist which is independent of the one it is a copy of Any changes made to this new cuelist will not effect the original cuelist To copy an existing cuelist to a page e List 2 Copy Choose copies cuelist 2 to the selected master You can also copy a cuelist from one master to another 1 Choose press the Choose key of the master with the cuelist you want to copy 2 Copy 3 Choose press the Choose key of the master you want to copy the cuelist to Flying Pig Systems 281 Reference 26 3 2 26 3 3 26 3 4 282 Section 26 Working with Pages You can copy scenes and inhibitive masters in the same way Moving Cuelists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters to a Page Moving a cuelist to a page does not create a new cuelist so changes made to the cuelist will affect all other uses of that cuelist on other pages To move an existing cuelist to a page e List 2 Move Choose moves cuelist 2 to the selected master You can also move a cuelist from one master to another 1 Choose Move press the Choose key of the master with the cuelist you want to move 2 Choose press the Choose key of the master you want to move the cuelist to You can move scenes and inhibitive masters in the same way Removing Cuelists Scenes
251. ion 25 Scene Playback Reference W Scene Directory re A Tearful Scene 25 3 2 Running Virtual Masters from the Scene Window To run a cuelist virtual master from the Scene window 1 Open Scene open the Scene Directory window 2 Check that the Guard button is depressed 3 Open Scene 4 open the required scene 4 Press the Play Controls button in the Scene window The on screen playback controls will appear W Chosen Master Scene 4 BJ D0 0 lt Do Jaee Play Leam Controls Timing Wait Insert Link Scene 4 The controls are from left to right the Go Halt Back Skip Back Skip Forward and Release buttons These function in the same way as their front panel equivalents see The Main Controls p 243 Note that Skip Back and Skip Forward are not used with scenes 25 3 3 Running Scene Virtual Masters from the Command Line To run a scene on a virtual master from the command line e Scene 1 Enter sends a Go command to scene 1 Flying Pig Systems 273 Reference Section 25 Scene Playback 25 4 Understanding Feedback for Scenes There are several ways in which you can tell the status of the console s output This section describes the information shown on the Playback Bar for scenes the playback control LEDs on the front panel of the console and the Output window work in the same way for scenes as for cuelists and are described in Understanding Feedback for Cuelists p 2
252. iour of the function and no two features can occur at the same time Each feature can have its own DMX value or range of values The function type defined in the function cell will determine what fea tures are available in the feature cell For instance selecting a Strobe function will result in a choice of 13 features including shutter rate ramp ramp snap random etc Many functions have pre defined features that cannot be changed Intensity Pan Cyan etc When building a fixture library you define a feature as a sub set of a particular function and associate it with a specific DMX value or range A gobo function might have six slot features one for each gobo one spin feature and one random feature Each of these entries should be mapped to the corresponding DMX value s according to the fixture s DMX protocol A single DMX channel can have many different functions and features each with their own unique DMX values or ranges of values DMX Value This field is used to define the exact DMX value or range of values used by the function and feature of the DMX channel Entries in this field can be a single DMX value or a range of values Ranges can be entered with the Thru key on the console keypad For example 0 gt 255 would result in a full range for an 8 bit DMX channel DMX ranges can be inverted if desired for example 255 gt 0 to match the real world range they correspond to If a function is defined as a 16 bit DMX function then
253. ip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirmation by going to Setup Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items 13 3 Working with Spreadsheets Many windows on the Wholehog III show information such as parameter values timings and so on in a spreadsheet style display These all work in the same way To resize a column Place the cursor over the right hand edge of the column header The cursor will change to a double ended arrow Click and drag to resize the column 90 Flying Pig Systems Section 13 Using the Console Reference I Vale Fade Delay Path Size Rat column header Show Fade Palettes Changes e To move a column Click and drag on the column header e To hide a column Right click on the column header and choose Hide e To show a hidden column Right click on a column header and choose the name of the column from the menu To sort the spreadsheet Right click on a column header and select Sort to sort the spreadsheet by the values in that column Select Sort again to the reverse the direction of the sort You can also right click on a column header and select Sub sort to assign a second level of sorting For example if you sort the Fixture window by fixture type and sub sort by Patch then all the Desk Channels will be shown grouped together in
254. irectory F9 Scene Directory F3 Colour Directory F10 F4 Beam Directory F11 List Directory F5 Effects Directory F12 Page Directory F6 Macro Directory 1 0 open views 1 10 F7 Group Directory With Ctrl Z Undo Y Redo X Visual Cut C Visual Copy V Visual Paste Cursors Visual select range as Ctrl cursors With Tab 1 0 Go Master 1 10 With 1 0 Pause Master 1 10 Flying Pig Systems Section 33 Pig Key Commands The Pig key is the Wholehog III s main modifier key it can be used to modify or extend many of the console s commands The following tables lists its uses with keys and buttons and with other controls Pig with Keys and Buttons Use Result Pig Pig Backspace Pig Blind Pig Choose Pig Copy Pig Flip Pig Go Pig Next on the View Toolbar Pig Next Page Pig Open Backspace Pig Open Colour Pig Park Pig Record Pig Release Pig Size on the Window Control Toolbar Pig Touch Pig Undo Pig with the arrow keys Pig when pressing a button in a directory When patching unpatches the selected fixtures Removes values from the currently highlighted cells in the Programmer or editor When leaving blind mode parameters will fade to their new values in the assigned or default fade time rather than snapping to their new values Opens the playback options for the Cuelist on the selec ted master Copies the contents of the current
255. irrrerirrrersrrrererrre 9 2O HIP ONG LIP eieae eat alone dest nin Vent EE AEE EAEE A en 9 2 7 Individual Times for Each Parameter 0 0 eetee ener e eee e eed 10 3 Wholehog Il USCIS inisinia anatia eei aiak a a 11 Sil NetwWwOrkiIN G ieran a o e oee E dined a a i lee 11 3 1 1 Multiple Consoles on the Same SNOW sscrececrerrere 1 3 1 2 Multiple Shows on the Network cccccceeeeee seen seen ees 1 3 2 Ihe Front PANEI eein apnena A a kiga 11 SQ FAde ina ciated nit ANEA EEA T RAEN ating 12 3i222 WACKDEIl a te cit a a a a a Sae 12 3 2 3 Vertical Wheels 0 ttre ener einenes 12 32 A4ANEWKEYS oii R A A A N aOR 12 3 2 5 TOUCH SCIOCNS rren iar a iie ra A E A EEE a 12 3 3 New Playback Features ss ssissrsrrrrrrrirrsrrsnrnrrnrrrrrrrrersrrrre 12 3 4 The Effects ENQ NE 0 ni n eerie tens 13 JO ADSTIOCTION erranera ia nies Mat vacate aeedisisad ec Misetal ls avi artes 13 3 5 1 Real World UNITS erent 13 39 2 POFOMClers E EE 14 3 5 3 Interchangeable FIxXtUreS cece tenet nines 14 3 0 Colour MANO e en a E a E E 14 JON COUP Model anana a e oa a eae 15 3 6 2 The Colour Matching System oo cette eens 16 3 7 New and Streamlined FUNCTIONS 1 0 centre te ene eenees 17 TETUNONIO a E E E E ET Gedo E E hs 19 4 Quick amp Dirty A Show in Ten Steps ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 21 4 1 Step 1 Connecting the MOINS eee ete a 21 4 2 Step 2 Connecting the DMX ProcCeSSOr ccccee eee
256. is recorded for that parameter During playback parameters remain at their last assigned level for example fixture 1 remains at 50 intensity when cue 3 is played because no change was recorded So during playback there are two types of fixture parameter value output e Hard Values values programmed into the current cue Hard values are sometimes known as touched values e Tracked Values those values assigned in previous cues but that have not yet been changed again or removed from the output These values are said to have tracked through from a previous cue in which they were Hard Values 2 4 1 Tracking Through Changes One advantage of tracking is that changes can be tracked through a series of cues In the example given above if you changed the intensity of fixture 2 in cue 1 to 60 this value would track through into cue 2 since cue 2 has no information for fixture 2 recor ded The value will still change to 100 in cue 3 since there is a hard value recorded there Tracking can be very useful when you want to make the same change to a series of cues for example you might have a series of cues that include a fixture that lights a part of the set in the same way throughout If you later want to change the intensity of that light you can change it in the first cue that it appears and the change will track trough to all the cues until the next hard value This saves you from having to reprogramme the change in every
257. it by disconnecting the mains power waiting a few moments and reconnecting it 2 Check the network cabling If the DMX Processor is connected directly to the console then an RJ45 cross over cable needs to be used If the DMX Processor is connected via a switch or hub then normal non crossover RJ45 cables need to be used The Link light will be lit on the DMX Processor if the correct connection has been made Flying Pig Systems 347 Appendices Section 35 Getting Help inixi Name State Pid MO Command Line desktop Running 344858 port 6600 nodeid 1 dummyfp Running 23601 editor Running 254059 port 6600 nodeid 1 fp_driver Running 23682 launcher Running 23480 livecache Running 230057 port 6600 nodeid 1 Running 226860 port 6600 instance 2 netnum 2 Running 396 61 port 6600 instance 1 netnum 1 playback Running 341656 port 6600 nodeid 1 server Running 382055 port 6600 show C Documents anc Figure 35 1 The Launched Processes window 3 Check the network settings The DMX Processor and console both need to be on the same subnet 4 Check the port number setting The DMX Processor and console both need to have the same Port Number See Network Settings p 77 and Connecting and Configuring More Complex Networks p 73 5 Check the software The DMX Processor and console both need to be running the same version of the software see Updating the DMX Pro cessor Software p 344 35 1 3 The con
258. it is used in a show When you record a cue or scene after assigning fixture parameter values using palettes the Wholehog III keeps a reference to the palette rather than a numerical value Only when you play back the cue or scene does the console looks up the numerical value in the palette This means that if for example you change your mind about a specific po sition perhaps because the drum riser is moved downstage updating the palette will in effect automatically update every cue that that palette was used to build This is a very powerful feature as you can easily make changes that are global across your whole show Examples of possible palettes for the tutorial rig are e Position palette All Technobeams on Keyboards e Position palette All Technobeams on Drums e Position palette All Technobeams on Vocals e Position palette All Technobeams on Guitar Flying Pig Systems 47 Tutorial 8 5 48 Section 8 Programming Fixtures e Colour palette All Studio Colors at Magenta Palettes are stored in palette directory windows which can be opened by pressing Open and the associated parameter type key Intensity Position Colour Beam To record for example a position palette 1 Position the Technobeams on the drum riser accessing each one at a time and moving it into position 2 Record Position the Position Directory opens 3 Palette 2 choose a location in the directory by pressing the on screen button
259. ith Network Processors p 76 28 5 Triggering Cues from Timecode You can select a timecode source for each cuelist and then give timecode values to cues within the list to determine when they should be triggered To select a source 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window 2 Options gt Cuelist go to the Cuelist pane of the Playback Options window 3 Select a timecode source from the drop down list Timecode Source None Vv mecode pone eo m Ci upress MSC out 4 Ensure that the Enable Timecode button is selected Flying Pig Systems 299 Reference Section 28 Working with Audio MIDI and Timecode Tip Z There is an Enable Timecode button in the Cuelist window so you can easily enable and disable timecode during programming and playback without having to open the Playback Options window each time To trigger a cue from timecode 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window 2 Select the Wait cell for the cue and press Set 3 From the toolbar select Timecode 4 Enter a timecode value in hours minutes seconds and frames in the form hh mm ss ff then press Enter As well as entering timecode values manually you can use the Wholehog III s learn timing function to quickly associate timecode values with cues see Learn Timing p 217 By default cuelists will follow the incoming timecode even if the timecode skips for wards or backwards generally this is a useful behaviour as for exa
260. ith Palettes You can change the parameter values that are applied when a palette is referenced during playback by editing the palette s contents in an editor window see Figure 17 3 The Palette Editor window For example to open Colour Palette 2 for editing 1 Open Colour opens the Colour Directory 2 Open Colour 2 opens the palette editor for Colour Palette 2 3 Alternatively using the command line Colour 2 Open 4 Press the Edit button in the editor window to select this as your current editor Within the editor you can assign fixture parameters and timing in the same way as in the Programmer see Individual Parameter Timings p 210 Press Update after editing to save the changes to the palette For more information on working with editors see Working with Editors p 98 Tip When you open a palette for editing you may only appear to see one fixture when you recorded several This is due to the way palettes can be global with a single set of parameter values that can be applied to any fixture see Palette Contents Global Per Fixture Type and Per Fixture p 172 17 3 1 Updating Palettes with Different Parameter Types Palettes contain one or more parameter types If you edit a palette and add values for parameters of a type that was not previously in the palette and then update the palette these values will not be stored If you want to change the parameter types that a palette contains you need
261. ith them For show critical situations you should run the Wholehog III on its own independent network See Also Ethernet A network device such as a DMX Processor or MIDI Timecode Processor that handles data coming into or going out of the Wholehog II network See Also DMX Processor MIDI Timecode Processor Network nodes are items of equipment connected to the network Consoles DMX Processors and PCs are all nodes See Also DMX Processor console See Hog Edit The output of the console more specifically the fixtures that have non zero intensities The time of the fade of the outgoing cue during a crossfade All fixtures that are decreasing in intensity will go down over this time See Also split fade path fade time Flying Pig Systems Glossary page palette pan parameter Parameter Wheel patch patch point path pattern peripherals Pig key pile on playback playback wing Flying Pig Systems A preset arrangement of cuelists residing on the masters Pages can be changed allowing the ten masters to be used by many cuelists A stored parameter setting such as focus for one or more fixtures Fixtures of different make or type may share the same palette See Also directory One of the parameters together with tilt that determines the dir ection that the fixture points in A controllable property of the light produced by a fixture For ex ample a fresnel has one attribute intensity
262. itor for Cue 1 and makes it editable Editor Window Controls The main part of an editor window shows the fixture parameter values in a spreadsheet view with each row representing a single fixture see Working with Spreadsheets p 90 At the top of the window there are three toolbars with buttons the Editor Values Toolbar toolbar the Editor Toolbar and the Jump Toolbar The following sections describe the buttons that are common across all editors some editors have additional buttons that are specific to that type of editor and these are described in the relevant part of the manual The Editor Values Toolbar The Editor Values Toolbar has buttons for Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table and N Shot Use these buttons to display the different kinds of information associated with the fixture s parameters see Working with Fade Timings p 206 Flying Pig Systems Section 13 Using the Console Reference The Editor Toolbar The Editor Toolbar has the following buttons Button Purpose Edit Press this to make the contents of the editor editable rather than just to view it Instructions given to the command line or using the parameter wheels and I Wheel are directed to the editable editor Show State In cue editors press this to see all the parameters that will appear on stage including those that have tracked through from earlier cues in the cuelist With Show State deselected only the hard values
263. its IP address automatically from the first one s DHCP server However if you are using the second console as a backup then if the first one has a problem it may not be able to supply an IP address and the backup may fail Flying Pig Systems Section 12 Setting Up the System Reference ieiz Dii Network oe peas IP Address DHCP Server 4 Sound Use default IP settings Q Run DHCP server an Keyboard va Obtain an IP address using DHCP Use custom DHCP range Wings r4 Use custom IP settings DHCP Address Range Start 0 0 0 0 S Widgets IP Address 4 0 0 10 DHCP Address Range End 0 0 0 0 Bg Auto Launch j System Info Subnet Mask 123 123 G a f tev fo X Cancel Figure 12 7 The Network pane of the Control Panel More than One Show on the Network If you want to run more than one show on the same network you need to choose a port number for each show The default port number is 6600 so the second show could be on 6601 the third on 6602 and so on You need to assign the port number of each console for the show it is used on 1 Shut down and re start the console 2 In the Start window press Settings 3 Enter the port number 4 Either launch a new show or join a running show Also you will need to assign the Port Number of the DMX Processors according to the show they are being used on See Setting the Port Number p 78 Connecting to an Existing Network Yo
264. ity A single stage look that does not have the attributes of a cue and is not part of a cuelist A scene can be loaded onto a master or triggered by a go button See Also cue cuelist The order in which the user selects fixtures into the Programmer or editor The Wholehog ITI remembers this and can apply fanning Flying Pig Systems Glossary server shape generator show server slot SMPTE Soft Key soft parameter value speed split fade spreadsheet start up submaster superuser switch system zone TCP IP Flying Pig Systems or effects according to a fixture s place in the sequence The se quence is recorded as part of groups and palettes See Also group palette See show server See effects engine The Wholehog III that owns a show Other consoles may join the show but the original console that created the show will remain the show server A discrete step in a parameter s range such as the position of a gobo wheel A form of time code that can be used to synchronise the operation of various controllers for example synchronising lighting to video playback The Soft Keys are the row of keys above and below the touch screens They mimic the function of toolbars docked along the edge of the screens See Also toolbar See tracked value See fade time A crossfade where the incoming and outgoing cues have different times causing an imbalanced or dipped fade profile See Al
265. ity position colour etc each channel refers to a single parameter of the fixture rather than the whole fixture If you have a mixed rig of conventional and moving lights this system can become very confusing Flying Pig Systems 5 Introduction Section 2 Users New to Moving Light Consoles The Wholehog III treats a fixture as a single entity no matter how many or few paramet ers it has By default each type of fixture has its own numbering range so that you would refer to Studio Spot 6 and Cyberlight 12 Fixtures can be numbered in any way that you prefer however For more information see Modifying the User Number p 130 The Wholehog III treats conventional lights consisting of a luminaire controlled by a dimmer as a special kind of fixture known as a desk channel A desk channel has only one parameter intensity 2 3 Palettes The complexity of modern lighting rigs especially with the widespread use of moving lights means that programming can be very time consuming Palettes help to simplify the process by allowing pre defined lighting elements to be created and then used as required Once you have created a palette such as a particular set of position settings with moving lights you can recall those settings instantly and record them into cues A great advantage of palettes over the equivalent group features found on many con soles is that when you record a cue using the palette
266. ive to fingertips If you need to clean the screens use a soft dry lint free cloth don t use any solvents chemical or abrasive cleaners The LCD operating temperature must be between 0 and 45 degrees Celsius 32 to 113 Fahrenheit You should keep the LCDs out of direct sunlight Too much exposure to the sun may cause the screens to turn black requiring several hours to cool and return to normal If this happens you can use External Displays p 65 and the Trackball and Wheels p 66 instead To avoid this use the Wholehog III in the shade when programming outdoors 34 3 Front Panel Care The front panel needs no particular care to ensure longevity over and above the obvious You can clean it with a soft dry lint free cloth don t use any solvents chemical or ab rasive cleaners Do not allow fluids dirt or other doubtful substances to come into contact with the console In the event of fluid getting into the console disconnect mains power immediately and consult your nearest service agent Some support contact details are shown in the front of this manual Flying Pig Systems 345 Section 35 Getting Help You can open the Wholehog III s built in User Manual by pressing the Help button on the Window Control Toolbar at the top of the right hand screen This will open the rel evant part of the User Manual for the frontmost window If you are having problems with the console try the trouble shooting guide below If you
267. ixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 2 100 60 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 30 40 50 Because of tracking when you copy a cue to another location you only copy the hard values so you do not create a new cue that actually represents the on stage look that you would get by running the original cue To copy both hard and tracked values you can use Copy and State e List1 Cue 5 Copy State List 2 Cue 1 Enter creates a new cue in Cuelist 2 that is the state of Cue 5 in Cuelist 1 Unblocking Unblocking removes redundant hard parameter values A parameter value is redundant in a cue if it is the same as the value for that parameter in the previous cue in the same cuelist For example Channel 1 2 3 4 Cue 1 100 50 50 Cue 2 50 100 Cue 3 50 100 100 50 In this cuelist the values for channels 1 3 and 4 are redundant in cue 3 After unblocking the values in the cuelist would be Channel 1 2 3 4 Cue 1 100 50 50 Cue 2 50 100 Cue 3 100 To unblock cues use the Unblock button in the Main Toolbar e Cue 3 Unblock Enter unblock cue 3 on the currently chosen master e List 1 Cue 3 Unblock Enter unblock cue 3 of cuelist 1 e Cue 1 Thru 10 Colour Unblock Enter unblock only colour parameters in cues 1 through 10 of the cuelist on the currently chosen master e List 1 Cue 3 Group 10 Colour Unblock Enter unblock only the colour parameters of fixtures in Group 3 in cue 3 of cuelist 1 To unblock com
268. ixture 4 to 50 not 5 e Fixture 4 05 Enter Assigns Fixture 4 to 5 To assign fixtures to full or zero e Fixture 4 Full Assigns Fixture 4 to full e Fixture 4 Out Assigns Fixture 4 to zero The Out button is on the Main Toolbar The intensity of a fixture can be changed relative to its current level for example e Fixture 4 5 Enter increases the intensity of Fixture 4 by 5 e Fixture 4 10 Enter reduces the intensity of Fixture 4 by 10 The intensity of a fixture can be scaled proportionally for example e Fixture 4 70 Enter scales the intensity of Fixture 4 to 70 of its original value e Fixture 4 120 Enter scales the intensity of Fixture 4 to 120 of its original value With the I Wheel Moving the Wheel changes the level of the selected fixtures When selecting several fixtures and adjusting levels the wheel will maintain relative differences between them so that all intensities change by the same amount For example if fixture 1 is at 10 2 at 50 and the wheel is increased by 10 then fixture 1 will move to 20 and 2 will move to 60 By holding the Pig key whilst using the wheel intensities will be increased or decreased in proportion to their individual level For example if fixture 1 is at 10 2 at 50 and the wheel is increased by 10 then fixture 1 will move to 11 and 2 will move to 55 Flying Pig Systems 143 Reference 15 3 2 144 Section 15 Selecting Fixtures
269. jor version number the minor version number the current release number and the build number For example e 1 3 8 772 1 is the major number 3 is the minor version number 8 is the current release and 772 is the build 35 2 4 About Beta Software As new software is developed for the Wholehog III console High End Systems relies on input from console users If you are interested in learning more about the High End Systems Software Testing Program please visit www highend com beta 350 Flying Pig Systems Section 36 Servicing This console must be serviced by qualified personnel The information in this section is intended to assist qualified personnel only For information on the care of the console see Upgrading and Care of the Console p 343 36 1 Replacing Touch Screens Caution Always shut down and disconnect the mains power before removing the front panel Damaged touch screens are easily replaced 1 With the LCD box in the vertical position undo the six screws using a 4mm allen key 2 Carefully remove the LCD panel and Soft Key strips 3 With the LCD box in the horizontal flat position undo the four thumbscrews of the panel to be changed 4 Unplug the touch screen cable from the central PCB 5 Very carefully lift off the touch screen leaving the Soft Key PCBs in place 6 Replace with a new touch screen making sure the panel is pushed to the right for correct alignment 7 Replace and gen
270. k v Right Click v Next sw Ortho Toggle v Import Export ma Apply A OK xX Cancel Figure 12 3 The Track Ball pane of the User Preferences window The following navigation functions are available e Ball Mode switches the Trackball between position and pointer modes e Ortho Toggle switches the Trackball between Ortho and Normal When in position mode with ortho on the Trackball will only control pan or tilt not both at the same time This can be useful for accurately setting fixtures e Right Click the same as a right click with the mouse This is usually used to bring up a contextual menu with commands such as copy and paste e Left Click the same as left click with the mouse Flying Pig Systems 67 Reference 68 Section 12 Setting Up the System Shuffle shuffles the pointer across windows bringing that window to the front unlike shuffle on the Window Control Toolbar which shuffles the screen view e Swap to Screen moves the pointer between screens useful for when external displays are connected to quickly move between screens e Set the same as the Set key but closer to the Trackball for quick cell editing In addition the following fixture functions are available e Next sub selects the next fixture in the current selection See Sub Selec tions p 140 Back sub selects the previous fixture in the current selection See Sub Selections p 140 Select
271. ked with the letter L or coloured red 3 Class I equipment This equipment must be earthed 4 Equipment suitable for dry locations only Do not expose this equipment to rain or moisture 5 Disconnect power before servicing 6 Refer servicing to qualified personnel no user serviceable parts inside Flying Pig Systems 359 Appendices Section 38 Safety Information 38 2 Importantes Informations Sur La S curit 38 2 1 Mise En Garde Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les Incendies e Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les Incendies Cet appareil de connection au circuit comporte une protection contre les surcharges de 20 A 38 2 2 Mise En Garde Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les Chocs lectriques 1 Si cet quipement est livr sans prise de cable veuillez connecter la prise de cable correcte selon le code suivant e marron phase e bleu neutre e vert jaune terre 2 D brancher le courant avant d effectuer des r parations 3 Cet quipement doit tre uniquement utilis dans des endroits secs Ne pas l exposer a la pluie ou l humidit 4 A l int rieur de l quipement il n y a pas de pi ces remplagables par l utilisateur Confiez l entretien un personnel qualifi 5 Equipement de Classe I Cet quipement doit tre mis la terre 38 3 Wichtige Hinweise Fur Ihre Sicherheit 38 3 1 Warnung Zum Schutz Vor Brandgefahr e Dieses Ger t darf nur an eine Zweigleitung mit einem Uberlastungss chut
272. ker colours are a closer match when applied to colour calibrated fixtures than non calibrated ones 15 3 6 Fine Control Holding the Pig key and moving the encoder wheel allows fine adjustment of the cur rently selected parameter so that each turn of the wheel will change the parameter value by a smaller amount This is useful for making exact adjustments to values 15 3 7 Touching Parameters When you start to record your programming as cues you will find that only the para meters that you have assigned values to are stored these are known as Hard Values This is important because in cuelists values track through until they are changed and this allows different playbacks to interact to create a single onstage look For a complete explanation of tracking see Tracking p 6 However you will sometimes want to ensure that a value is stored at its current value in a cue or palette To do this you can Touch it e To touch all parameters of the current selection simply press the Touch key on the Main Toolbar e To touch only the parameters of a particular kind press the appropriate parameter type key followed by Touch For example e Position Touch touches all position parameters of the selected fixtures e To touch a single parameter you can hold the Touch key while moving that parameter s wheel slightly The current value will be touched without modification from the parameter wheel Flying Pig Systems 151 Reference 1
273. key Flying Pig Systems 263 Reference 24 5 4 24 5 5 264 Section 24 Cuelist Playback Adjusting Chase Rate with Tap Sync A cuelist chase can be manually sync ed to a beat such as a piece of music using Tap Sync Once sync ed the Wholehog III maintains the chase rate a new one is assigned To adjust the rate of a chase using Tap Sync hold down the Choose key of the master the chase is attached to while pressing the master s Go key repeatedly to the required beat The Wholehog III will learn the speed of the chase from you in a minimum of two beats after this you can release the Choose key Note that you can only use Tap Sync with chases loaded onto physical masters not virtual ones Cuelists and Tracking You can define how a cuelist deals with tracking in the Cuelist pane of the Playback Options window shown in Figure 24 3 The Cuelist Pane of the Playback Options Window e Open Choose Options gt Cuelist The options are Option Default Notes Cue Only Off Use this to run the cuelist without tracking Any paramet er that has no value in a cue will go to its default value rather than tracking through from the previous cue Track Through Loops Off Determines whether parameter values track from the end of a loop back to the beginning See Tracking Through Loops p 220 for a full description Triggering Automatic Tasks When a Cue Runs You can use Trigger Macros to perform a varie
274. key of the master with the cuelist you wish to release Pressing Go after a cuelist is released will resume playback from the current cue To have the cuelist go back to the beginning when it is released see Resetting Cuelists on Release p 246 Tip You can release all playbacks at once by pressing Pig Release If you have no other cuelists scenes or groups active when you release the cuelist then releasing returns all fixture parameters to their default values A fixture s default para 244 Flying Pig Systems Section 24 Cuelist Playback Reference meter values will be determined by the Fixture Library you can change the default values in the Edit Fixtures window see Assigning a Custom Default p 134 If you have other cuelists scenes or groups active then control of fixture parameters may be transferred to one of them on releasing the cuelist see Running Multiple Cuelists p 250 Release Time When you release a cuelist and fixture parameters go to their default values they do so over the release time and this change may be visible if you have fixtures that are visibly live on stage i e with intensities above zero To assign the cuelist s release time 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window for the cuelist on the selected master 2 Options Cuelist open the Options window and select the Cuelist pane Alternatively press Pig Choose to open the Options window for the selected master 3 Select t
275. king you to confirm the delete 3 Click OK Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirmation by going to Setup Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items 17 5 Copying and Moving Palettes To make a copy of a palette in a new location 1 Open Colour open the Colour directory 2 Make sure that the Guard button is pressed so that you do not accident ally apply palettes when trying to select them Flying Pig Systems 171 Reference Section 17 Working with Palettes 3 Select the palette that you want to move by pressing its button in the directory 4 Press and hold the Copy key Press the button of the location in the directory you want to copy the palette to Or using the command line e Colour 2 Copy Colour 3 Enter copies the contents of Colour Palette 2 to Colour Palette 3 e Colour 2 Group 5 Copy Colour 3 Enter copies fixtures that are in Colour Palette 2 and Group 5 into Colour Palette 3 Similarly to move a palette to a new location e Colour 2 Move Colour 3 Enter moves the contents of Colour Palette 2 to Colour Palette 3 leaving 2 empty If the destination palette already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 178 Tip gZ References to palettes refer to the palette not its location in the directory If
276. l Show with patch a 13 March 2 Show Name Description hoos Show Help Oo Back XK Cancel Flying Pig Systems 31 Tutorial Section 6 Setting Up the Console 2 Select a library to use for your show You can use the standard library in the Libraries System folder or choose a library from an existing show New Show Library Choose a library to copy to make your Show Library You can select a default library or copy the library out of an existing show if desired fixtureLibrary Name Description J Created J ES fixturelib_v2 FPS library v2 6 1 14 May 2004 ES fixturelib_v3 FPS library v3 0 47 6 September B fiturelb_v4 FPS library v4 0 6 22 April 2005 2 Help Back X Cancel 3 Select Finish The console will launch a new show 6 4 Find Out More For more information see the Reference p 61 section of the manual For Power peripherals and hardware set up See Setting Up the Console p 63 For Networking See Setting Up the Network p 72 For DMX Processors See Working with Network Processors p 76 For Launching the show See Starting Up p 103 6 5 If You Get Stuck 1 The DMX Processor and the console don t appear to be communicating See The console isn t talking to the DMX Processors p 347 32 Flying Pig Systems Section 6 Setting Up the Console Tutorial Tip S More troubleshooting advice and informa
277. l bars appear along the right and bottom edges of the window You can scroll by pressing or clicking and then dragging on the scroll bar s slider or by pressing or clicking on the arrows at the ends of the scroll bar In addition you can scroll window contents by holding down the Open key and using the Trackball I Wheel or parameter wheels to scroll Flying Pig Systems 87 Reference 13 2 5 88 Section 13 Using the Console Desktop Views Palettes Cuelist 3 4 Nick s View Matt s View Brad s View 8 Output Programmer Next View Figure 13 2 The View Toolbar Desktop views allow you to store arrangements of windows for quick access so you do not have to re open and re arrange windows to perform specific tasks For example you could create a programming view that shows the group palette and effects direct ories along with the Programmer window A playback view could display the cuelist and scene directories and the Output window Desktop views are managed by the View Toolbar at the top of the left hand touch screen see Figure 13 2 The View Toolbar and the Views Directory see Figure 13 3 The Views Directory You can open the Views Directory by holding down the Open key and pressing the View button on the View Toolbar GB Views Directory 0 x ow HS 0 Palettes Cuelst Rick s i View View Output gane r Figure 13 3 The Views Directory Tip When you create a new sh
278. lable options on screen but tends to be slower The command line is harder to learn because you have to learn the commands but it is faster once you know it and it allows you to do complex operations in a single action Often you can combine elements of the two approaches HlStudio Color 5751 E Page 1 Programmer Master A kd 16 52 Figure 13 13 The Command Line The commands that you enter appear in the Command Line Toolbar at the bottom of the right hand touch screen see Figure 13 13 The Command Line You build up a command as a series of keystrokes and the command is acted on when you press Enter You can use the Backspace key to delete each part of the command in turn if you make a mistake typing it in A double press of the Backspace key will clear the whole command line The command is sent to the currently editable editor press Edit in an editor window to make it the editable editor Command Line Syntax The commands for editing show data all use a common syntax structure The key to mastering the command line is realising that the syntax is the same for different com mands and different types of show data The basic structure is Source Mask Command Options Destination Source The source is the object within the show that you want to take data from It might be a palette scene cue or the editable editor With most commands the source object is not modified e Mask The Mask is a filter for when you onl
279. ld be in the form e hours h minutes m seconds s hours h minutes m seconds s For example e 2s 2 seconds in and out times e 2s 5s 2 seconds in 5 seconds out e 1m 1 minute in and out times Flying Pig Systems 213 Reference Section 20 Working with Cue Timing and Ordering 0 x Value f Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table NShots souce Eao Pea Bek Next ee T Show Show Fade jet Studio Ed State Palettes Changes Compact mil ris Color a Intensit Stabe Boston ae Technobear Iris Figure 20 8 The Cue Editor window with Fade selected e 1m10s 1 minute and 10 seconds in and out times e 1h10m30s 1h 1 hour 10 minutes and 30 seconds in time and 1 hour out time Use the H M and S buttons that appear when editing a fade or delay time cell to enter the H M and S text into the cell Alternatively you can use an external keyboard Tip gZ If you enter 120 this will be interpreted as 1 minute 20 seconds To have the console interpret it as 120 seconds i e 2 minutes enter 120s To assign paths directly in the spreadsheet of an editor 1 Press the Path button in the top left of the editor window 2 Click in the cell for the desired parameter or click and drag to select a range of cells Press Set 4 Choose a path from the displayed list see Figure 20 9 Selecting a Path in an Editor The In path is applied when the fixture is i
280. le e Right click on the show file and select Delete from the contextual menu You will be asked to confirm the action To rename a show file e Right click on the show file and select Rename from the contextual menu Type in the new name and press Enter Tip You can also copy and paste files by right clicking on them and selecting Copy or Paste from the contextual menu Creating New Folders You can create sub folders in the Shows and Libraries folders to help organise your work 1 Click on the folder you want to make a new folder in Click on the button 3 Enter a name for the folder and press Enter Note that you cannot create folders on a CD ROM Tip You can also create a new folder inside an existing one by right clicking on it and using the contextual menu Ejecting Disks You cannot eject a disk in the Wholehog III s Zip and CD ROM drives if they are in use by the console Before ejecting make sure that you don t have the disks folder selected in the File Browser If a disk will not eject check that you are not browsing its contents elsewhere and that the console is not currently accessing it 13 8 3 Backing Up It is good practice to backup your show regularly You can do this manually saving a backup copy of your show on the console s hard disk or on a CD ROM or Zip disk Alternatively you can assign the Wholehog III to make backup show files and save them to its hard disk automatically at defined interva
281. le supplied 100 240V 50 60Hz 2A maximum 2 x 5x20mm 5A T fuses MIDI in amp out Fully compliant Musical Instrument Digital Interface input and output ports VGA out 15 pin double density D type IBM PC compatible VGA SVGA analogue display outputs x2 RS232 Debug port for service factory use only Audio in amp out 3 5mm stereo jack Soundblaster compatible audio line input and output USB Fully compliant Universal Serial Bus 2 0 ports x2 Keyboard amp mouse 5 pin mini DIN IBM PC PS2 compatible keyboard and mouse Ethernet Neutrik Ethercon or standard RJ45 Fully compliant 10base T or 100base TX Ethernet port 37 1 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power 75W Weight 22 5Kg Dimensions 760mm w x 580mm d x 110mm h footprint smaller Flying Pig Systems 355 Appendices Section 37 Technical Specifications 37 2 DMX Processor 37 2 1 Input and Output Connections Mains in IEC 320 connector 5A 250V rated cable supplied 100 240V 50 60Hz 0 2A maximum 1 x 5x20mm 1A T fuses DMX out Neutrik 5 pin female XLR Isolated Half Duplex DMX512 outputs x4 Ethernet RJ45 Fully compliant 10base T or 100base TX Ethernet port 37 2 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power 10W Weight 1 2Kg Dimensions 480mm w x 118mm d x 45mm h 1U 19 inch rack compatible 37 3 MIDI Timecode Processor 37 3 1 Input and Output Connections ains in IEC 320 connector 5A 250V rated cable supplied 100 240V 50 60Hz 0 2A maximum 1 x 5x
282. lehog Ill DP HDL Guangzhou Hedor 4 3 Device Manager Device Manager Name gt Type Unbind AutoFocus Appearance Version OSide Front Section 30 Visualiser Connectivity FT Wholehog IlI DP Wholehog IlI DP Connect on load No oOo HMM Select All Connect on load Close Double click on this device or select it and press Properties The Proper ties window will open Console 316 Manufacturer Protocol Model Name Address Ports Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Wholehog Ill Network 7 Wholehog IlI DP Wholehog IIIDP i Flying Pig Systems Section 30 Visualiser Connectivity Appendices 4 Inthe Address field enter the DP number used when patching on the Wholehog III console Click OK to close this window 5 Bind the ports to the universes in your WYSIWYG show consult the WYSIWYG documentation for detailed instructions Patch Universe Select Name Console Port EDM pat Not bound PORT Not bound Cancel 6 Once the universes are bound you can connect to the Wholehog III DP Repeat the above steps for each DMX Processor used in your Wholehog II show file 30 3 3 Additional Steps for WYSIWYG Console Edition When using some versions of Console Edition CE WYSIWYG to connect directly to a Wholehog III system only one universe of visualization is possible at a time If your version o
283. leting 240 editing 233 239 engine 233 fanning 233 fly in 229 iris chase 229 length 230 moving 240 n shot 230 naming 238 offset 230 palettes 238 381 predefined 232 rate 230 simultaneous 13 size 230 square 229 tables 229 timing 236 using in programming 239 embedded palettes 167 Enable Aggregation 92 Enable Jump Toolbar 94 Enable Timecode 299 endstops of parameter values 146 ESP Vision visualiser software 309 Ethernet 72 switch 73 Even button 140 Export preferences 110 external displays 65 keyboard 69 mouse 68 touch screens 66 Extract 17 F Fade button 98 Fade Changes 186 fade time 205 206 default 206 overriding during playback 260 266 overriding during scene playback 275 with masks 207 fader 12 go off zero 249 release at zero 249 faders cleaning 352 replacing 352 fanning 154 215 effects 233 Fanning Toolbar 156 from the command line 156 in spreadsheet view 155 multipart 157 options 156 382 Index with groupings 157 with the Fan key 155 Fanning Toolbar 141 feedback cuelist 258 File Browser 107 fine control of parameter values 151 fixture builder 321 fixture library 103 fixture masters 12 Fixture Patch window 122 Fixture Schedule window 117 fixture types updating 111 Fixture window 117 129 fixtures 5 adding 117 changing type 119 cloning patching 127 configuring 129 copying 118 copying
284. lists 222 effects 233 folders 108 pages 277 creation date 107 cross over cable Ethernet 73 crossfade manual 261 Cue Only 264 cuelist default rate 248 feedback 258 wrapping 248 Cuelist Directory 94 Cuelist Rate 260 cuelists 9 221 configuring playback controls 287 copying 223 copying to pages 281 380 Index creating 222 deleting 222 moving 223 moving to pages 282 naming 222 options 247 ordering of cues 218 pages 277 playback 241 removing from pages 282 renumbering 195 status 256 using as a chase 262 Cuelists Multiple 250 cues copying 195 deleting 194 editing contents 196 editing parameter timings 210 editing times 208 follow on 216 learn timing 217 linking 218 looping 218 manual 216 moving 195 naming 193 numbering 192 ordering 218 parts 10 paths 208 playing out of sequence 8 recording 191 removing parameter values 193 with a delay time 207 with a fade time 206 with selected fixtures only 193 with state 201 simultaneous 8 timing 205 tracking backwards when recording 198 tracking forwards when deleting 200 tracking forwards when inserting 199 triggering 216 triggering from timecode 299 wait time 216 cursor keys 117 cut 94 Flying Pig Systems Index D date creation of a show file 107 setting the console clock 70 default printer 71 default value of parameters 134 Delay button 98 delay time 205 207 fanned
285. ll button on the desired cell s in the editor window and select Copy or Paste from the menu Alternatively use the Pig key to copy and paste selected cells e Pig Copy copy e Pig Record paste Copy Options By default when you copy parameter values from one fixture to another the console will copy exactly the data from one fixture to another including any palette references You can optionally have the hard values from within the referenced palette copied to the destination instead of the palette references Fixture 1 select the fixture you want to copy Copy More press the more button on the Copy toolbar Allow Refs deselect the Allow Refs button 8 select the fixture to copy to a FY Np Enter copies the parameters of Fixture 1 to Fixture 8 converting any palette references to hard values Tip Z You can copy a fixture to itself with Allow Refs deselected to convert palette references to hard values 15 4 154 Fanning Fanning allows you to assign a parameter across several fixtures so that the parameter values are equally spaced For example if you have five fixtures all at 50 intensity you can use fanning easily to assign intensities of 30 40 50 60 and 70 across five fix tures Note that in this example the middle value of the five stays the same and the end values change the most while the other values change proportionally You can fan any values including parameters and timings
286. ls 108 Flying Pig Systems Section 13 Using the Console Reference Wholehog III backup files are in a different format to normal show files A show file actually consists of many folders and files although usually you will not be aware of this as the console makes it appear as a single file A backup file is a single compressed file that contains all the files and folders that make up the show data and you should always use a backup file to transfer shows from one console to another The console s backup function creates this type of single compressed file Tip You should backup your show to external media Zip or CD regularly as well as to the console s internal hard drive so that not all of your backups are in the same place Making a Manual Backup Use the Current Show pane of the Show Manager window to store a copy of your current show to another location on the hard disk 1 Setup Shows gt Current Show 2 Press Backup 3 Select a location A copy of your show will be saved with _bck appen ded to its file name To back up to Zip disk select the Zip disk as the location to save the file to To back up to CD ROM save the backup file to the console s hard disk first and then copy it to the CD see Copying Files to a CD ROM p 110 Using Auto Backup You can set the console to make backups automatically using the Auto Backup function This will make an automatic backup at specified intervals assigned to tw
287. lue with a red dot showing the level of the physical fader To rematch the levels move the fader until it is at the same level as the blue bar at this point the fader will take control of the Grand Master level in the normal way For an explanation of matching fader levels see Matching Levels When Changing Page p 279 The Blackout Key The Flash Key below the Grand Master acts as a blackout button You can disable this function 1 Setup Preferences Misc 2 Under Grand Master Options deselect DBO on Flash Flying Pig Systems 285 Reference Section 27 Working with Playback Controls 27 2 286 Inhibitive Masters Inhibitive masters allow you to limit the intensity of a group of fixtures If the inhibitive master is at full then the fixtures that it controls will be at the level determined by the playbacks Programmer and so on As the inhibitive master level is reduced the fixture intensities will be reduced in proportion For example if you have four fixtures at 0 50 80 and 100 in a cue that is being output and these fixtures are also in an inhib itive master then the levels will change as follows Fixture 1 2 3 4 Master at 100 0 50 80 100 Master at 50 0 25 40 50 Master at 0 0 0 0 0 Pressing the Flash key of an inhibitive master is the same as momentarily changing its fader level to 0 taking all fixture intensities controlled by the inhibitive master to 0 Intensity values
288. ly recommended for advanced programmers with extens ive lighting fixture and Wholehog III console knowledge Knowledge of the fixture DMX protocol is essential prior to creating a custom library This guide roughly explains the use of the fixture builder but in no way is intended to be a complete manual for creating custom libraries Users are urged to contact support to have libraries properly built and installed into the software 31 1 Working With the Fixture Builder The fixture builder allows users to create from scratch basic fixture libraries Use of the fixture builder requires in depth knowledge of the fixture protocol as well as the standard library principles used within the Wholehog III system The fixture builder utility does not allow full access to all abilities of libraries built by High End Systems and therefore should only be utilized in extreme situations Please note that custom libraries become part of the show file they were created in and can be merged between show files Libraries can be built from a blank canvass or can be copied from existing fixtures within the library when using V4 libraries When an existing library is copied many of the unique elements of the factory created library are removed for compatibility with the fixture builder utility The new fixture library may not behave exactly like the library it is a copy of 31 1 1 Adding User Created Libraries to a Show Once libraries have been built within
289. ly selected cells When using Flip to cycle a fixture through its flip posi tions goes through the possible positions in the reverse order to Flip without Pig Equivalent to pressing Go on all masters Changes the view to the previous view rather than the next view Changes the page to the previous page rather than the next page Opens the Launched Processes window Opens the Colour Picker rather than the Colour Direct ory Unparks selected fixtures rather than parking them Pastes into the currently selected cells Releases all masters Cycles through the possible window sizes in the reverse order Un touches specified parameters and fixtures rather than touching them Redoes the last undone action Extends the selected cells or directory items in spread sheets and directories Overrides the effect of the Guard button Flying Pig Systems 341 Appendices 342 Section 33 Pig Key Commands Pig with Other Controls Use Pig when entering text with the on screen keyboard Pig with the I Wheel Pig with parameter wheels Pig when dragging files in the File Copies the dragged files rather than moving them Browser pane of the Show Man ager window Pig when starting up the console Opens the boot menu Result Acts as a shift key to type upper case characters Intensities are increased or decreased in proportion to their individual level rather than all intensities changing b
290. ly unchanged from the Wholehog II but it incorporates many improvements The rear part of the panel with the touch screens Flying Pig Systems 11 Introduction Section 3 Wholehog II Users 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 2 5 can be tilted up to present the screens at a more convenient angle while in response to user feedback the wrist rest has been made softer and more comfortable Faders The number of masters has been increased from eight to ten while the Grand Master and Cross Fade Master have been removed Any master can now act as a Grand Master For more detailed information see Working with Playback Controls p 285 Trackball The Trackball has been added to give easy control over pan and tilt and to control the on screen cursor This is especially useful with the Wholehog III s enhanced spreadsheet style features Vertical Wheels In addition to the parameter wheels used by the Wholehog II the Wholehog II features two vertically mounted wheels The one on the right hand side of the console is the I Wheel and is used for controlling the intensity of fixtures The Rate Wheel on the left hand end is sprung and is typically used for overriding the crossfade speed of a cue or the rate of an effect or chase New Keys Some functions that on Wholehog II required a combination of key presses have been given their own dedicated buttons such as Fan Merge Fixture Intensity and Back See New and Streamlined Functions
291. m 0Hz through to 10Hz You can decrease this range by ad justing the size 2Hz will give a range between 3Hz and 7Hz When combining effects adjusting specific parameters effect sizes will change the look of the effect For example a circle effect comprising of a sine table on the pan and tilt can be modified to look like an elipse by altering the size of either pan or tilt The following diagram shows how the value of a parameter assigned to the sawtooth table changes over time with different size values Na 100 50 150 Effect Offset The offset sets the effect start and finish point for each effect so they can be staggered It is assigned in degrees For example to create an intensity ripple across a range of fixtures divide 360 degrees by the number of fixtures and offset each fixture by multiples of this amount For ex ample with six fixtures offset at 0 60 120 180 240 300 degrees The easiest way to do this is to use fanning see Fanning p 154 The following diagram shows how the value of a parameter assigned to the sawtooth table changes over time with different offset values Flying Pig Systems 231 Reference Section 23 Working with Effects 0 180 360 Effect Length The length is the proportion of the effect s period that it is active for It is assigned as a percentage The following diagram shows how the value of a parameter assigned to the sawtooth table changes over time with different l
292. m Palettes If the Make Beam Palettes button is depressed the console will make beam palettes If you press the adjacent Separate by Wheel button the console will create separate beam palettes for each beam effect wheel in fixtures that have more than one This ensures that you can use the palettes to programme looks that use both wheels simultaneously without the palettes conflicting with each other 121 Reference Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures The Auto Palettes window also allows you to choose the alignment spacing of the palette s directory window The alignment spacing controls how many palettes are displayed across the directory window for example 6 for a half screen window 12 for a full screen window For more information on groups and palettes see Working with Groups p 161 and Working with Palettes p 167 14 2 14 2 1 14 2 2 122 Patching Fixtures Once fixtures have been added to the show they need to be patched to the appropriate DMX address On previous consoles such as Wholehog II this was a case of selecting one of several DMX universes and assigning a start address between 1 and 512 Because of the network capability of the Wholehog III fixtures are assigned to a DMX Processor as well as a DMX universe and an address Adding DMX Processors The Wholehog III automatically detects and makes available any connected DMX Pro cessors so you don t have to add them manually If you want to pat
293. maintains the type of the last fixture selected If for example Studio Colors are selected then all fixture numbers entered into the command line will refer to Studio Colors until a new fixture type is selected Tip Z Repeated pressing of the Fixture key will cycle through the available fixture types If you have assigned your user numbers as a non repetitive single sequence simply type the fixture s user number irrespective of type For example using the tutorial show fixtures and user numbers e 1 Enter selects the first Studio Color e 21 Enter selects the first Technobeam To assign user numbers see Modifying the User Number p 130 Note that throughout this manual the examples generally assume that you have assigned user numbers so that they are unique The syntax shown does not include selecting a fixture type Flying Pig Systems Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters Reference 15 1 2 Selecting Multiple Fixtures You can select more than one fixture of the selected type using the and Thru key For example e Fixture 1 5 Enter selects fixtures 1 and 5 e Fixture 1 Thru 5 Enter selects fixtures 1 to 5 e 1Thru 5 4 selects fixtures 1 to 5 but not 4 e 1Thru5 7 selects 1 to 5 and also 7 e 5 Thru Enter selects from fixture 5 of the current type through to the last fixture of the current type e Thru Enter selects all fixtures of the current type You can also select more than
294. mber ES 1 0 a Intellabeam 13 chan Studio Beam Studio Beam CTO Studio Color 250 udio Color 575 0 oo oO oo Studio Spat 250 Studio Spot 575 n o S Ary Sf o x Cancel Figure 14 2 The Fixture Schedule window Z Tip If the fixture type that you want doesn t appear in the list check that you have the latest fixture library from Flying Pig Systems www flyingpig com see Merging Shows p 111 Replicating Fixtures You can expand your show to accommodate a larger rig using the Replicate Fixture function This will create copies of fixtures including all their programming To replicate fixtures 1 2 Setup Patch open the Fixture window Select one or more fixtures in the Fixture window by clicking on its numbered button in the left hand column Press Replicate Fixture located in the toolbar at the top of the Fixture window Flying Pig Systems Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures Reference Figure 14 3 A Studio Color 575 in the Fixture window before and after replicating shows the contents of the Fixture window before and after replicating fixtures The new fixtures are an exact copy of the originals and will be added to every palette cue and scene that contains programming for the original fixture The comment cell shows you which fixture it is a copy of New fixtures are given User Numbers that follow on sequentially from the original fixtures
295. mming into the current show If there are any clashes the source programming will overwrite the current programming e Merge By Number is the same as Merge By Name but the matching is done by number e Replace if programming with the same number is found in the current show it is overwritten with programming from the source show If no match is found the source programming is appended to the current show Tip You cannot replace palettes in the current show because you could replace a palette with one that doesn t contain programming for fixture parameters that other programming expects it to have Flying Pig Systems 115 Reference Section 13 Using the Console 13 9 4 Dependencies In order to merge certain parts of a show you must have chosen to merge other parts To merge groups you must have merged fixtures e To merge palettes you must have merged fixtures e To merge cuelists and cues you must have merged palettes To merge scenes you must have merged palettes e To merge pages you must have merged cuelists and scenes 13 9 5 Using Merging Example 1 You have programmed your show on two separate consoles perhaps one controlling moving fixtures and one controlling conventionals and you want to merge the shows for playback on one console Each show file contains identical palette and cuelist structures but they just control their own fixtures In this case Append fixtures and Merge By Name for all programmi
296. moments the Wholehog III Startup window will appear WHOLEHOG 3 Version v1 4 0 Copyright 2005 Flying Pig Systems Ltd IP 10 0 0 5 MAC 00 11 11 01 59 ae Date 2 April 2005 Figure 6 1 The Startup Screen The DMX Processor s LCD screen will change status from Connecting No Server to Idle Show Server 127 0 0 1 6600 The LCD screen will remain like this until you have patched fixtures and DMX is being outputted when the DMX Processor s status will change to Running Flying Pig Systems 27 Tutorial Section 6 Setting Up the Console Outputs Active ontroipanel Network Show Connecting Idle Running Noserver Show server Show server A pete 127 0 0 186600 ftontrolpane l Sconmipaport sees Outputs Controlpanel Network Network _ Show Figure 6 2 DMX Processor Screens 6 2 Calibrating Screens and Setting Up Peripherals When you first use the console or reload its software it is a good idea to recalibrate the touch screens ensuring that on screen buttons can precisely selected using fingertips Hog3 Start e G Launch New Show Click here to create a new show f Launch New Show Launch Existing Show Choose a previous show from the list or browse for a show lt Launch Existing Show Shows Tutorial S 07 Browse Connect To Show Ka Connect to an active Network Show if one has been found Press b Rescan to search the network again Press Settings to
297. mple you might rewind the timecode during rehearsals to repeat a part of the show and the cuelist will automatically go to the correct cue Sometimes you may want to prevent a cuelist going backwards if the timecode goes backwards You can do this using Trigger Forwards Only 1 Open Choose Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Trigger Forwards Only 28 6 300 Viewing Timecode You can view the timecode generated by any source in a Timecode Toolbar 1 Setup Network open the Network window 2 Select a network node such as a console or a MIDI Timecode Processor 3 Press Timecode Toolbar The Timecode Toolbar will open see Fig ure 28 5 The Timecode Toolbar If you have a cuelist with a timecode source selected you can also open the Timecode Toolbar with the View Timecode button in the Cuelist window The Timecode Toolbar displays the Input timecode value that physically arriving at the node and the Current value The Current value is the same as the input value when a real input port is selected or the simulated value when in simulation mode see Simu lating Timecode p 301 The Current value is the one that is presented to the rest of the network Flying Pig Systems Section 28 Working with Audio MIDI and Timecode Reference Console 1 None smere 30 Regen 30 E 007 00700 00 a 007 007 00 00 Configue Simulate gt Figure 28 5 The Timecode Toolbar 28 7 Simulating Timecode You can t
298. n 172 31 0 1 6600 Info Initialising network OK Info Loading Show Data Info Outputs Active The Session and Info fields will contain additional network information The Wholehog III DP application can be configured similar to an actual DMX Processor You can assign Wholehog II network port and the net number for this application The Port field must be assigned to the same port as your Wholehog III console on the network The Number field represents the net number and is similar to the number in the upper right hand corner on a DMX Processor Assign the number to a unique device Net number that is not used by any other devices on the Wholehog III network Press Apply after making changes Configuring the ESP Vision Universes In the Wholehog III DP window on your ESP Vision computer press the Patch button to open the Patch window Using this window you can connect any of the 16 DMX universes within ESP Vision to any DMX Processor and universe from your Wholehog III show For example to assign ESP Vision universe 3 to respond to the DMX from universe 3 of DMX Processor 2 simply select DP 2 Universe 3 in the ESP 3 column Press OK after completing the patching Flying Pig Systems 313 Appendices Section 30 Visualiser Connectivity Patch eee xi ESP DP Universe gt DP Universe P Di fi 1 je 3 3 3 3 1 v Cancel 2 3 3 d 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 3 ji 1 4 4
299. n either network or USB 5 Page 3 network printers only Choose the type of network connection you use to connect to your network printer If the printer is connected to a Microsoft Windows computer and is shared over a network choose the SMB option If your printer is HP JetDirect or AppSocket compatible choose that option If your printer has IPP support you may use IPP If both IPP and AppSocket HP JetDirect are available try the AppSocket HP JetDirect option first 6 Page 4 network printers only Enter the network address of your printer For shared Windows printers you may need to enter a user name and password in the form user password printserv er mynetwork 7 Page 5 Select the manufacturer and model of your printer 8 Page 6 Check that all the information displayed is correct If it is press Finish to add your new printer On return to the configuration panel you should see your new printer displayed in the printer list If it is not there click on the Update List button If it still doesn t show try installing the printer again ensuring you enter the printer s network address correctly Tip Z Any printer which works under Linux should work with the Wholehog Ill You can check www linuxprinting org for any compatibility issues Setting Printer Defaults You can assign printer defaults from the Control Panel e Setup Control Pnl Printers open the Printers pane see Figure 12 5 The P
300. n Off to release the master when the Flash key is re leased Press Solo to have the intensity outputs of all other masters taken to zero when the Flash key is pressed If you select Latching the action of the Flash key is maintained until it is pressed a second time Configuring the Main Controls When you configure the main playback controls the settings are part of the cuelist and will be applied whenever you select the Choose key for the master that the cuelist is on The configuration options for the main control keys are shown in the following table The Assert Release Goto Skip Forwards Skip Backwards Main Halt and Main Go keys Function Options and Notes None Disables the control Assert Asserts the chosen master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own assert time overriding the cuelist s assert time Release Releases the chosen master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own release time overriding the cuelist s release time Go Go s the chosen master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own fade time overriding the cuelist s time Halt Halts the chosen master stopping any fades that are in progress Back Reverses the currently running crossfade on the chosen master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own back time overriding the cuelist s back time Restart Goes to the first cue in the cuelist on the chosen master Goto cmdline Goto Skip forward
301. n if it is not the frontmost window or to lock the editor to prevent accidental changes After you have finished editing a cue scene or palette press the Update key to apply changes Until you do this changes won t show up if you run the cue or scene or use the palette The exception to this is when you are working in the Programmer when the Update key will perform the Auto Update function see Auto Update p 184 If you hold down the Update key the Update Toolbar will appear This allows you to select which parameter types are recorded whether changes should track forwards and whether references should be allowed when recording palettes See Stopping Values from Tracking Forward p 199 and Reference Palettes p 176 Flying Pig Systems 99 Reference Section 13 Using the Console If you close the editor without updating you will be asked whether you want to save or discard the changes or cancel the closing of the editor Tip The name of the current editable editor is shown in the Command Line Toolbar see Figure 13 13 The Command Line By default it is the Program mer The name of the item being edited appears in the title bar of the editor window 13 6 13 6 1 100 Using the Command Line The Wholehog III has two fundamental approaches to programming one uses an on screen graphical approach while the other uses a command line The graphical approach is easy to learn because you can see the avai
302. ncreasing in intensity during the crossfade and the Out path when the fixture is decreasing in intens ity 5 Press OK 214 Flying Pig Systems Section 20 Working with Cue Timing and Ordering Reference Brake Accelerate Figure 20 9 Selecting a Path in an Editor The different types of path are explained in Paths p 208 20 2 4 Fanned Timings You can fan timings across multiple fixtures just as you can fan colour or position For example to fan times across 10 fixtures e Fixture 1 Thru 10 Time 5 Thru 14 Enter fans the fade times of Fixtures 1 through 10 between 5 and 14 seconds Studio Color 575 1 3 4 10 Similarly you can fan delay times e Fixture 1 Thru 5 Time Time 5 Thru 10 Enter fans the delay times of Fixtures 1 through 5 between 5 and 10 seconds For more on fanning including fanning using the parameter wheels and in spreadsheet views see Fanning p 154 Flying Pig Systems 215 Reference Section 20 Working with Cue Timing and Ordering 20 3 216 Working with Cue Triggers The Wholehog III provides several ways to trigger cues in addition to manual operation from the Go key To assign a cue s trigger 1 2 3 List 1 Open open the cuelist Select the Wait cell for the desired cue and press Set The Trigger Toolbar will appear below the Wait cell see Figure 20 10 The Trigger Toolbar Select an option from this Halt Wait Follow Timecode Manual H
303. nd Configuring Fixtures esceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 117 14 1 Adding and Removing Fixtures center etnener ees 117 14 1 1 Adding a Fixture to the SNOW c cc ccceeeeeene eerie 117 14 1 2 Replicating Fixtures 00 een c 118 14 1 8 Changing the Fixture Type occ eee cette teens 119 14 1 4 Removing a Fixture from the SNOW eeeeeee ees 120 14 1 5 Creating Palettes and Groups Automatically 120 14 2 PatEhiInG FIXTUSS yin ceils Mandal ane a sorta densa uaa teen eed 122 14 2 1 Adding DMX Processors cccccccrcrccrcrcccrcnncc 122 14 2 2 Selecting the DMX Processor Universe and Patch POINT AEAEE A E A A E TET 122 14 2 3 Fixtures with Multiple Patch Points sicc 125 14 2 4 Cloning Patching Of UN Verses cccccccccrcccccrcco 127 14 2 5 Unpatching Fixtures ccc a 128 14 3 Configuring FIXUS S nnie rane olacs EEEE E AN EEE 129 14 3 1 Fixture COnfiQuration oo eerie ies 129 14 3 2 Parameter Configuration oo cece nee ee eens 133 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters eceeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 137 151 SelSSTING FIXTULSS ies aeaoe Aa GEEA 138 15 1 1 Selecting Individual Fixtures ect ee eee eee 138 15 1 2 Selecting Multiple Fixtures ccce 139 1513 Select A erini a ae tei ae Eaa vedo e earns 139 15 1 4 Inverting the Selection oo cette reenter nett teneees 139 Sho Sub Selectos in a paT oana ean 140 15 1 6 Deselecting FIXtures 0 eee ene rene eens 141 15 1 7 Reselecting Fixtures ccc eee
304. nd move the relevant parameter wheel or press the relevant button on the Slot Toolbar e Hold Backspace and move the relevant parameter wheel e Backspace Colour hold Backspace press the relevant parameter type key this gives single handed operation Flying Pig Systems 159 Reference Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters e You can remove the values from the currently highlighted cells in the Programmer by pressing Pig Backspace 15 6 Separating Parameters When recording a cue scene or palette the Wholehog III only records parameters that have been changed or touched since the last cue was recorded See Tracking p 6 and Working with Tracking p 198 However some parameter types are treated as a single fixture attribute so for example when you touch one of the three colour parameters of a colour mixing fixture cyan magenta or yellow the other two are automatically touched at either their current value from playback or at their default values For most purposes this provides the results that you would expect but there may be situations where you want to separate the linked parameters for example to run separate chases with the cyan magenta and yellow parameters By default the Wholehog III links all position parameters together and all colour parameters together You can separate linked parameter types in the Programming pane of the User Preferences window 1 Setup Preferences Pr
305. nded that you do not change between the HSI and CMY systems within a show Flying Pig Systems Section 3 Wholehog II Users Introduction 3 7 New and Streamlined Functions The Wholehog III simplifies clarifies and streamlines some Wholehog II functions This table shows the main changes Wholehog II Function Wholehog III Function Load Use Open to open an object cue palette etc and edit it directly Clone Use Copy to copy settings between fixtures as well as copying whole objects Extract Use Copy to copy settings into the Programmer Active Use Live to make selections based on the look on stage Use Touch to assign hard values corresponding to what is cur rently on stage Use Suck to capture the look that is currently on stage Flying Pig Systems 17 Tutorial The Tutorial guides you through the main operations of setting up the console and programming and running a show If you want a detailed description of how to work with particular functions use the Reference p 61 The Tutorial is in two parts the Quick amp Dirty tutorial shows you how to create a very simple show in Ten steps while the main tutorial gives you a more detailed introduction to the Wholehog III Flying Pig Systems 19 Section 4 Quick amp Dirty A Show in Ten Steps OK you ve got your hands on a Wholehog III and you want to see it working right now You need the Quick and Dirty tutorial 4 1 Step 1 Con
306. ne CONtent renee 227 225 SCOME TIMING iiu caesds cote te Reina bas SASAE ARANEA 228 22 6 Insert Merge ANd REPIACE oo teeter 228 23 Working with Effects cceeeeeeeeeeee eee teense aaen EEN 229 23 IV DSS OF EMSC aiid a retinas jaan enn cetauta tit dias Patek Enia 229 239 1 Effect TADES sevice denuae ts davieiteed ieee EARTE 229 23 1 2 Effect AMTIDUTES 10 teeta 230 23 2 Applying Predefined Effect Palettes icca 232 23 2 1 Adjusting Predefined Effects ccceceeeeeeeee eens 233 23 3 Applying and Editing An Effect cette teeter a 233 23 3 1 Applying Effects with the Effects Engine 00 233 23 3 2 Applying and Editing Effects in the Programmer or Zelio AA AEE TEE E astenersiaty 235 23 3 3 Tracking ERECTS pariin riii aa a i a aa 236 23 4 Cue Timing AN EffECTtS oneic aeiio eiai 236 23 5 Recording an Effect Palette asrrrrererrisrrirririrrerns 238 23 5 1 Naming an Effect Palette acccccccccrrcccccrccrccc 238 23 6 Using Effect Palettes in Programming ccceceeeeeeeee eens 239 23 7 Editing Effect Palettes 0 et a 239 23 8 Deleting Effect Palettes ceric rterereneeeenen einen 240 23 9 Copying and Moving Effect Palettes eect eeeee 240 24 Cu6list PIQYDGCK ey seidccescucsccvececedetcetcecadececdveacescascveeeedessedecneteove 241 24 1 Playing Back from a Physical Master cccceceeeeteeee eerie 241 24 1 1 Attaching Cuelists to MAaStErsS cccccrccccrcccccccn 241 24 1 2 Controlling Cu
307. ne The active timecode input for the console or MIDI Timecode Processor These are None LTC MIDI CD console only VITC MIDI Timecode Processor only Regenerate Frames 30 If the timecode input stops the console or MIDI Time code Processor will regenerate the timecode for this number of frames Use this to protect against brief in terruptions to the timecode signal Regenerate Forever Off The timecode will be regenerated indefinitely The options for Linear Timecode are Setting Default Notes Output Gain OdB The gain to be applied to an LTC signal when it is out put The options for Video Timecode are 298 Flying Pig Systems Section 28 Working with Audio MIDI and Timecode Reference Setting Default Notes Input Format PAL PAL or NTSC format Readlinel 10 The video line where the timecode to be read is en coded Writeline1 10 The video line where the timecode to be written is encoded Burn In Window Visible Off Show the timecode value in the video image that is being output Line 20 The vertical position of the timecode in the video im age Column 40 The horizontal position of the timecode in the video image Tip You can configure a MIDI Timecode Processor using its own display and controls rather than from a console using the Network window All the settings are available in Main gt IO Config For general information on working with MIDI Timecode Processors see Working w
308. necting the Mains Use the IEC cables supplied to connect the console and the DMX Processor to any voltage between 100 and 240V AC 4 2 Step 2 Connecting the DMX Processor Connect the DMX Processor directly to your console with a standard Category 5 Ethernet cross over cable supplied 4 3 Step 3 Starting the Console Switch on the power to the console and the DMX Processor Once the console has started up the Start window will appear 4 4 Step 4 Starting a New Show Select Launch New Show You will be prompted for e A Storage Location Choose the location that the console suggests e A name for your show Press the Set key to bring up an on screen key board to enter text e A Fixture Library This contains fixture personality information Choose the one the console suggests and select Finish The Wholehog III will launch a new show Flying Pig Systems 21 Tutorial Section 4 Quick amp Dirty A Show in Ten Steps 4 5 Step 5 Adding the Fixtures Choose the fixtures you want in your show To add Fixtures 1 Setup gt Patch Fixture Schedule open the Fixture Schedule window 2 Choose a manufacturer and click on the l button to expand the list and see individual fixture types Select the fixture s Quantity cell and press Set Enter the number of fixtures and press Enter Repeat for all the fixture types you want P Ol SRG When you have finished click OK to apply changes and
309. need to specify a different address according to how your network is configured See Also Ethernet Flying Pig Systems Glossary iris key knocking out knockout level look LTP luminaire maintain state mask master memory Flying Pig Systems Variable mask placed within the optical system of the fixture al lowing the conical beam size to be manipulated Not to be confused with zoom See Also zoom A physical button on the console s front panel This manual re serves the word button for buttons that appear on screen See knockout Knocking out is the process of removing fixtures from the Program mer window so that they will not be recorded into cues See intensity A stage lighting picture usually created in the Programmer Once you have created a look you may record it as a scene or cue See Also cue scene Latest Takes Precedence In this system of operation the most re cent instruction to assign the value of a parameter is the one that applies A cue run on one master can take control of fixtures set by a cue in another master See Also HTP See fixture The Wholehog III s Maintain State feature eliminates the common problem with tracking where playing back cues out of order results in incorrect lighting states on stage See Also tracking A method of selecting information that is specific to a palette fix ture cue scene or group when recording making sele
310. ng Example 2 You have two shows programmed using the same rig which you now want to merge Each show contains exactly the same fixtures In this case Replace fixtures and Append Different all of the programming assuming all of the programming has unique names Example 3 You need to add a fixture that is not in the current library In this case obtaina new library file from Flying Pig Systems and merge the new fixture 116 Flying Pig Systems Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures 14 1 14 1 1 Adding and Removing Fixtures You Add remove duplicate and change the type of fixtures from the Fixture window see Figure 14 1 The Fixture window To open the Fixture window e Setup gt Patch e Open Fixture A ioii Replicate Change Edit Fixture Auto View TI a Unpatch Appl Batch Remove Fixtures Type Fixtures Builder Palettes aea i Studio Technobeam Iris 1 DP 2000 Fixture 1 DP 2000 _ 1 426 Fixture 1 DP 2000 _ 1 427 Fixture 1 DP 2000 1 428 Fixture 1 DP 2000 1 429 Fixture 1 DP 2000 1 430 Fixture 1 DP 2000 1 431 _ Fixture 1 DP 2000 1 432_ Fixture 1 DP 2000 _ 1 433_ Fixture 1 DP 2000 1 434 _ Fixture 1 DP 2000 1 435 _ Fixture 1 DP 2000 1 436 _ Fixture 14 DP 2000 _ 1 437 _ Fixture 1 DP 2000 1 438 _ Fixture 1 DP 2000 1 439 Fixture 1 DP 2000 1 Fixture OP 2000 Fixture Figure 14 1 The Fi
311. ng to another cuelist but not to the same cuelist You can keep the values in the Programmer to act as the basis for the next cue on the same list but because of tracking only the changed parameter values will be recorded For an overview of tracking see Tracking p 6 Flying Pig Systems 51 Tutorial Section 9 Recording Cues and Times Tip You can clear fixtures and their values from the Programmer between re cording each cue by pressing the Clear key 9 3 Assigning Timings When you record a cue it is given the default crossfade times You can change the default times in the Default Timing pane in the User Preferences window The In Time is the duration over which fixture parameters will change when the fixture s intensity is increasing The Out Time is the duration over which fixture parameters will change when the fixture s intensity is decreasing A cue with different In and Out times is said to have a split fade To change the timings of a cue 1 Press the Choose key of the master that the cue is in 2 Cue 1 Time 10 Enter sets the In and Out time of Cue 1 on the selected master to 10 seconds To create a split fade with different in and out times 1 Press the Choose key of the master that the cue is in 2 Cue 1 Time 10 20 Enter sets the In time to 10 seconds and the Out time to 20 seconds on Cue 1 on the selected master 9 4 Find Out More For more information see the Reference p 61 section of the manual Fo
312. nnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennn 57 Hal Saving Me SHOW siird niaaa inaa a 57 11 1 Saving to CD ROM i nirs niiiinaiii aneio iii a 57 TELZ Saving TOZO DISK ieioea na a a a aai 58 LZ BACKING Up ys rs iea e alginic iad ae mia a E FEAE IT a nE 58 11 2 1 Backing Up Manually vo cece teene tennis 58 T22 Aufo BACKUP iia rr Poe a tt day tania Lassa iaa E 59 TES SAUTING DOWN miren weve a a A E EAE Anai 59 11 4 Find Out MOTS oo ie 60 R REICION CO inis ccdeceeeceetect eet cseseeavedacetive checsenagtebtihcenedecvedacsavechaepavevesandvad 61 iv Flying Pig Systems Wholehog II 12 Setting Up the System ccceceee ee ee cece eee e cece ee nea eaeseeaeeeeaeeeeeee 63 12 1 Setting Up the Console oo eee ener tene teen e eens 63 121 1 POWGI caratatndeiirinincui vehi AEA neg ehicrn gawd EEN 64 122 TOUGH SCE SIS e ta hart daar E EE AA aR a 64 12 1 3 External DISPIOYS sssssssersrrrrrrrirrrrrsrirrrnrrrererirrrrre 65 1214 Desk ligNi Sa a a n E ade nese 66 12 1 5 Trackball and Wheels 0 een nes 66 121 6 Keys ANA BUTIOMS vies nce iay teera eea ai 69 PANE oeoo E EE E 69 12 1 8 Date and TIME pigesni tone rnenenaee 70 121 9 PNTE S enere at t EnaA EE AAE E E AEE AAA 70 12 2 Setting Up the Network 0 eee t ener eineies 72 12 2 1 Connecting Directly to an DMX Processor sacca 73 12 2 2 Connecting One Console to Several DMX Pro COSSOMS Hil sev E car teniiliva deds dan cel eas vee ree adenaeee bal ie 73 12 2 3 Connecting and Configuring More
313. nsities When flashing it indicates that its control of intensity has been overridden by cues on other masters The Playback Bar located on the display immediately above the masters shows the details of the running cuelist on each master 2 A Tragic Sc 1 Master Cue Cue 1 Cue2 Chase The main information shown on the Playback Bar is e If the master is empty its number is shown e The number and name of the cuelist e The current cue and its overall time When the cue is running it is dis played in green text and the time counts down 54 Flying Pig Systems Section 10 Playback Tutorial e The next few cues and their times If you want to see more cues click and drag the top of the Playback Bar upwards to increase its size e The master level as a percentage If the master is below 100 then a red bar appears indicating the level For more information on the Playback Bar see Control and Playback Toolbar Feedback p 256 10 3 Find Out More For more information see the Reference p 61 section of the manual For Cuelist Playback See Cuelist Playback p 241 For Rate Overrides See Overriding Rate During Playback p 260 Flying Pig Systems 55 Section 11 Saving and Shutting Down 11 1 Saving the Show Your show data is stored on the Wholehog III s internal hard disk in a location that you select when creating the show The console saves changes to the disk as they are made and in the event
314. nt specific fixture parameters from returning to their default values so that they hold their current value until they are assigned to a new programmed value 1 Setup Patch Edit Fixtures open the Edit Fixtures window 2 Click on the Releasable cell for the required fixture parameter 3 Press the Set key to assign the fixture parameter to be releasable or not as required Flying Pig Systems 135 Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters You can select Fixtures and modify their parameters in the Programmer Once recorded in palettes cues and scenes they can be adjusted in editors The Programmer and other editors all work in essentially the same way for an overview of editors see Working with Editors p 98 lolx Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table Nshat Show Fade O Technobeam Studio Studio Desk Edt paeis Changes compact 5 lis Spot 575 Color 575 Sal Num Note Intensity Strobe __ Position Colour ning Colour 2 Type Pan rk Tre yar r e Sanat Col Shake Bink ober J Technobear Iris 100 22 100 Studio Spot 575 E _ 100 aqua OHz off open C TE 100 aqua OHz off open Studi 1 100 287 31 open P 100 89 20 open Desk Channel E _ zy 31 100 32 100 sjo gt Figure 15 1 The Programmer window To open the Programmer e Select Programmer from the Main Toolbar To open other editors e Select the desired palette
315. nts A Big Show_bek hog3 tar gz Server Auto Backup Status Inactive A Apply ale ok X Cancel Figure 11 3 The Show Manager Window 11 3 Shutting Down To shut down the console e Setup gt Quit the Quit button is on the right hand end of the Setup Toolbar The Shut Down dialog will open see Figure 11 4 The Shut Down Dialog with the following options Flying Pig Systems 59 Tutorial Section 11 Saving and Shutting Down Shut Down shutting down will turn the Wholehog III off completely e Restart Console restarting is like shutting the console down and turning it on again and will take you to the Start window e Log Off logging off will close your current desktop Programmer and output screens as well as closing the current show file The console is left powered up and running ready for you or another user to log on e Cancel cancels the quit command In all cases except cancel your show data is automatically saved to disk W Shut Down Hog3 Session 2 x x Do you want to Restart Console Log Off Cancel Figure 11 4 The Shut Down Dialog j Shut Down 11 4 60 Find Out More For more information see the Reference p 61 section of the manual For Saving the Show See Managing Show Data p 106 For Shutting Down See Restarting and Shutting Down p 106 Flying Pig Systems Reference The Reference part of the manual describes in detail
316. ny values that previously tracked through from the deleted cue into the next cue Flying Pig Systems Section 19 Working with Cues Reference Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 3 100 80 50 Cue 4 40 To delete a cue without tracking the changes forwards 1 List 1 Cue 3 select the cue to be deleted 2 Press and hold the Delete key The Record Options Toolbar will appear 3 Deselect Forward from the Record Options Toolbar 4 Release the Delete key 19 7 4 Blocking Cues Important The Blocking column of the cuelist window is not currently implemented It is recommended that you build blocking cues manually It is planned that future software versions will allow you to make blocking cues automatically Blocking cues prevent changes made earlier in the cuelist from tracking through to subsequent cues in the cuelist See Tracking Through Changes p 7 Using State You can create blocking cues using the State button on the Record Options Toolbar For example suppose that you have the following cues Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 2 100 60 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 40 to turn Cue 4 into a blocking cue you copy it to itself with state 1 Cue 4 Copy State Cue 4 Enter the State button is on the Record Options Toolbar that appears when you press Copy 2 Select Replace The values are now Flying Pig Systems 201 Reference 19 7 5 202 Section 19 Working with Cues F
317. o and Redo The Undo button is on the Main Toolbar at the bottom of the right touchscreen Similar to the undo command found in computer applications the undo function works back through the last commands entered by the user undoing them each time the button is pressed Its application is global working back through operations in chronological order and you can go back all the way to the point at which you logged on to the console generally this is when you started the console up Pressing the Pig button together with the Undo button will redo the last undone action Again if you have gone back through several undos you can redo repeatedly until you get back to the most recent action Flying Pig Systems Section 13 Using the Console Reference What You Can and Can t Undo The undo and redo feature works on your show data but generally not on other things Undo is not available for Changes to the fixture selection in the Programmer However the selec tion may change as a side effect of an undo action Changes to Control Panel settings and other things not directly related to your programmed show Changes to window positions and views and the like If undo is not available you will always be asked to confirm important changes before they take place 13 2 Working with Windows 13 2 1 Opening Windows Windows can be opened in four ways Flying Pig Systems From a Toolbar Some windows may have a dedicated but
318. ocessors shown or you want to patch to one that isn t listed shown in the list you need to add it See Adding DMX Processors p 122 4 Click or press one of the four DMX universes shown to select a universe to patch to The display gives a graphical indication of which addresses are already occupied Type in a number for the fixture s DMX start address the next free address is shown below each universe 5 Click on OK or press Enter 6 If you have finished patching click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch information to the DMX Processors Number J InUse J Found Patch points Fixture 7 Dmed Dms2 Ome med lt Add DP Press Set to enter Number gt Figure 14 6 The Fixture Patch window You can also use the keypad to patch fixtures For example to patch Studio Color 1 to DMX Processor 2 Universe 4 at address 17 e Fixture 1 2 4 17 Enter To patch further fixtures to the same DMX Processor and universe you can use the shorthand e Fixture 2 33 Enter To patch a fixture at the next available address on the same DMX Processor and universe e Fixture 3 Enter Again if you have finished patching click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch information to the DMX Processors Patching Several Fixtures at Once If you select several fixtures and patch them the Wholehog IIT will allocate them to a continuous range of DMX addresses assigning ea
319. of a power failure the battery backup will ensure that all saves are completed before the console shuts down 11 1 1 Saving to CD ROM To store a copy of your current show to a CD ROM use the File Browser pane of the Show Manager window see Figure 11 2 The Current Show pane of the Show Manager window 1 Setup Shows gt CD Burning 2 Navigate to the Folder that contains the show you wish to burn using the left hand file list Select it and press Add to CD Alternatively drag it into the right hand CD Master list 3 Repeat for all the shows you wish to copy to CD 4 Insert a blank disk and select Burn To stop files being burnt or to make new selection for another CD ROM select Clear CD Master oix CD Buring T Choose files to burn to the CD Browse the files to be burnt to the CD D Curent Show Audedockip Look In Shows v Ew EJ Look In cdmaster v Ra Name Description Created Name Description Created CD Burning l A Bio Show Hog3showtv3osz 14737200 EA Big Show Hog3 Show v3 0 47 14 3 200 M File Browser dp Tutorial No Patch Tutorial Show with no pat 13 3 200 be Addto CD Clear CD Master Bum uke Apply ila Ok X Cancel Figure 11 1 The CD Burning pane of the Show Manager window Flying Pig Systems 57 Tutorial 11 1 2 Section 11 Saving and Shutting Down Saving to Zip Disk To store a copy of your current show to a Zip disk use the Current Sh
320. of the colours will produce further shades so 50 C 0 M 50 Y will produce a middle saturation green RGB this system is used mainly by fixtures based on LEDs The colour is controlled by three parameters Red R Green G and Blue B with the three parameters at 0 the fixture produces no light output and the higher than value of these parameters the greater the fixture s total light output If the three parameters have equal values then the light output will be white within the limits of the technologies used use one or two of the parameters to get the colour you want and then add the other s to de saturate it dilute it towards white For example values of 0 R 0 G 100 B will produce a bright saturated blue while 80 R 80 G 100 B will produce a bright blue tint 50 R 100 G 100 B will produce a middle saturation cyan While the Wholehog III allows you to control the CMY or RGB parameters of fixtures directly this method has several disadvantages With both the RGB and CMY systems it is difficult to remember what combination of settings will achieve the colour you want With both systems colour and fixture intensity are linked Under the CMY system giving all three parameters values above 0 unnecessarily reduces the light output with the RGB system fixtures often don t provide a separate intensity parameter so you have to control it with the colour parameters However it is usually much more convenient when p
321. oft see Soft Keys Time 211 Trackball 67 Update 99 184 killing processes 347 Knockout button 159 384 Index L Launch Existing Show 104 automatically 104 launch macros 105 Launch New Show 103 learn timing 217 Leave In Background 278 matching master levels 279 Levels View window 260 library choosing 103 merged status 107 linear timecode see timecode gain 298 Linear Timecode USB Widget 295 link cues 218 links see link cues Live key 179 181 Load 17 logging off 106 loops 218 action of Go key 218 tracking through 220 Lower Priority 93 lowlight 184 lowlight palette 94 LTP 9 250 251 268 scene 269 M macro command syntax 303 when changing pages 280 when cues run 264 when launching a show 105 mains power 64 maintain state 8 220 maintenance 351 front panel 345 manual crossfade 261 manual cues 216 mask syntax 100 when recording effect palettes 238 when recording palettes 174 masking when recording fade times 207 Flying Pig Systems Index masters 9 12 fixture 12 Grand Master 285 inhibitive 266 286 pages 277 physical 241 265 virtual 12 241 254 265 272 which is the currently chosen master 102 Matching Levels 279 285 Merge button with cuelists 224 with cues 192 with groups 164 with palettes 178 with scenes 228 merging shows 111 MIDI 291 sending standard syntax 295 show control 293 using with timecode 295 MIDI show control
322. ogging off will close your current desktop Programmer and output screens as well as closing the current show file The console is left powered up and running and returns to the start window e Cancel cancels the quit command In all cases your show data is automatically saved to disk W Shut Down Hog3 Session 2 x x Do you want to Shut Down Restart Console Log Off Cancel Figure 13 18 The Shut Down Dialog 13 8 106 Managing Show Data Your show data is stored on the internal hard disk in the location that you chose when creating the show Show files and folders are located in the Shows folder and libraries in the Libraries folder The console saves changes to the disk as they are made and in the event of a power failure the battery backup will ensure that all saves are completed before shut down You can use the Show Manager window see Figure 13 19 The Show Manager Window to see the details of the shows in the console and backup move copy and delete them To open the Show Manager e Setup Shows Flying Pig Systems Section 13 Using the Console Reference ox Current Show File Browser m Current Show ta AutoBackup Hog3 Show v3 0 4 14 3 2005 11 42 o CD Burnin 2 3 Hog3 Show v3 0 47 14 3 2005 11 39 B File Browser 2S Tutorial No Patch Tutorial Show with no patch v3 0 13 3 2005 15 35 Figure 13 19 The Show Manager Window
323. ogramming 2 Toggle separating parameters on and off by pressing the parameter type buttons see Figure 15 12 The Programming pane of the User Prefer ences window W User Preferences Console Programming Separate Parameters Confirm Bef Appearance Vv Intensi Position Delet i Sensitivity tent ra A Kerin OQ Colour pean i ma ey Timings A Track Ball A ete ies Front Em Preview Editors A yl Close on Update vA Close on Clear 4 deta D Default Timing a UN a e r eaa e iaia Figure 15 12 The Programming pane of the User Preferences window 160 Flying Pig Systems Section 16 Working with Groups Groups are pre recorded fixture selections complete with selection order information They are stored in the Group Directory for general information on working with direct ories see Working with Directories p 94 Groups allow the quick selection of multiple fixtures and like ordinary fixture selections groups can be combined and manipulated in a variety of ways Note that group information is only used for making fixture selections in editors and is not recorded into palettes cues or scenes To Open the Group Directory e Open Group e Group Group W Group Directory Gua z S O ia fe ese Even Desk Desk Channel 1 3 Chania 213 channel 3 3 13 All Studio Color 575 14 Odd Studio Color 575
324. ok by assigning fixture parameter values in the Programmer but it is difficult to know which cue or scene is contributing which values to the total on stage The Wholehog III s Auto Update feature automatically suggests the appropriate cues palettes and scenes to merge the changes into allowing you to choose how the updates are performed Flying Pig Systems Section 18 Advanced Programming Reference Auto Update The list below shows cues scenes and palettes that have been overridden by the programmer Type Cuelist O Track Backwards O Colour 50 Palette Figure 18 1 The Auto Update window When you have finished editing in the Programmer you can merge the parameter values into the currently playing cues palettes and scenes by pressing the Update key The Auto Update window will open showing which cuelists cues palettes and scenes are contributing to the look on stage so that you can choose which to update For cuelists you have several choices e Either update the current cue in the cuelist or track the programming backwards so that the new values are merged into the last cue with a hard value for that parameter see Tracking Values Backwards When Re cording p 198 e Ifyou have existing programming that refers to a palette you can choose to update the palette instead of adding new parameter values to a cue In this case these updates will be performed first and anything left in the Programmer after this w
325. ol functions 334 Flying Pig Systems Section 31 The Fixture Builder Lamp Control commands from Strobe channel 1 5 Appendices Select the function cell for a blank DMX Entry of channel 10 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories Select Control on the left column to display a list of Control function sub categories Select Lamp Control as the desired function The window will close and you will see Lamp Control assigned as the function for channel 10 Note the feature column will auto fill with Strike Select this cell and press Set Choose Douse from the dialog box Select the DMX value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the DMX for the lamp douse according to the DMX protocol 245 and press Enter Repeat the above steps for the lamp strike ability of the fixture Note that Real World values are not allowed for Lamp Control functions 31 2 4 Step 4 Build the Fixture Your fixture should be similar to the example below Model Name Tutorial Author Me Date Modified 26 04 2005 20 40 36 Notes This fixture is modeled after the tutorial Dmx Footprint 10 Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 Edit Channel z Function Feature Dms Value Real World Intensit Intensit 02255 02100 23 Pan Pan 0 gt 65535 270 gt 270 23 Pan Pan 065535 270 gt 270 45 Tilt Tilt 0265535 135 gt 135 14 5 Tilt Titt 0265535 135 gt 135 6 Cyan Variable 255 0 02100 7 Magenta Variable 255 0 O
326. olehog II Flying Pig Systems Section 18 Advanced Programming Reference Using Blind When Editing When editing a cue or scene that is currently on stage pressing the Edit button in the editor window will automatically select Blind mode by default You can override the default state with two other Blind Mode options Through The Blind key will flash Press it repeatedly to toggle between changes made and original values on stage e Asserted Any edits are visible live on stage To change the Default Blind State 1 Setup gt Preferences Programming 2 Select the desired state from the drop down menu and click OK 18 6 Parking Sometimes it is useful to lock certain parameter values of fixtures independently from programming playback and the Grand Master For example you might want to lock a particular dimmer at a certain level as a working light or point a fixture to provide light for maintenance whilst a rehearsal or programming is in progress Park is also helpful for dealing with a fixture malfunction locking its pan and tilt so that it doesn t make a noise as it tries to move during the show Parking holds a fixture s parameters on stage but still allows you to edit the data in the Programmer or other editors To park fixture parameter values 1 Fixture 1 50 Select fixture s and assign the parameter s you wish to park 2 More Park Select Park from the More options of the Main Toolbar
327. olour including to a chosen definition of white It can also be used for fixtures that have not been calibrated but the colours that will be produced may not match the colours from fixtures that do have calibration data You can choose colours using the parameter wheels to assign cyan magenta and yellow values or hue and saturation values or you can use the on screen visual colour picker see The Colour Picker p 149 It is preferable to program using Hue and Saturation whenever possible The advantages are e Selecting colours using Hue and Saturation or the colour picker will produce the same visual colour output on all calibrated fixture types e You can use fanning and effects on Hue and Saturation to produce at tractive looks quickly e When you use Hue and Saturation to pick a colour the Wholehog III will automatically use the best possible DMX value settings for each fixture type to achieve maximum light output from each fixture e You can crossfade from a saturated red to a saturated green without the saturation changing The crossfade will work through all the saturated colours between red and green rather than taking an unexpected path to get there as can happen when using CMY programming e Crossfades between colours recorded using Hue and Saturation will remain matched on all fixtures through the progress of the crossfade This produces a better more even looking colour crossfade Tip Z It is strongly recomme
328. om Type WINKOW s sssssrssrserenrnrrerrerirrrersrirererere 323 31 2 The Create New Custom Type WINKOW ccccceseseseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenens 324 31 3 The Fixture Builder WINKOW 00 erie 325 35 1 The Launched Processes WINKOW sectiei nee 348 37 1 Rear panel Of The CONSOIE oo o tens 355 Flying Pig Systems xvii Introduction Flying Pig Systems Section 1 Getting Started The Wholehog III has been designed to be as easy to use as possible However it is also designed to control big complex lighting rigs as well as small simple ones and so at times operating the console is going to get complex too This manual has been written to help you become a proficient programmer with the Wholehog III wherever you are starting from and whatever kind of lighting you do Tip Z You can open the Wholehog lll s built in User Manual at any time by pressing the Help button on the Window Control Toolbar at the top of the right hand screen 1 1 Where to Start If you want to get going straight away go to Quick amp Dirty A Show in Ten Steps p 21 Otherwise read one of the two sections designed to help you make the transition to the Wholehog III according to your previous experience with consoles e Users New to Moving Light Consoles p 5 e Wholehog II Users p 11 If you haven t used a Wholehog console before but are experienced with other moving light consoles you may still find the section Users New to Moving Light Consol
329. on 19 Working with Cues Reference 19 15 Naming Cues You can give a cue a name that will be displayed in the Cuelist window and on the Playback Bar 1 Open Choose opens the Cuelist window of the selected master 2 Select the cue s name cell 3 Set name Enter type in the name Tip To name a cue immediately after recording it press the Set key This will open a Quickname window Enter the cue name and select OK 19 2 Record Options 19 2 1 Recording Selected Fixtures Only Normally recording a cue records the total contents of the Programmer or editor but you can choose to record only the currently selected fixtures For example 1 Select the fixtures that you want to record 2 Record More the More button is on the Record Options Toolbar at the bottom of the right hand screen 3 Selected press Selected on the Record Options Toolbar 4 Choose records the selected fixtures as a new cue in the cuelist on the selected master 19 2 2 Removing Fixtures and Parameter Values from Cues You can remove the contents of the Programmer or editor from a previously recorded cue For example you might have made changes to a cue and you want the changes to track through subsequent cues see Tracking p 6 for an explanation of tracking To remove parameter values 1 Ensure that the parameters that you want to remove are in the Program mer The parameter values do not matter only that the parameters have values 2 Record Remove
330. on t accidentally activate a palette when pressing its button in the directory 3 Select the palette to be named 238 Flying Pig Systems Section 23 Working with Effects Reference 4 Set name Enter type in the name Tip To name an effect palette immediately after recording it pressing the Set key will open a Quickname window Enter the palette name and select OK 23 6 Using Effect Palettes in Programming In the Programmer or editor you can apply an effect by selecting it from the Effect Directory The effect will be applied to the current fixture selection providing that it contains parameter information for the selected fixtures An iris step effect cannot therefore be applied to a fixture that has no iris function By default predefined effect palettes are direct see Direct Palettes p 177 For example 1 Open Effect open the Effect Directory window 2 1Thru 5 select the fixtures 3 Effect 1 select the effect from the Effect Directory window Or using the command line e 1 Thru 5 Effect 1 Enter 23 7 Editing Effect Palettes You can edit an effect palette by opening it in an editor window you can then edit its contents in the same way as you edit values in any editor See Applying and Editing Effects in the Programmer or Editor p 235 To open an effect in an editor 1 Open Effect open the Effect Directory 2 Open Effect 1 open the editor for Effect 1 You can select the
331. onal toolbar will open showing the available slot positions see Figure 15 6 The Colour Slots Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 3 Select a slot from the available slot positions Colour coou2 Strobe Gobo Gobo 2 Macro Enable l Mode Control Figure 15 5 The Slot Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 open yellow cto aqua pink magenta Colour Cobo Strobe Gobo Gobo 2 Macro Enable Figure 15 6 The Colour Slots Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 Mode Control 146 Flying Pig Systems Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters Reference 15 3 5 Working with Colour Fixtures that have continuously variable colour mixing create colour in different ways The two main systems are CMY this system is used by most moving lights that have continuous colour mixing the colour is controlled by three parameters Cyan C Magenta M and Yellow Y Fixtures that use the CMY system start by producing white light and then filter out the unwanted colours to leave the desired colour higher parameter values produce a greater filtering effect so that setting them all to 100 produces black To avoid wasting the light intensity of the fixture you should always keep at least one of the CMY parameters at 0 setting the other two at higher values to get more saturated colours For example values of 0 C 0 M 20 Y will produce a pale yellow tint while 0 C 100 M 0 Y will produce a fully saturated magenta Mixing two
332. one of the parameter type keys on the front panel Intensity Position Colour Beam Effect Time and Control If the fixture has more parameters of a particular type than there are parameter wheels you can press the parameter type keys to page through the parameters Slot Toolbar Use for parameters that have discrete rather than continu ous values known as slotted such as the positions of a colour wheel This gives you button press control of the possible values The Slot Toolbar also has buttons to access the control functions Enable Mode and Control Spreadsheet You can directly edit a parameter s value in an editor s spreadsheet view Click on the cell press Set type in a value and press Enter Colour Picker You can assign hue and saturation values for a fixture s colour using the Colour Picker See The Colour Picker p 149 Flying Pig Systems Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters Reference 15 3 1 e Gel Picker You can assign the colour of fixtures to match a colour filter from various manufacturers ranges using the Gel Picker See The Gel Picker p 150 Intensity Fixture intensities can either be assigned from the keypad or using the Wheel as well as the parameter wheels and by editing directly in the editor spreadsheet With the Key To assign intensities using the key and the numeric keypad e Fixture 4 70 Enter Assigns Fixture 4 to 70 e Fixture 4 5 Enter Assigns F
333. oops and Links Normally cues in a cuelist will be replayed in numerical order but you can use links to change this Links can be used to jump to other points in the cuelist or to create loops Unlike some consoles the Wholehog II creates a link as a special type of cue rather than an attribute of an ordinary cue Because it is a separate item in the cuelist you can move cues within the list without disturbing the link Tip S When a cuelist gets to the end it will link back to the first cue by default so there is no need to put a link in 20 4 1 Creating a Link To create a link 1 Open Cuelist 1 open the cuelist window 2 Play the cues in the list until the current cue shown by gt in the wait column is the cue before where you want the link 3 Click on the Insert Link button in the window The link cue will be inser ted after the current cue 4 Select the Fade cell of the link 5 Set cue number Enter assign the cue number to be linked to You can delete link cues in the same way as any other type of cue For example e Cue 3 5 Delete 20 4 2 Creating a Loop To create a loop you need to have two things 218 Flying Pig Systems Section 20 Working with Cue Timing and Ordering Reference e A link that points to a cue earlier in the cuelist e All the cues in the loop between the linked to cue and the link cue must be assigned with wait or follow triggers see Working with Cue Triggers p 216
334. option is activated the overridden cuelist will not automatically release and will remain active when the overriding cuelist is later released To turn Persist on Override on for a cuelist 1 Open Choose Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Persist on Override QO Persist On Override Alternatively you can assign Persist on Override for all new cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the Preferences window e Setup Preferences gt Cuelist Flying Pig Systems 253 Reference 24 2 4 Section 24 Cuelist Playback Multiple Cuelists with Effects If a cuelist contains parameters that are running an effect when another cuelist or scene changes the underlying values of those parameters the effect continues to run Use Pile Add FX to allow the second cuelist or scene to override the effect as well as the under lying values For example to allow the cuelist on Master 10 override effects running on other masters 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window for Master 10 2 Options open the cuelist s Playback Options window 3 Select the Cuelist pane and select Pile Add FX Q Pile add Effects Reset On Release 24 3 24 3 1 254 Playback with a Virtual Master You can run cuelists without assigning them to a physical master by using virtual masters Virtual masters are always at full intensity so the intensity of fixtures is that programmed in the cues An almost unlimited number of virtual masters runnin
335. orking with Loops and Links p 218 Action of Halt when Halted By default pressing the Halt key when a cue is halted steps the cuelist back a cue in the assigned back time see Cuelist Timing and Rate Settings p 248 You can change this action using the Action of Halt When Halted menu Action Notes None The current cue remains halted Resume The current cue continues to fade Release The cuelist is released see Releasing a Cuelist on a Master p 244 Configuring Fader Actions You can configure a master s fader to trigger actions A fader s actions can be configured in the Master pane of the cuelist s Playback Options window e Go Off Zero The cuelist is triggered when the fader is moved from zero as if you had pressed the Go key e Release At Zero The cuelist is released when the fader returns to zero see Releasing a Cuelist on a Master p 244 Configuring Flash Button Actions You can configure the level and actions of the Flash key Flying Pig Systems 249 Reference 24 2 250 Section 24 Cuelist Playback Setting Default Notes Flash on Flash off On Level 100 Solo Off Latch Off Go on flash Off Release on flash Off Set to off to prevent accidentally flashing of a cuelist s contents When on pressing the Flash key will output the cuelist s intensities at their programmed values irre spective of the fader position The proportion of the programmed intensity that
336. ort of routers hubs are being used e Other PC s or applications such as Artnet ETCNet Web Servers and so on that are sharing the same net work Once a problem has been reported it will often be necessary for the support team at Flying Pig Systems to clarify some of the details and obtain additional information Typically this ends up with a request for a copy of the show so a backup of the show should be saved to either a Zip disk or a writeable CD and transferred to a PC where it can be mailed to support flyingpig com Tip The version number of the software installed on your console can be found on the System Info pane of the Control Panel window Flying Pig Systems 349 Appendices Section 35 Getting Help 35 2 2 Reporting Problems with the User Manual Please include the following information in your bug report 1 The nature of the problem e Missing information e Incorrect information e Unclear or ambiguous information e Unable to find information in the index 2 The section number where the problem is 3 The version number of the manual In printed and PDF editions you can find this on the title page at the start of the manual The HTML edition including the built in manual in the console shows the version on the main contents page you can go to this page by clicking home at the bottom of any page 35 2 3 About Software Version Numbering The software version number is made up of four parts the ma
337. other than intensity When flashing it indicates that its control of those parameters has been overridden by other play backs e Flash key Red When solidly lit this indicates that this playback is controlling intensity When flashing it indicates that its control of intens ity has been overridden by other playbacks The Playback Bar Master Group 6 Flame Flic 9 Disco Chas 3 Front of H 2 A Tragic Sc 1 Master Cue Grand see se Cue 1 Is Cue 1 Cue2 Chase 120bpm Full Full Eull Full Figure 24 4 The Playback Bar The Playback Bar is located at the bottom of the left touchscreen giving feedback for each master see Figure 24 4 The Playback Bar For each master the Playback Bar dis plays the following information e If the master is empty its number is shown Console masters are numbered 1 to 10 while masters on playback wings are numbered 1 1 to 1 10 for the first wing 2 1 to 2 10 for the second wing and so on e The number and name of the cuelist This is shown in blue if the master has been held over after a page change see Options When Changing Page 256 Flying Pig Systems Section 24 Cuelist Playback p 278 The name and number will appear in lavender if the master is from a template page see The Template Page p 284 The current cue and its overall time When the cue is running it is dis played in green text and the time counts down If the cuelist has been released then is di
338. ots 1 5 11 15 Technobeams 1 8 21 28 Desk Channels 1 16 31 46 Note that throughout this manual it is assumed that you have assigned user numbers so that they are unique so you don t have to specify the fixture type Flying Pig Systems Section 7 Setting Up the Show Tutorial 74 Automatically creating Palettes and Groups Groups are predefined selections of fixtures while palettes are predefined parameter settings Together they speed up programming by allowing you to create states from building blocks of light Creating your own groups and palettes is described in Creating and Using Groups p 43 and Creating and Using Palettes p 47 but to get you started the Wholehog III can create an initial set of groups and palettes automatically The Auto Palettes function located at the top of the Fixture window automatically creates commonly needed colour and beam palettes and common groups such as All Odd Even and so on based on the fixtures in the show 1 Setup Patch Auto Palettes the Auto Palettes window opens giving a range of options see Figure 7 3 The Auto Palettes Window 2 Select Generate 3 Close the Fixture window alo x A Make Groups Maximum Group repeat q 3 o Make Intensity palettes A Make Position palettes Make Colour palettes Separate by wheel Make Beam palettes h Separate by wheel Alignment spacing q 6 X Cancel TA Generate Figure 7 3
339. ou want to create the new page A new blank page is created 4 Set name Enter name the page Or using the command line 1 Page number Enter a new blank page is created 2 Set name Enter name the page Important When you create a new blank page it is automatically loaded onto the physical playback masters By default any cuelists scenes and inhibitive Flying Pig Systems 277 Reference Section 26 Working with Pages masters that were previously loaded will be released and their contents will no longer be output from the console You can change this behaviour see Options When Changing Page p 278 26 2 Changing Page Changing the page loads a different set of cuelists scenes and or inhibitive masters onto the physical playback masters You can do this in several ways e Press the Next Page key to go to the next page in the Page Directory To go to the previous page hold Pig and press Next Page e Using the command line Page number Enter e Select the desired page from the Page Directory window Check that the Guard button in the directory window is not selected e Use a macro within a cuelist see Automating the Console Using Macros p 303 The current page is shown in the status area at the right hand end of the Command Line Toolbar The current page Page 2 Frogrammer Master 2 FT 05 37 Tip You can control which page loads next when you use Next Page to change pages by having the pag
340. ow it automatically contains desktop views for palettes cuelists output and the Programmer Recording a Desktop View To record a desktop view using the View Toolbar 1 Arrange the console s windows as you want them stored in the desktop view 2 Hold down the Record key and press one of the numbered buttons on the View Toolbar Naming a Desktop View To name a desktop view using the View Toolbar 1 Press the Set key together with the appropriate button on the View Toolbar The Quickname window will open Flying Pig Systems Section 13 Using the Console Reference 2 Enter a name and click on OK To name a desktop view using the Views Directory 1 Open View opens the Views Directory 2 Select the button for the view you want to name Make sure that the Guard button is depressed otherwise you will activate the view instead of just selecting it 3 Press the Set key The Quickname window will open 4 Enter a name and click on OK Tip You can also assign view names and add commenis to them in the spreadsheet view of the Views Directory See Desktop View Options p 89 Recalling a Desktop View You can recall desktop views in two ways e With the View Toolbar located at the top of the left hand screen The views each have their own button and are loaded in pages of ten onto the toolbar You can load the next page by pressing the Next button at the right hand end of the toolbar while Pig Next loa
341. ow pane of the Show Manager window see Figure 11 2 The Current Show pane of the Show Manager window 1 Insert a Zip disk into the drive located under the console s front wrist rest 2 Setup Shows gt Current Show Press the Backup button 4 Select a location file name and description for the backup show file lolx TT Corer Sron fe Current Show Information Filename on Server c Documents and Settings All Users Documents Screenshots working show fa AutoBackup Server Address 10 0 0 3 6600 CDB fesson hA ure Description of Show Hog3 Show B File Browser Management Maintenance Take a snapshot of your current show for safe keeping Merge Show Merge programming and library information e Correct corruption in your from another Hog III show current show file i Remove embeddable palettes that Strip Unused Palettes are not used in any programming Backup Garbage Collect Remove deleted show data Jf rp fa X Cancel Figure 11 2 The Current Show pane of the Show Manager window 11 2 11 21 58 Backing Up Itis good practice to backup your show data regularly You can make backups manually or you can assign the console to automatically make backups using the Auto Backup function Backing Up Manually Use the Current Show pane of the Show Manager window to store a copy of your current show to another location on the console s hard disk
342. ows Z Flying Pig Systems Tip User preference settings are stored as part of the show file You can also in dependently save your preference settings and load them into another console or show see Saving and Loading Your Preferences p 110 Control Panel settings are unique to the console and must be configured on each console 63 Reference 12 1 1 12 1 2 64 Section 12 Setting Up the System Power You can connect the Wholehog III to any mains supply between 100 and 240V AC In the event of power failure the Wholehog III uses its battery backup supply to save the show data to its hard disk and shut down the console Touch Screens The two large screens are touch sensitive so you can access buttons and data directly by touching them For information on maintenance of the touch screens see Care of Touch Screens p 345 Calibration The touch screens may occasionally need to be calibrated to ensure that where you are pressing is aligned with the screen s display To recalibrate on start up select Touchscrns at the bottom of the right hand touch screen when the Start window appears A target will appear sequentially in each corner which you should touch in turn see Figure 12 2 The Calibration Screen The calibration is complete when you have done all four corners press Enter when finished You can press the Set key to start the process again if neces sary You can also calibrate the touch screens at
343. p 7 Programming Your Custom Fixture ccc 337 32 Keyboard MappingS ecceeeeeee eee ec eee eeeee eee ce eens eaeseeaeeeeaeeee 339 33 Pig Key Commands ceceee eee cece eee ee eee e ee eea eee eeaesaeeaeeeeeeeees 341 34 Upgrading and Care of the Console ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 343 34 1 Updating Somware i scicic hase voni irani iani tenet avandia 343 34 1 1 Updating the Console Software oo eee 343 34 1 2 Clean Install oe eerie ies 343 34 1 3 Updating the DMX Processor Software icca 344 34 2 Care Of TOUCH SCICEMNS 0 eee 345 34 3 Front PANE Cale ss ic siecetane ois estenccics elvis ceeoterihad obviate encanta 345 35 Getting Help ccceeceeceeceeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeseeseeseesoesoesones 347 35 1 TROUBIESHOOTING isivsteecsesscicivivend ceasetuecivavibnciitaadaginays ieia 347 35 1 1 The console appears to have crashed or OZOD e o a at ea Camedia aie de a EA nodal Manion ot 347 35 1 2 The console isn t talking to the DMX Processors 347 35 1 3 The console doesn t start or shuts down shortly after SWITCHING TON sasdeuren sianie ce e ara a i iaa 348 35 1 4 The playback controls don t behave as expec TOC REE A NE A AA AAE EN 348 35 2 Reporting PrODIEMS i crniiin eiaeiiai aaa 349 35 2 1 Reporting Problems with the Console ccce 349 35 2 2 Reporting Problems with the User Manual 350 35 2 3 About Software Version NUMbErING ees 350 35 2 4 About Beta SOPTWOME
344. parameter values 153 deselecting 141 duplicating 118 generic 117 interchangeable 14 inverting pan and tilt 131 inverting the selection 139 modes 117 notes 131 patch notes 131 patching 122 proportional patch 132 protocol 129 removing 120 removing from an editor 159 replicating 118 reselecting 141 select all 139 selecting 138 selecting from what is onstage 179 selection order 141 sub selections 140 swapping axes 131 the fixture builder 321 timing 210 type 129 unpatching 128 user number 130 flash button flash level 249 Flying Pig Systems Index go on flash 249 latching 249 release on off 249 solo 249 Flash key 242 flip 67 144 folders creating 108 Follow Chosen 258 Follow Cue 258 Follow Current 197 Follow Next 197 follow on 216 follow on time 205 Forward button 199 200 front panel 11 cleaning 345 G generic fixtures 117 global palettes 172 Global button when recording palettes 172 glossary 3 365 Go key 242 Goto key 243 Grand Master 285 loosing 285 graphical user interface 5 83 Group Directory 94 groupings see fanning groups 161 copying 164 creating automatically 120 deleting 163 editing contents 163 moving 164 naming 162 recording 161 removing fixtures 163 using 162 Guard button 94 98 254 272 H halt 216 action of halt when halted 249 Halt Back key 242 hard command see hard value Flying Pig Systems hard valu
345. plete cuelists Flying Pig Systems Section 19 Working with Cues Reference e List 1 Unblock Enter Or on a master e Unblock Choose Tip Unblocking obeys the linked parameter preferences assigned in Setup gt Preferences Programming For example if position parameters are not separated and Pan is blocking but Tilt is not Pan will not be unblocked For more on linked functions see Separating Parameters p 160 Important Unblocking will remove parameter values from blocking cues so any future changes to subsequent cues will be tracked through the whole cuelist Flying Pig Systems 203 Section 20 Working with Cue Timing and Ordering You can control three aspects of cue timing and ordering The speed and manner in which the transition of parameter values happens when the cue is played back See Working with Fade Timings p 206 How the cue is triggered See Working with Cue Triggers p 216 The order in which cues in the cuelist are played back See Working with Loops and Links p 218 The different types of timing values are Fade time The time that it takes fixture parameters to change from their initial value to their value in the cue that is being played back You can assign a single fade time for the cue or have separate fade in and fade out times The fade in time is the fade time for parameters belonging to fixtures that are increasing in intensity while the fade out time is the fade time for paramet
346. plies A fixture can be in cues on two masters and the highest level of the two will be the one seen HTP is only relevant to intensity parameters where the idea of highest has meaning See Also LTP When you want to connect more than two Wholehog IIT compon ents or computers together then you need a special piece of equipment to allow them to interconnect called an Ethernet Hub or Ethernet Switch Note that when connecting a Wholehog III component to a hub or switch you should use a normal Ethernet cable and not a cross over cable like the one supplied See Also Ethernet The colour pigment element of colour notation See Also saturation intensity The I Wheel on the right hand side of the console is used to control fixture intensity The time of the fade up of the incoming cue during a crossfade All fixtures that are increasing in intensity will come up over this time See Also split fade path fade time A master that sets a maximum level on a group of fixtures If the master is at 80 then the fixtures will never come above 80 in the console s output See fixture See fixture Fixture brightness expressed as a percentage Also part of the HSB method of defining colour See Also hue saturation On an Ethernet network each Wholehog III component has an address called an IP address used to identify it You can usually use the default addresses but if you are connecting to an existing network you may
347. pports multiple DMX Processors de pendent upon the number of universes supported by your ESP Vision dongle Contact ESP Vision for upgrade information 30 2 1 Configuring ESP Vision When ESP Vision is launched select Hog3 dill as the DMX provider ESP Vision Scene File Deme ESC Resolution 640480x32 60 Hz dil eb DMX Provider EFERT If the Hog3 dll is not available in the drop down box for the DMX Provider field please contact ESP Vision support to upgrade your ESP Vision software 30 2 2 Configuring the Network Connection As the ESP Vision file opens the Wholehog ITI DP window will be opened on the bottom right of your visualiser computer screen 312 Flying Pig Systems Section 30 Visualiser Connectivity Appendices 30 2 3 x Status Status Locating Wholehag Ill Network aw Session Close Info Scanning port 6600 Configuration 5 Pont 6600 UserNumber i vito A Wholehog IIT logo will also be placed in the Windows task bar when this application is running MATY 3 13PM If you close the dialog box the Wholehog ITI DP will continue to run and double clicking on the task bar icon will re open the dialog box When a Wholehog III server is detected on the network the Status field will change to Connecting Idle and finally Running Status Status Status Status Connecting Status Idle Status Running Session No server Session 172 31 0 1 6600 Sessio
348. ps for the other DMX entries for each gobo in the protocol Define each DMX entry for Spins 332 Flying Pig Systems Section 31 The Fixture Builder Appendices Yellow Variable 255 0 O 100 Gobo Slots 0 open 0 Gobo Spin 100 200 100 100rpm UNUSED UNUSED ICICI 1 Select the function cell for a blank DMX Entry of channel 9 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories 2 Select Beam on the left column to display a list of Beam function sub categories 3 Select Gobo as the desired function The window will close and you will see Gobo assigned as the function and feature for channel 9 Note the feature column will auto fill with slots Select this cell and press Set Choose Spin from the dialog box 4 Select the DMX value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the DMX range values for the gobo spin according to the DMX protocol 100 gt 200 and press Enter 5 Select the Real World value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the Real World value to be displayed in RPM 100 gt 100rpm and press Enter 6 Repeat the above steps for the random spin portion of the protocol using another DMX entry for channel 9 Strobe Control Channel Gobo Slots 55 radial 0 10 Lamp Control Strike 225 10 Fixture Control Shutdown 235 10 Fixture Control Global Reset 205 f 10 Strobe Random 200128 O 30Hz 10 Strobe Rate 1 gt 127 O 30Hz 10 Strobe Shutter 0 closed 10 Lamp Control Douse 2
349. ptions You can configure various options that determine the cuelist s priority timing and other properties that affect how it is played back in the Playback Options window of each cuelist 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window of the chosen master 2 Options gt Cuelist open the Cuelist pane of the Cuelist Options window Tip You can quickly open the Playback Options window of a cuelist attached to a master by holding the Pig key and pressing the master s Choose key W Master Cuelist Playback Options iol x Cuelist Priority Properties Playback Priority 4 0 Use HTP Pile add Effects ra _ Persist On Override _ Release On Other Go vA IsA Chase vA _ Reset On Release Timing vA e Track Through Loops vA 2 Cue Only Release Time 2s A a Default Action at end of list uto release atend Y Assert Time 2s Defaut Action of Go when looping Exit loop immediately 97 Back Time 2s Defaut Action of Halt when halted Back v Cuelist Rate 100 1 0 Settings Timecode Source 1 Console v vA Enable Timecode h A Trigger forwards only Q Ignore MSC in O Supress MSC out Reset to Defaults Figure 24 3 The Cuelist Pane of the Playback Options Window 247 Reference 248 Section 24 Cuelist Playback You can configure the default settings for new cuelists in the Pl
350. py or move a scene to an ex isting destination you can pre select Insert Merge or Replace from the Re cord Options Toolbar This appears after you press the Record Copy or Move keys Flying Pig Systems Section 23 Working with Effects You can use effects to create a repeating change or movement in the value of fixture parameters Effects are recorded as part of cues scenes and palettes Effects are applied to parameters using effect tables that apply mathematical functions such as sine or tangent to values against time Each parameter that has an effect applied to it has five effects attributes table size rate offset and length see Types of Effect p 229 In addition the effect table has its own timing parameters for fade delay and path There are three ways of applying effects e Predefined Effect Palettes A range of pre programmed effects can be found in the Effect Directory that can be edited or applied quickly e The Effects Engine You can assign and edit the effects values for your current fixture selection in the Effects Engine The Effects Engine is often more convenient for assigning and editing effects as it allows you to see all the effects attributes without having to switch the editor s display to display the different effects attributes e Applying Effects in Editors You can assign and edit effects values for specific fixture parameters in editors such as the Programmer just as you do with other pa
351. r position preset profile Programmer rate Rate Wheel remainder dim rig zone saturation scene selection order Glossary See Also master The process of recording cues for playing back latter See Also Programmer A number with a decimal point Cues are initially given whole numbers but a point number in order can be used to insert a cue cue 2 5 between 2 and 3 for example Such a cue is known as a point cue On a computer network the port number defines a particular type of network traffic In the case of a Wholehog ITI network each show running on the network has its own port number so that a console can identify and connect to a particular show The position of the light beam of a fixture within space or on the surface it hits With most fixtures the position is determined by the pan and tilt parameters See Also 10 Base T See palette See conversion curve A window where cue and scene data is created or edited The Programmer takes priority over all commands sent to a fixture elsewhere in the console See fade time The centre sprung wheel on the left hand side of the console used for adjusting fade rates Used after selecting a fixture or group of fixtures setting all remain ing fixtures to a zero intensity level A zone defined as part of the rig such as front of house or all overhead wash lights See Also zones The amount of pigment in colour notation See Also hue intens
352. r Cues See Working with Cues p 191 For Cue timings See Working with Cue Timing and Ordering p 205 For Cuelists See Working with Cuelists p 221 For Effects See Working with Effects p 229 52 Flying Pig Systems Section 10 Playback 10 1 Playing Back Cues When you recorded your cues the console automatically created a new cuelist on the chosen master so you can now run your cues directly from that master The playback controls for each master are shown in Figure 10 1 Playback Controls lt Choose key lt Go key lt Halt Back key lt Fader lt Flash key Figure 10 1 Playback Controls The playback controls work as follows e Go if the master is inactive pressing this key will output the current cue in its cuelist to the stage If already active then pressing Go advances to the next cue in the cuelist unless there is a paused crossfade in which case the crossfade will be restarted see Halt Back below e Halt Back pauses any running crossfades If there are no running crossfades then it will start a fade back to the previous cue e Fader controls the intensity of fixtures under the control of this master e Flash momentarily puts the intensity of fixtures under the control of this master to the full programmed value as if the fader had been put to maximum You can also control the running of the cuelist using the main controls located to the righ
353. r Auto Backup Status Inactive whe Apply A OK X Cancel Figure 13 20 The Auto Backup pane of the Show Manager window Copying Files to a CD ROM To copy shows onto a recordable CD as an archive or for transfer to another console 1 Setup Shows gt CD Burning see Figure 13 21 The CD Burning pane of the Show Manager window 2 Select a file to be copied in the left hand list and click the Add to CD button to move it to the right hand list You may be asked to back up the show before adding it to the list click OK to agree to this Repeat for all the files you want to copy to the CD 4 Insert a recordable CD into the CD ROM drive located under the console s front wrist rest 5 Press the Burn button and then the Start Burn button in the CD Burning window The window will show the progress of the writing operation Tip S You can use drag and drop to move files to the CD Master list Note that files will always be copied not moved Saving and Loading Your Preferences Your settings within the User Preferences window are stored as part of the show file This means that the settings are applied whenever the show file is launched even if it on another console You can save your preference settings as a separate file so that you can later load them into any show that you work on To save your preferences Flying Pig Systems Section 13 Using the Console Reference zmizi EE 00 urio
354. r Preferences Window 0 97 RAIA Pp CA EA OT a stated a ads ihc tans O eaa C Ee T 98 13 13 The Command LINE oo EEE 100 IS 14 The Status BOn eera a A E OA E EEA 102 Flying Pig Systems xv xvi Wholehog III 13 15 The Start WING OW iia 8 ahstins dste tents intourdtantestie tea tplobbatdalay aumdeaia yaakidiearnamaaantiaied 103 13 16 The Auto Launch pane of the Control Panel cccceceeece ee ee ee ee eens 105 13 17 The Auto Launch WINKOW cc ccccccccce cece cece cree cece eect ee eeneneeneneatasananas 105 13 15 The Shut DOwn DIGG a ra a eaa aA eA E A E AAE NIE 106 13 19 The Show Manager WINdOW asccccccceiiiii oi o Ea 107 13 20 The Auto Backup pane of the Show Manager window saccra 110 13 21 The CD Burning pane of the Show Manager Window cece 111 13 22 The Source Location page of the Merge Show window ccee 112 13 23 The Type Merge page of the Merge Show WiINdOw ceceeceeee eens 113 13 24 The Fixture Merge page of the Merge Show Window cceeeeeees 114 13 25 The Group Merge page of the Merge Show Window ccceeeeeees 115 14 1 The Fixture WIN OW iedreen arire ace aaa aids ATR A AEE 117 14 2 The Fixture Schedule WINKOW sssssssrrsrsrrsnrsnrnrrerrnrrtrsrrrrnrrnrrrrrrrrere 118 14 3 A Studio Color 575 in the Fixture window before and after replicat IG NEE EEE EN Godage T EEA EAE putea E E Gein saved cata E a Sane 119 144Ch ngsd Fixt re Type a oea a eE EEE N EE TEA 120 14 5 The Au
355. r double speed For more on Tap Sync see Adjusting Chase Rate with Tap Sync p 264 Flying Pig Systems Section 24 Cuelist Playback Reference e Direction four directions are available Up stepping up through cue numbers Down stepping down through cue numbers Random step ping randomly through cue numbers and Bounce stepping up then down through cue numbers Back Time 2 vi Default Chase Rate 120bpm Loo Crossfade 100 Step length 1 beat Direction Up Vv You can also configure the following loop types in the Cuelist pane of the Playpack Options window Loop Behaviour Loop Type Continuous wv Stop after 1 count j OQ Release On Stop e Continuous the chase steps indefinitely until paused or released Stop On Last the chase stops at the last cue in the cuelist until released or triggered again with a Go e Release On Last the cuelist chase is released when it reaches the final step e Stop On First the chase completes one cycle and stops on the first cue until triggered again If any loop type other than continuous is chosen then you can assign the number of cycles the chase completes before the loop behaviour is actioned Selecting Release on Stop releases the chase cuelist either when it stops because of an actioned loop behaviour or because of a manual stop using the Halt key Tip The Playback Options of a master can be quickly accessed by holding Pig and pressing the master s Choose
356. r recording it by pressing the Set key The Quickname window will open and you can enter the name and select OK 16 2 Using Groups in Programming You use groups in the same way that you would use fixture selections for example e Group 1 Enter selects all the fixtures in Group 1 e Group 1 50 Enter selects all the fixtures in Group 1 and sets their intensity to 50 e Group 1 Fixture 3 50 Enter you can mix fixture and group selec tions One particularly useful syntax to use with groups is the key e Group 1 Group 3 selects only fixtures that are in both groups 162 Flying Pig Systems Section 16 Working with Groups Reference 16 3 16 3 1 Editing Group Contents To edit a group s contents select the group within the Programmer or editor make changes to the selection and re record the group The Wholehog IIT will ask you to choose from Insert Merge and Replace p 164 Select Replace to update the group with the new selection Removing Fixtures from Groups You can remove the fixtures that are currently selected in the Programmer or editor from a previously recorded group If you have a fixture selected in the Programmer editor that is not in the group that fixture is ignored For example if you have a group containing fixtures 1 5 and you want to remove Fixture 2 1 Fixture 2 Enter select the fixture you want to remove 2 Record Remove the Remove button is on the Record Options Tool
357. r that you want to move the cuelist from 2 Move 3 Press the Choose key of the master that you want to move the cuelist to To copy and so duplicate a cuelist 1 Press the Choose key of the master that you want to copy the cuelist from Flying Pig Systems 241 Reference 24 1 2 242 Section 24 Cuelist Playback 2 Copy 3 Press the Choose key of the master that you want to copy the cuelist to Detaching a Cuelist from a Master To detach a cuelist from a master e Delete Choose detaches the cuelist from the chosen master Note that this will not delete the cuelist itself or remove it from the cuelist directory only detach it from the master Controlling Cuelist Playback Once assigned to masters cuelists can be played back using the master s contols or using the main controls Master Controls Each of the ten masters has a Choose Go Halt Back and Flash key as well as a fader see Figure 24 1 The Master Controls Choose key lt Go key lt Halt Back key lt Fader lt Flash key Figure 24 1 The Master Controls By default the controls work as follows e Choose allows the master to be selected If the blue LED is illuminated then it is the chosen master and you can use the main playback controls to control this master Flying Pig Systems Section 24 Cuelist Playback Reference e Go if the cuelist is inactive pressing Go will activate i
358. r to have the console create a timecode source Controls for the timecode will appear In the Cuelist window select Learn Timing Start the timecode and press the Go key when the timecode reaches the time that you want each cue to go A timecode frame value will appear in the Wait cell for each cue When you have finished deselect Learn Timing Now when you run the timecode the cues will be triggered when the timecode reaches each cue s assigned frame For more information on timecode see Working with Audio MIDI and Timecode p 291 To use Learn Timing without timecode 1 2 3 4 Flying Pig Systems Open Choose open the Cuelist window of the required cuelist Ensure that Enable Timecode is not selected Select Learn Timing Press the Go key to run the first cue and again to run subsequent cues after the required time interval A time value equivalent to the duration between Go presses will appear in the Wait cell for each cue 217 Reference Section 20 Working with Cue Timing and Ordering 5 When you have finished deselect Learn Timing Now when you run the first cue the subsequent cues will be triggered at the same in tervals as when you ran them manually Tip Learn Timing will only set a trigger on a cue that is currently set to Halt that is it has an empty Wait cell To remove existing wait times from cues select the wait cell s and press Set Select Halt from the toolbar 20 4 Working with L
359. rameter values 23 1 Types of Effect 23 1 1 Effect Tables You can select the effect type by choosing an effect table that applies a mathematical function such as sine or tangent to the parameter values The available tables and how the parameter value varies over time are shown in Figure 23 1 Effect Tables Note that the effects table varies the value of the parameter either side of its base level represented by the dotted line in the diagrams The three types of random table are weighted differently biasing the random parameter values towards the low high or middle part of the possible range Using Effect Tables Listed below are examples of combinations of effects tables in use e Circular Motion A Sine table is applied to pan and tilt with tilt given an Offset of 90 degrees Flying Pig Systems 229 Reference 23 1 2 230 Section 23 Working with Effects Sine Step HH Inverse Ramp NX Spiral Ms Random 3 Wry Centre weighted Tangent Mark On Mark Off Random 2 High weighted Random 1 Low weighted Sawtooth ay Ramp CL 3 EN Figure 23 1 Effect Tables e Square Motion A Sawtooth table is applied to pan and tilt with tilt given an Offset of 90 degrees e Can Can Motion A Step table is applied to pan a Sine table is applied to tilt e Fly In Motion A Step table is applied to pan a Ramp table is applied to tilt e Blue Step Colour Effect A Mark On table is appli
360. rate text boxes 2 Set new label text Enter type in the label you want 3 Alternatively click or press on the arrow at the right hand end of the text box to get a list of useful labels Click on the one you want You can use special tags to have the console insert text into the name for you according to the directory name and the location in the directory e amp d the directory name e amp D the directory name dynamic e amp n the directory number e amp N the directory number dynamic 96 Flying Pig Systems Section 13 Using the Console Reference iix Default Naming y 1 Sensitivity Create label Copy label ain Key Timings Grou t0 N v Copy of amp o Track Ball Intensi feo amp N v Copy of amp o Ect Postion t0 aN v Copy of amp o Programming Colour 20 amp N Vv Copy of amp o Default Timing Beam 20 amp N vw Copy of amp o Default Naming Effect t amp N v Copy of amp o Wheelset Editor Playback Defaults List fo amp N v Copy of amp o ay Cues Cue fto amp N v Copy of amp o illu Scene Scene t0 amp N v Copy of amp o Misc Page amp D amp N 7 Copy of amp o mian meen Import Export sf to 4 ok X Cancel Figure 13 11 The Default Naming pane of the User Preferences window ii e amp o the original text This is used when a directory item is copied the original text is the name of the item that has been copied Lowercas
361. rder for your show You can then go through the performance using Next Page rather than selecting from the directory 26 5 Deleting Pages To delete a page 1 Page 1 Delete 2 Click OK to confirm the delete You can delete a range of pages 1 Page 1 Thru 4 Delete 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Note that you cannot delete the current page Deleting a page does not delete cuelists or scenes from the show Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirmation by going to Setup Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items Flying Pig Systems 283 Reference Section 26 Working with Pages 26 6 284 The Template Page The template page specifies which cuelists will appear on specific masters for every page without physically having to load them onto the same masters on all pages For example you could have a primary cuelist containing the commonly used cues of the show which you want available on the same master regardless of which page you are on When you move this cuelist to a master on the Template page it will then appear on the same master of all pages If a normal page and a template page have a cuelist on the same master the normal page s cuelist will override the template page s cuelist To make a page into the template page 1 Open Page opens the Page Directo
362. re the wrapping in the Action at End of List menu e Wrap to beginning of list Pressing Go after the final cue is reached sends the cuelist to its first cue e Add release end cue Pressing Go after the final cue is reached releases the list and sends it to its first cue e Auto release at end The cuelist is released as soon as the last cue in the cuelist has completed all its fade and delay times Flying Pig Systems Section 24 Cuelist Playback Reference Don t allow wrapping The cuelist stays on the final cue until released or sent backwards Action of go when Looping When the cuelist is performing a continuous loop with the use of a link cue you can configure the effect of pressing the Go key using the Action of Go When Looping menu Action Notes Exit loop immediately Jumps the cuelist to the link cue at the end of the loop Use a wait time on the cue after the link if you want to go to that cue automatically when exiting the loop Exit loop at end Allows the loop to proceed to the last cue before jumping to the link cue at the end of the loop Use a wait time on the cue after the link if you want to go to that cue automatically when exiting the loop Restart Jumps immediately to the first cue in the loop Stop at next Stops at the next cue in the loop Ignore Ignores any press of the Go key whilst in a loop and the press is during an actively running wait time For more information on loops see W
363. re of that type Pressing the Sort by Function button in the top left of the window changes the view so that the main list groups each parameter together for all the fixtures of the type selected in the list This is often the easiest way to work in the window as you can easily click or press and then drag to select a range of cells to edit For example you could assign in one action the default value for the pan parameter of all the Studio Color 575 fixtures in the show see Figure 14 13 The Edit Fixtures window sorted by Function Assigning Minimums and Maximums for Parameters When fixtures are placed close to obstacles such as trussing or set pieces it may be important to limit movement to prevent accidental damage especially when the fixture is out of view of the operator However other functions can also be limited for example to implement a house or event policy on the use of strobe lighting Note that limits can only be assigned for continuous parameters not slotted ones To assign limits Flying Pig Systems 133 Reference 134 Desk Channel Studio Color 575 Studio Spot 575 Technobeam Iris Figure 14 13 The Edit Fixtures window sorted by Function Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures Em Colour Fixture Global Macro Beam Em Allies Control Intensity Mode Control Time Size J Mace e Shape Frost Strobe More Number Releasal Feature De Default Min
364. re s orientation in the rig you may want to invert or swap its pan and tilt axes For example inverting the pan can ensure that when moving the Trackball left a fixture rigged facing the operator moves to the operator s left not the fixture s left Similarly if units are rigged facing across the stage rather than facing up or down stage then swapping the axes keeps the Trackball movement and the fixture movement the same This also ensures that fixtures selected in groups all move in the same direction as the Trackball is moved Flying Pig Systems 131 Reference 132 Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures Fixtures that are rigged in other positions for example on the stage floor as opposed to hanging then combinations of swap and invert either pan tilt or both may be required To invert axes 1 Open Fixture 2 Scroll to the desired fixture and select either its Pan Invert or Tilt Invert cell 3 Press Set and choose Yes to invert the axis To swap axes 1 Open Fixture 2 Scroll to the desired fixture and select its SwoAxes cell 3 Press Set and choose Swap to swap axes Proportional Patch You can use proportional patching to change the intensity value output by the console to a fixture relative to the intensity value that has been programmed All intensity values for the fixture are reduced in proportion so that with a proportional patch of 80 a programmed intensity of 100 would be output as
365. reenter teeeeenes 141 15 2 he SElESTION Qrde ease s E E NA 141 15 2 1 Reverse Shuffle ANd REOrder crrr 141 15 3 Modifying Parameters creer 142 15 33 INTONSIY neraino eia ads i peed eae 143 TSIZ POSITION ene aa eta cee taaain A A A hale teem tend tes 144 15 3 3 Continuous Parameters Colour and Beam 4 145 15 3 4 Slotted Parameters Colour and Beam 146 Flying Pig Systems Wholehog II 15 3 5 Working with COlOUl eens 147 15 3 6 FING Control airia ieina aa ai 151 15 3 7 TOUCHING PArAMEHETS 00 eect a 151 15 3 8 Copying Parameter Settings cccccccrcrcccrcca 153 19 4 FORMING aiei taae he a onea aap ed inde A a Oi 154 15 4 1 Using the Fan Key sccccccccccrcccccerrcrcrrerncnn eens 155 15 4 2 In the Programmer WINqOW n cccccccccrccrcrec 155 15 4 3 With the Command Line 0 cette teenie eed 156 15 4 4 FANNING OPTIONS nee 156 15 4 5 Multipart FANNING renters 157 15 4 6 Fanning with Grouping S c cece ene eee een ens 157 18 5 REMOVING VOUS r a se cep aude chia wa de aes 159 15 5 1 Removing Entire Fixtures from an Editor saec 159 15 5 2 Removing Specific Parameter Types from an Edit OTa T A pails dove tl E Cas ARE A 159 15 5 3 Removing Individual Parameters from an Edit OM ara shat e eer E N N Gatien aE 159 15 6 Separating POrAMeters eee 160 16 Working with Group ccceeeeeeeee eee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneees 161 16 1 Recording C GSlOUP tetissieuriate oer aaraa ATR G
366. ress 5 Similarly you can patch a fixture multiple times so as to fill a specified range of DMX addresses This can be useful if you want to soft patch a desk channel to a continuous series of dimmer DMX addresses e Fixture Desk Channel 1 1 Thru 10 Enter patches the desk channel to each address between 1 and 10 Tip S You don t have to patch fixtures before you start programming Once the fixtures have been added they can be programmed However without a patch you will not be able to output DMX Flying Pig Systems Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures Reference 14 2 3 Finding Unused DMX Addresses 01x Fixture pel Replicate Change Edit Fixture Auto View T j is Schedule fetch Ape baich Romoxze Fixtures Type Fixtures Builder Palettes By DP l Universe 4 Studio Color 575 1 Next Te 4 Studio Color 575 2 33 Studio Color 575 3 49 Studio Color 575 4 65 Studio Color 575 5 Empty 119 free Beginning at channel 81 200 Studio Spot 575 1 224 Studio Spot 575 2 248 Studio Spot 575 3 4 5 272 Studio Spot 575 1296 Studio Spot 575 Next Channel 320 Figure 14 7 The View by DP view of the Fixture window You can see an overview of all patched fixtures in the Fixture window by using View by DP see Figure 14 7 The View by DP view of the Fixture window This shows a spreadsheet with start address
367. rima di assemblare montare e azionare l apparecchiatura Informacion Importante De Seguridad En el Informacion Importante De Seguridad p 361 se encuentran instrucciones sobre protecci n continua contra incendios descarga el ctrica y lesiones personales Lea por favor todas las instrucciones antes del ensamblaje montaje y operaci n de este equipo BEGRSIAT Olam Hi LEEKS BB RU ADREDSORBICES DHERA RAIS SIR p 363 SSRLTRS bs TORET ALT RE RESET MILES COREA TEEL Warranty Information Limited Warranty Unless otherwise stated your product is covered by a one year parts and labour limited warranty It is the owner s responsibility to furnish receipts or invoices for verification of purchase date and dealer or distributor If purchase date cannot be provided date of manufacture will be used to determine warranty period Returning an Item Under Warranty for Repair It is necessary to obtain a Return Material Authorization RMA number from your dealer or point of purchase BEFORE any units are returned for repair The manu facturer will make the final determination as to whether or not the unit is covered by warranty Any Product unit or parts returned to High End Systems must be packaged in a suitable manner to ensure the protection of such Product unit or parts and such package shall be clearly and prominently marked to indicate that the package contains returned Product units or parts and with an RMA number Accompany all return
368. rinters Pane of the Control Panel Flying Pig Systems 71 Reference Section 12 Setting Up the System To assign a printer as the default printer so that it is automatically selected when printing select it in the list of printers and click on Set Default To choose default settings paper size paper source and so on for a printer select it in the list and click on Configure to open the Printer Properties window The available options will depend on the printer model see the printer s documentation for more details Once you have set the options click OK Modifying a Printer You can modify a printer from the Control Panel 1 Setup Control Pnl Printers open the Printers pane see Figure 12 5 The Printers Pane of the Control Panel 2 Select the printer you want to modify from the list 3 Click on Modify You will be guided through options which are the same as for Adding a Printer p 71 except that you cannot change the printer s name Removing a Printer To remove a printer from the console 1 Setup Control Pnl Printers open the Printers pane see Figure 12 5 The Printers Pane of the Control Panel 2 Select the printer you want to remove from the list 3 Click on Delete Important You cannot undo removing a printer 12 2 72 Setting Up the Network The Wholehog III uses 100 Base T Ethernet to connect the various components of a system together The simplest
369. rk as part of a network linked to other devices that serve a variety of functions including generating DMX for connection to dimmers and fixtures At its simplest the network is a Wholehog III console connected to a DMX Processor which produces DMX A more complex network might consist of several Wholehog III consoles personal computers running Hog 3PC DMX Processors and MIDI Timecode Processors For more information on networks see Setting Up the Network p 72 Multiple Consoles on the Same Show With networking it is possible to have several programmers each with a Wholehog III console working on the same show file Since both programmers are working on the same show it is a simple matter for a single operator to take over the running of the show once programming is complete For more information on using multiple consoles see More than One Console on the Network p 74 Multiple Shows on the Network Similarly networking allows several shows to be run on the same network A theme park for example might have several rides stages and other lighting areas which need to be run as separate shows Each show could have an operator with a console while a master operator controls all shows perhaps in order to make changes to the program ming For more information on using multiple shows on one network see More than One Show on the Network p 75 3 2 The Front Panel The front panel of the Wholehog III looks relative
370. rlying value in the cue or scene as the cue or scene is played back You can assign separate effects timings fade delay and path to control how the effects movement changes as the cue or scene is played back Figure 23 5 Controlling Effect Transitions with Timing shows how different timing values control how a parameter with a step effect changes during playback of a cue Flying Pig Systems Section 23 Working with Effects Reference 100 Fade time 5 seconds Intensity Underlying value 50 50 No effect Os 5s 10s Time 100 f Fade time 5 seconds Intensity Effect fade time 5 seconds 50 Underlying value 50 100 Fade time O seconds Effect fade time 5 seconds Underlying value 50 Intensity 50 100 Fade time 5 seconds Effect fade time 5 seconds Effect delay time 5 seconds Underlying value 50 Intensity 50 Os 5s 10s Time Figure 23 5 Controlling Effect Transitions with Timing You can assign effect fade times using the command line 1 Fixture 1 select the fixtures you want to assign an effect time to making sure that they have been given parameter values 2 Effect Time 4 Enter assigns the effect fade time to 4 seconds To assign a effect delay time 1 Fixture 1 select the desired fixture s 2 Effect Time Time 2 Enter pressing Time twice assigns the delay time Flying Pig Systems 237 Reference Section 23 Working with Effects You can also view and ass
371. rmally updating the console software will also update the software of connected network processors If necessary you can update the software manually 1 2 3 Setup Network open the Network window Press the Software Update button A window will open and display a list of DMX Processors whose soft ware does not match the console Click on the check boxes of DMX Processors that you want to update and press Reload The console will update the software Wait a couple of minutes until all DMX Processors are shown as found in the Network window Sometimes if the console and network processor are running different software versions the console may not recognise the network processor on the network To overcome this you can force the network processor to update its software from the console 1 344 Turn off the mains power to the network processor Check that it is connected to the console on the network Turn the network processor back on while holding down the lt key on the network processor s front panel The network processor will download its software from the console Flying Pig Systems Section 34 Upgrading and Care of the Console Appendices 34 2 Care of Touch Screens The touch panels and liquid crystal displays LCDs require some care in use to ensure their longevity Do not allow sharp objects to come into contact with the screen Objects such as the eraser end of a pencil can provide an alternat
372. rogram Files Wholehog III Connectivity directory You can browse to a different directory to select another location for the application Click on Next to continue the installation Wholehog II Connectivity j loj x Select Installation Folder w The installer will install Whalehog IlI Connectivity to the following folder To install in this folder click Next To install to a different folder enter it below or click Browse Eolder C Program Files Wholehog Ill Connectivity Browse Disk Cost 5 Confirm the installation after confirming drive space the installation will be ready to begin Press Next to begin the installation 310 Flying Pig Systems Section 30 Visualiser Connectivity Appendices Wholehog III Connectivity Confirm Installation 6 Installation during the installation a progress bar will be shown ts Wholehog III Connectivity Installing Wholehag Ill Connectivity 7 Completing the installation when the installation is complete press Close to exit the installer Flying Pig Systems 311 Appendices Section 30 Visualiser Connectivity Wholehog II Connectivity Installation Complete Wholehog Ill Connectivity has been successfully installed Click Close to exit Please use Windows Update ta check for any critical updates ta the INET Framework 30 2 Connecting to ESP Vision The Wholehog III Connectivity for ESP Vision su
373. rogrammer window by selecting Programmer from the Main Toolbar The console allows you to have several editors open at once for example to edit a cue that you recorded previously while also working in the Programmer To ensure that your commands go to the correct editor select Edit in the top of the editor window you want to work in 51x Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table Nshat Show Fade O Technobeam Studio Studio Desk Eat palsies Changes compect d Itis Spot 575 Color 575 j Num Note Intensity _ Strobe _ Position Colour Mixing Colour 2 Type E Tre Lee Mecano EE A ee A Tee Technobeam Iris rn Z 100 22 100 Studio Spot 575 100 aqua OHZ off open C 100 aqua OHz off open C 100 LLL 287 31 lopen LLEMLLL ENE L 2 2 100 i w 89 20 open Desk Channel aoe Saree 31 100 32 100 Figure 8 1 The Programmer Window 8 1 Selecting Fixtures The process of selecting fixtures is used in creating all groups palettes cues and scenes There are several ways to select fixtures the main ones are described here Selecting Individual Fixtures You can select a fixture using a command line e Fixture Studio Color 575 1 Enter Flying Pig Systems 41 Tutorial 8 1 2 42 Section 8 Programming Fixtures The Command Line Toolbar is shown in Figure 8 2 The Command Line Studio Color 575 1 Page 1 Programmer Master 4 Erg 16 52 Figure 8 2 The Command Line
374. rogramming to keep colour and intensity completely separate The different colour systems together with different lamp types used make it difficult to match colours between fixtures of different types Furthermore during crossfades colours tend not to remain matched through the duration of the cue producing uneven colour fades The Wholehog III solves these problems by introducing a third colour system Hue and Saturation HS Under the HS system a fixture s colour is determined by two parameters Flying Pig Systems 147 Reference 148 Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters e Hue the colour s position in the possible range of colours from red going through yellow green cyan blue and magenta and finally return ing to red As the range wraps around you can visualise it as a circle with the colours positioned around the edge with red at the top green at the lower right blue at the lower left and the intermediate colours in between The angle between 0 and 360 degrees specifies the hue of the colour red has a hue of 0 degrees yellow has a hue of 60 degrees and cyan has a hue of 180 degrees See Figure 15 7 The Colour Wheel e Saturation how strong or pale the colour is Pale colours have low saturations while strong colours have high saturations Saturation is specified as a percentage between 0 white and 100 the strongest possible saturation Red Magenta Yellow
375. rom 282 removing inhibitive masters from 282 removing scenes from 282 template 284 which is the current page 102 Palette Directory 94 palettes 6 94 167 automatic naming 96 copying 171 creating automatically 120 default names 96 deleting 171 direct 177 editing contents 169 effect 238 effects 13 global 172 moving 171 naming 168 recording 168 recording with masking 174 recording with timings 176 reference 176 showing references to in editors 98 types of content 172 using in programming 169 pan see position parameter 5 14 timing 10 parameter defaults 244 267 parameter types 142 removing from an editor 159 parameter wheel sensitivity 68 parameter wheels 144 145 parameters default value 134 making non releasable 135 minimum and maximum values 133 modifying values 142 naming slot values 135 386 Index offset value 134 removing value from an editor 159 separating 160 timing 210 Parked Output window 187 parking 187 paste 94 patch proportional 132 patch points multiple 125 patching 122 adding DMX Processors 122 cloning 127 finding unused addresses 125 fixtures to multiple addresses 124 multiple patch points 125 several fixtures at once 123 unpatching 128 Path button 98 paths 205 208 Per Fixture button when recording palettes 172 Per Fixture Type button when recording palettes 172 Persist on Override 253 271 Pig key 84 152 for copy and paste
376. rough Loops By default the Wholehog III s Maintain State p 8 feature ensures that when you use links to change the order of cue playback the cues appear on stage as if they had been played back in the order they appear in the cuelist Sometimes however you might want to track through links rather than maintain state For example you are creating a loop where the first time through you want the four fixtures to come on one at a time and throughout the loop you want them to alternate colour between red and blue To do this you might plot Cue Fixture 1 Fixture 2 Fixture 3 Fixture 4 Int Colour Int Colour Int Colour Int Colour 1 50 Red Blue Red Blue 2 4 Blue 50 Red Blue Red 3 L Red L Blue 50 Red Blue 4 L Blue Red L Blue 50 Red 5 Link to Cue 1 The idea is that the intensity of the next fixture is brought to 50 in each cue and that these values then track through for the duration of the loop shown by the arrows However because of the Maintain State function when the cuelist loops back to cue 1 the Wholehog III will make cue 1 look as it would have if you had run the cuelist in order The result is that fixtures 2 to 4 will go out just as they were the first time round the loop To stop this happening you need to enable Track Through Loops in the Cuelist Options window 1 Open List 1 open the cuelist window 2 Press Options and select the Track Through Loops tickbox Note that Track Through Loops
377. rrent time settings for the changed parameters For example if you have intensity values in the Programmer with a fade time of ten seconds and you select all of the fixtures and press 0 Enter all of the lights would fade to 0 over 10 seconds This is useful for making changes on the fly during a performance Parameters that don t have timing values in the Programmer will fade in the default time which you can assign in the Default Timing pane of the User Preferences window e Setup Preferences Default Timing Press the Fade Changes button again to revert to having parameter values appear in the output instantly To view and assign time values for parameters see Individual Parameter Timings p 210 Blind Blind mode allows you to continue programming and editing cues groups palettes and scenes without changing the onstage parameter values of fixtures The Blind key is located above the Trackball when in blind mode the Blind key will illuminate Note that when you turn off blind mode all parameter values that you have changed in the Programmer or editor will instantly appear on stage To exit blind mode gracefully hold down the Pig key while pressing Blind parameters will fade to their new values in the assigned or default fade time Alternatively select Fade Changes in the editor you are using prior to turning blind on or off Tip Z Using Pig Blind on the Wholehog Ill is equivalent to using the Try Cue key on the Wh
378. ry If you want to see all fixture types rather than just the ones that have changed press Show Same Revision Select the fixture types to merge by clicking on their check boxes or by using the Select All Select All Newer or Select All Missing buttons The Deselect All button allows you to clear the current selection and start again If you are merging a library press Merge to start the merge Otherwise press Next to continue to merging the show data 13 9 2 Merging Fixtures After choosing to merge fixture types you can merge the fixtures used in the two shows see Figure 13 24 The Fixture Merge page of the Merge Show window If you choose not to merge fixtures you will not be able to merge any programming Flying Pig Systems 113 Reference 13 9 3 114 Section 13 Using the Console Merge Show M Fixture Merge E Merge Fixtures i Import Fixtures Append vA Replace lt He tax X Cancel Figure 13 24 The Fixture Merge page of the Merge Show window There are two options for merging fixtures Append appending fixtures will add a copy of all of the fixtures from the source show into the current show Any programming that is merged from the source show will use the appended fixtures and all programming in the current show will continue to use the same fixtures as before Replace replacing fixtures will match fixtures from the source show wi
379. ry window 2 Right click on the page and select Set As Template Page from the menu To turn off the template page right click on the template page and select Clear Template Page from the menu There can only be one template page assigning a new template page will restore the previous one to a normal page The template page is shown by a symbol in the directory window Since the template page typically does not relate to a specific portion of your production a song for example template pages are never loaded from the Next Page key When cycling through pages with this key the template page will be skipped You can always directly load the template page using either the page directory or the command line Cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters that appear on a master of a page because they originate from the template page are shown in blue on the Playback Bar by default see Figure 26 3 The Playback Bar with Master 10 loaded from the Template Page You can turn this off in Setup Preferences Misc by deselecting Highlight Template Figure 26 3 The Playback Bar with Master 10 loaded from the Template Page If the template page is the current page the entire Playback Bar including empty masters are also shown in blue see Figure 26 4 The Playback Bar with the Template Page loaded 3 List 3 Cue 1 2s Cue 2 2s Cue 3 2s Ful Figure 26 4 The Playback Bar with the Template Page loaded Fl
380. s These controls work with the currently chosen master you can also use them with another master by holding down the required Choose key while pressing a key from the main controls See Controlling Cuelist Playback p 242 Tip You can configure the way the playback controls work for example to set the level that the Flash key brings the scene to or to disable it altogether See Configuring Playback Controls 0 287 Flying Pig Systems Section 25 Scene Playback Reference 25 1 3 Releasing a Scene on a Master You can remove a scene s look from the stage so that it relinquishes control of all fixture parameters and effectively turns the scene s output off this is known as releasing To release a scene on a master e Release releases the currently chosen master e Release Choose use the Choose key of the master with the scene you wish to release Tip You can release all playbacks at once by pressing Pig Release If you have no other cuelists scenes or groups active when you release the scene then releasing returns all fixture parameters to their default values A fixture s default para meter values will be determined by the Fixture Library when the fixture is created you can change the default values in the Edit Fixtures window see Assigning a Custom Default p 134 If you have other cuelists scenes or groups active then control of fixture parameters may be transferred to one of them on releasing th
381. s When you record a cue all of the fixture parameters in the cue are assigned the default fade delay and path values Similarly when you assign timings to a cue after recording the timing value is applied to all fixture parameters in the cue However you can assign fade delay or path values to individual parameters in the Programmer and these settings are then included when you record cues and scenes and optionally palettes You can Flying Pig Systems Section 20 Working with Cue Timing and Ordering Reference 20 2 1 also assign timings to parameters in the cue scene and palette editors Note that you can only assign timings for a parameter that has a value in the editor To display parameter fade times delay times or paths in an editor select the Fade Delay or Path buttons from the top left of the editor window You can assign the individual timings of parameters using the parameter wheels the command line or directly in editor windows You can also assign timings to all paramet ers of a fixture using the parameter wheels or the command line Important If you assign individual timings for parameters and subsequently assign an overall cue time then the individual parameter timings will be replaced by the overall cue time Assigning Parameter Timings with the Parameter Wheels To assign fade and delay timings to all the parameters of a fixture 1 Select the fixtures that you want to assign timings to making sure tha
382. s irises and variable speed strobes these can be assigned to a percentage or real world value It is sometimes useful to treat slotted parameters as continuous for example you might want to assign a gobo or colour wheel part way between two positions to achieve a particular effect The Wholehog III allows you to treat such parameters as either slotted or continuous when assigning values to them To control continuous colour and beam parameters 1 Press the appropriate parameter type key Colour or Beam The Wheels Toolbar shows the available parameters and their current value see Figure 15 3 The Wheels Toolbar for the Beam Parameters of a Studio Spot 575 2 If the selected fixture has more parameters of the selected type than there are wheels the Wheelsets Toolbar will open see Figure 15 4 The Wheelsets Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 Page through the available parameters by pressing the parameter type key again or select a button on the toolbar 3 Adjust the parameter value using the parameter wheels Gobo ee Gobo lt gt Gobo Shake Size Pardon Figure 15 3 The Wheels Toolbar for the Beam Parameters of a Studio Spot 575 Gobo Gobo 2 Gobo lt gt Gobo 2 lt gt Iris Macro Size Focus Gobo Sha Gobo 2 Sh Global Time Figure 15 4 The Wheelsets Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 Beam Time Frost Some parameters that appear on the parameter wheels have more than one mode The
383. s to date and time to take effect see Restarting and Shutting Down p 106 Printers W Control Panel Printers Displays 4 Sound pea Keyboard Wings Time and Date E Autotoaa H Network i System Info 01 x Add Modify Delete Set default Configure Update list Job ID J Printer Job Status Reason for status Delete job Pause job Lo aa Koca G Reports Figure 12 5 The Printers Pane of the Control Panel Flying Pig Systems Section 12 Setting Up the System Reference Adding a Printer You can connect a printer directly to a Wholehog III console s USB port or to the network using a hub or switch Network printers can be used by all consoles on the network If you are not sure if your printer is supported by the Wholehog III follow the steps below until Page 5 and check the list of available printer manufacturers and models Once you are sure your printer is supported connect it to the USB port or network and set it up 1 Setup Control Pnl gt Printers open the Printers pane see Figure 12 5 The Printers Pane of the Control Panel 2 Click on Add You will be guided through the setup procedure 3 Page 1 Enter a printer name location and description The name is used when you choose a printer to print with Location and description are for users information only and are optional 4 Page 2 Select the type of connectio
384. s Europe Ltd Distributor s name High End Systems Europe Ltd Distributor s address 53 Northfield Road London W13 9SY Declares that the product Product Name Wholehog III Product Number All Product Options All Conforms to the following EEC directives 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC 89 336 EEC as amended by 92 31 EEC and 93 68 EEC Equipment referred to in this declaration of conformity was first manufactured in compliance with the following standards in 2002 Safety EN60950 2000 EMC EN55103 1 1996 E2 EN55103 2 1996 E2 I the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directives and Standards Kenneth Stuart Hansen Compliance Engineer 30 May 2002 Flying Pig Systems i Table of Contents IEINTOGUCTION sire a e Oe Ala aeaa ai ndeve ie Aha evi ie 1 I Getting Stored seriosi aaa a aia a Ni 3 1 1 Where to Stort or AEEA EEEE EERE REE 3 LZK raae r E EE endl EEE E e SERS 3 2 Users New to Moving Light Consoles eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 5 2 1 Ihe User e OA a e a neh a a a A nea dea ceeded 5 2 2 Referring to FIXTULES ccce 5 2 3 PAETOS ii ieee niian A a a aa 6 2A MACK ING sick aa aA BEE aT EE dated Syke sik Ce MOSK Ecc E EAA nie and 6 2 4 1 Tracking Through Changes ou cece eet eee ne tee ee eens 7 2 4 2 SIMUIFANEOUS CUES oo erent 8 2 4 3 MOINTOIN STON i n Serta detsanendes aaa 8 2 5 Multiple Playbacks and Cuelists ss ssissrer
385. s already the chosen master 2 Cue 2 Time 7 Enter assigns a fade time of 7 seconds Different Fade in and Fade out Times You can assign different fade in and fade out times known as a split time using the key For example 1 Create the desired look for the cue in the Programmer 2 Fixture Enter select all the fixtures currently in the Programmer 3 Time 7 10 Enter select a fade in time of 7 seconds and a fade out time of 10 seconds 4 Record record the cue on the currently selected master Important The Wholehog III s definition of fade in and fade out times is different to that used by some other consoles Some consoles use fade in and fade out times for intensity parameters only and have a separate time for all other paramet ers the Wholehog Ill has fade in and fade out times for each individual parameter Also with some consoles the fade out time applies when the cue goes out so that cue 2 s fade out time takes effect during the change from cue 2 to cue 3 rather than as with Wholehog III cue 1 to cue 2 Fade Time with Masks You can record fade times with a mask For example e CuelFixture1 2 ColourTime 4 Enter sets the fade time for the colour parameter values of Fixtures 1 and 2 in Cue 1 Tip If you want to assign individual times for several fixtures or fixture parameters you can edit them in the Cue Editor window by clicking on its Fade button see Individual Parameter Timings p 210
386. s in two ways e Repeat The repeat is the number of fixtures that are fanned before the fan is repeated For example fanning a selection of twelve fixtures with a repeat of three would result in four identical fan patterns or parts each with three fixtures in OOBBOOOOCOGOO Flying Pig Systems 157 Reference 158 Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters Buddying The buddying number puts the fixtures into gangs that all take the same value For example fanning a selection of twelve fixtures with a buddying value of three would result in fixtures 1 to 3 having the same parameter value fixtures 4 to 6 having the same value and so on OOO0O00 OOO 88 You can combine repeats and buddying to create complex patterns very simply Repeats and buddying are selected from the Grouping Toolbar press Grouping on the Main Toolbar The toolbar will remain open to allow you to combine Grouping and Buddying press Enter or click on the toolbar s Close button when you have made your selection No Repeat 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 6 Part No Repeats no Buddying lt No Buddying Close Figure 15 11 The Grouping Toolbar The toolbar displays the current repeat and buddying size and has buttons to increase and decrease the repeat and the buddying There are also shortcuts for repeats of 0 2 3 4 and 8 and No Buddying Flying Pig Systems Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters Reference
387. s of the console from left to right Description Example The Trackball mode pointer POS position POS ortho ortho mode The name of the current page Page 1 The current editor Programmer Cue 3 The currently chosen master Master 4 The network status The current time in hours and minutes FT The network is working normally 4 There is a problem with the network 16 28 Flying Pig Systems Section 13 Using the Console Reference 13 7 Starting Up and Shutting Down 13 7 1 Starting Up Hog3 Start Launch New Show Click here to create a new show Launch New Show a Launch Existing Show Choose a previous show from the list or browse for a show Launch Existing Show Shows T toil Show Hog3 Wr Browse Connect To Show Connect to an active Network Show if one has been found Press Rescan to search the network again Press Settings to change the console s network settings No Network Show found Rescan Figure 13 15 The Start window When you turn the console on the Start window will appear see Figure 13 15 The Start window You can choose to Launch New Show Launch Existing Show or Connect to Show Launch New Show Selecting this will launch a new show screen and you will be asked to enter the following information e A storage location Choose the location on the console s hard drive where you would like to
388. scus sion of HTP and LIP see HTP and LTP p 9 For position colour and beam parameters the Wholehog III deals with position colour and beam parameters on a Latest Takes Precedence LTP basis If several masters have programming for the same parameter then the value from the most recently activated master will override the value from previously activated masters Parameters that are only pro grammed into a single master will remain at that value When you release the most recently activated master control will be returned to the previ ously activated master Alternatively you can assert a previously activ ated master s parameters so that they override the most recently activated master see Asserting One Cuelist Over the Others p 251 You can prevent an LTP parameter from being overridden by master actions or asser Flying Pig Systems Section 24 Cuelist Playback Reference 24 2 1 24 2 2 tions by giving its cuelist a high playback priority see Changing a Cuelist s Priority p 252 Tip The Programmer or the current editor with blind mode off will always have priority over all masters and virtual masters Using HTP and LTP You can switch a cuelist s precedence from LTP to HTP allowing intensity parameters that have programming to be output at their highest level rather than the most recently activated level For example you may have a series of intensity chases that you wish to fade in and out over a stage look wi
389. se modes are shown as a list on the Wheels Toolbar and you can select the modes by clicking on the wheel s button on the toolbar Flying Pig Systems 145 Reference Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters Snapping to a Single Value When you have several fixtures selected you can make all the values of a parameter the same as that of the first fixture e Press and hold the key while turning the appropriate parameter wheel Jumping to Endstop Values You can assign a parameter to its endstop values e Press and hold the key and adjust the appropriate parameter wheel clockwise to assign the parameter to its maximum value and anticlock wise to assign the parameter to its minimum value Inverting Parameter Values Some parameters have values either side of zero for example gobo rotation speed You can invert such parameters so that they have the same value but the other side of zero In the case of gobo rotation this reverses the direction whilst maintaining the current speed To invert a parameter e Press and hold the key and adjust the appropriate parameter wheel 15 3 4 Slotted Parameters Colour and Beam To control slotted colour and beam parameters such as gobo and colour wheels 1 Press the appropriate parameter type key Colour or Beam The Slot Toolbar shows the available parameters see Figure 15 5 The Slot Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 2 Click on the required parameter and an additi
390. se in between evenly spread across the intervening range You can also fan backwards continuing the above example Flying Pig Systems 155 Reference 15 4 3 15 4 4 156 Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters e Set 50 Thru 10 Enter Studio Color 1 has an intensity of 50 and Studio Color 5 an intensity of 10 You can also fan several columns at once fanning both Pan and Tilt for example With the Command Line To fan intensities from the command line e 1Thru5 10 Thru 50 Enter The fixtures at either end of the range take the values 10 and 50 with those in between evenly spread across the intervening range You can also fan backwards e 1Thru5 50 Thru 10 Enter fixture 1 has an intensity of 50 and fixture 5 an intensity of 10 Fanning Options By default fanning adjusts parameter values proportionally from the centre of the fixture selection You can have fanning work in other ways e Fan Normal As described above the middle fixture remains unchanged while the first and last fixtures values change the most in opposite directions For example Before fanning 30 30 30 30 30 After fanning 10 20 30 40 50 e Fan From Start The first fixture in the selection order remains un changed while the last one s value changes the most For example Before fanning 30 30 30 30 30 After fanning 30 40 50 60 70 e Fan From End The last fixture in the selection or
391. se the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Product Modification Warning High End Systems products are designed and manufactured to meet the requirements of United States and International safety regulations Modifications to the product could affect safety and render the product non compliant to relevant safety standards Mise En Garde Contre La Modification Du Produit Les produits High End Systems sont concus et fabriqu s conform ment aux exigences des r glements interna tionaux de s curit Toute modification du produit peut entrainer sa non conformit aux normes de s curit en vigueur Produktmodifikationswarnung Design und Herstellung von High End Systems entsprechen den Anforderungen der U S Amerikanischen und internationalen Sicherheitsvorschriften Abanderungen dieses Produktes k nnen dessen Sicherheit beein trachtigen und unter Umst nden gegen die diesbez glichen Sicherheitsnormen versto en Avvertenza Sulla Modifica Del Prodotto I prodotti di High End Systems sono stati progettati e fabbricati per soddisfare i requisiti delle normative di sicurezza statunitensi ed internazionali Qualsiasi modifica al prodotto potrebbe pregiudicare la sicurezza e rendere il prodotto non conforme agli standard di sicurezza pertinenti Advertencia De Modificaci n Del Producto Los productos de High End Systems estan disefiados y fabricados para cumplir los requisitos de las reglamenta ciones de se
392. seconds To assign separate fade in and fade out times Flying Pig Systems Section 20 Working with Cue Timing and Ordering Reference 1 Fixture 1 select the fixtures you want to assign a time to making sure that they have been given parameter values 2 Time 4 7 Enter assigns the Fade In time to 4 seconds and the Fade Out time to 7 seconds To assign a fade time for a particular parameter type 1 Fixture 1 select the desired fixtures 2 Colour Time 4 Enter assigns the fade time of the colour parameters to 4 seconds To assign a delay time press the Time key twice 1 Fixture 1 select the desired fixtures 2 Time Time 2 Enter pressing Time twice assigns the delay time To assign a path press the Time key three times 1 Fixture 1 select the desired fixtures 2 Time Time Time 2 Enter enter a number to represent the path Select the path by entering a number the mapping is the same as the order they appear on the path toolbar starting at zero for the default path 20 2 3 Assigning Parameter Timings in an Editor Window To assign fade or delay times directly in the spreadsheet of an editor 1 View the required timing type by pressing either the Fade or Delay button in the top left of the editor window 2 Click in the cell for the desired parameter or click and drag to select a range of cells Press Set 4 Type ina time value and press Enter When entering a time value it shou
393. sign several fixtures of different types to all strobe at 10 Hz without having to worry about the different DMX values required by each fixture to achieve this The Wholehog III will give you the best possible match between fixtures the only limitations are those of the fixtures themselves Parameters Some fixtures put more than one parameter onto a single DMX address For example a fixture might use DMX values in the range 0 127 for intensity 128 250 for strobe and 251 255 for fixture reset With the Wholehog II the three functions of intensity strobe and reset would all be controlled as a single parameter and you would have to remember that if you accidentally turned the parameter wheel too far when adjusting the strobe speed you could give the parameter a value above 250 and send the fixture into reset The Wholehog III separates such functions into independent parameters so that you do not need to remember the detailed workings of a particular fixture in the example given above the intensity strobe and reset functions all appear as separate parameters so there is no possibility of going from strobe into reset With parameters that share a DMX address changing the value of one will override the value of all the others since there can only be one DMX value In the case of our example assigning a strobe speed will override any intensity value the console will show a in place of the intensity value to indicate that this has happened
394. snap on the Go of a cue but will snap at the very end of that cue being released behaving like an End path 20 1 4 Assigning Cue Timings in the Cuelist Window You can edit fade or delay times in the Cuelist window Assigning fade or delay times here will assign the new value to all the parameters of all the fixtures in the cue 1 Open Choose open the cuelist of the desired master 2 Click in the cell for the fade or delay time of the desired cue and press Set 3 Type ina time value and press Enter When entering a time value it should be in the form 208 Flying Pig Systems Section 20 Working with Cue Timing and Ordering Reference Path Description Default Uses the default path from the fixture s library definition This is generally Linear for continuous parameters and Start for slotted parameters Linear Ba Fades at a steady rate for the duration of the cue Start Snap change at the beginning of the cue End Snap change at the end of the cue Over i The parameters overshoot their destination and then return to it Under The parameters move first in the opposite direction before going E to their destination Damped The parameters change more slowly at the start and end of the va cue than in the middle Brake Z The parameters change more slowly at the end of the cue Accelerate Wi The parameters change more slowly at the start of the cue Shake The parameters follow a chaotic sawtooth fade over the course
395. so crossfade in time out time A way of displaying values in a grid Wholehog III editor windows use a spreadsheet to display parameter values The process that the console goes through when it is first powered on See scene The top level profile user within the console s security structure Similar to a system administrator the superuser has the power to reconfigure the desk and importantly control the access levels of other users See hub See hub A network protocol or language that computers use to talk to each other over Ethernet The Wholehog III uses this standard protocol which means that it can safely be connected to other networks of 375 376 toolbar touch screens touched value tilt timecode timing tracked value tracking UDP universe Glossary computers and will not interfere with them For show critical situations you should run the Wholehog III on its own independent network See Also Ethernet A long thin window with a series of buttons that generally sits along the top or bottom edge of the screens When in this position a toolbar is said to be docked See Also Soft Key The two LCD screens on the console which display and allow the user to select information from them A parameter value that has been assigned or edited by the user Values which are not touched will remain at their default value See Also default value tracking One of the parameters togeth
396. so the con tent of the current editor is assumed Record Replace Position1 The Replace option on the Record Options Toolbar ensures that the new palette replaces the previ ously recorded palette Position 1 Copy Position 2 The Copy command takes the Position 1 palette as its source Position 1 Move Replace Position 2 This example combines us ing a source and a record option Group 2 Record Position 3 Here Group 2 acts as a mask for the record com mand so that only fixtures in Group 2 are recorded into the Position 3 palette Cue 1 Group 3 Copy Position Cue 5 Here the parameter values of fixtures in Group 3 are copied from Cue 1 to Cue 5 The Position option ap plied to the copy com mand means that only po sition parameters are in cluded Flying Pig Systems 101 Reference 13 6 2 102 Section 13 Using the Console The important thing to understand is that the command line follows a standard syntax with the various parts in a particular order Knowing this you will be able to extend the many examples of command line syntax in this manual to do anything that you want Tip The text of the command line turns red if your syntax is not valid The Status Bar To the right of the command line is the Status Bar see Figure 13 14 The Status Bar Page 1 Figure 13 14 The Status Bar Programmer Master 4 Sr 16 12 The Status Bar gives you the following information about the statu
397. sole doesn t start or shuts down shortly after switching it on e Ifa software update has failed the console can get into a state where it either fails to start properly or it goes immediately to the shutdown screen A full re install will be necessary see Clean Install p 343 35 1 4 The playback controls don t behave as expected e Check that the playback controls haven t been mapped to different functions to their normal ones See Configuring Playback Controls p 287 348 Flying Pig Systems Section 35 Getting Help Appendices 35 2 Reporting Problems When reporting problems with the console known as bugs it is important that the information you provide is as clear and detailed as possible to ensure that the problem can be fixed Please follow the guidelines below Please report bugs to e support flyingpig com e 24 7 phone support 1 800 890 8989 e 24 7 phone support 44 20 8280 9292 e wwwflyingpig com 35 2 1 Reporting Problems with the Console Please include the following information in your bug report 1 The piece of hardware that exhibited the problem including the version number of the software being used 2 The actions taken that induce the problem in the first place including whether the problem is repeatable using the same actions The symptoms of the problem 4 The network configuration of system e How many consoles e How many DMX Processors and MIDI Timecode Processors e What s
398. soles the look on stage that you get after playing back cues out of sequence is incorrect Using our example above going from cue 1 to cue 3 missing out cue 2 would result in fixture 1 being at 100 instead of the correct 50 and fixture 3 being at 50 instead of the correct 100 This is because the values from cue 1 track through without the values in cue 2 being applied The Wholehog III avoids this problem by Maintaining State This means that whenever you run a cue the console ensures that what you get on stage is what you would have got if you had run through the cuelist up to that point regardless of where you have actually come from within the cue list Again using our example above with Wholehog II if you jump from cue 1 to cue 3 the console will calculate the state of cue 3 as if you had played cue 2 first Flying Pig Systems Section 2 Users New to Moving Light Consoles Introduction 25 Multiple Playbacks and Cuelists Most theatre consoles only use a single cuelist The Wholehog III allows multiple cuelists each with their own numbering sequence You can have several cuelists active at the same time each on its own playback Each of the Wholehog III s ten playbacks masters has a fader Go Halt Back and Flash keys you can add further hardware wings and use virtual masters to provide an unlimited number of simultaneous playbacks For more information see Cuelist Playback p 241 Pages allow you to loa
399. splayed with the next cue shown below The next few cues and their times If you want to see more cues click and drag the top of the Playback Bar upwards to make it larger The master level as a percentage If the master is below 100 then a red bar appears indicating the level It is possible for the position of the physical fader to be different to the master level of the cuelist in which case the vertical bar will be blue see Matching Levels When Changing Page p 279 Whether the cuelist is a chase If it is then its rate in BPM is shown see Using a Cuelist as a Chase p 262 Any options set for the cuelist The symbols used are shown below Reference Symbol Description e 000 008 The cuelist is working under the HTP rule The cuelist is set to Persist on Override See Changing a Cuelist s Priority 0 252 The cuelist is set to Release on Other Go See Releasing on Another Go p 246 The cuelist has a high priority See Changing a Cuelist s Priority 0 252 The cuelist has a low priority See Changing a Cuelist s Priority 0 252 The scene uses the master as an IPCB fader See PCB Fader Mode p 275 Note that this applies to scenes only The cuelist uses the master as a manual fader See Manual Crossfading p 261 Using the Playback Bar with Playback Wings If you connect USB Playback Wings to have more physical masters the console will display an additional Playback Bar for each wing
400. swap to screen 67 swapping axes 131 switch Ethernet 73 switching off the console see shutting down symbols 3 syntax 100 T tables effects 229 Tap Sync 264 technical specifications 355 technical support 347 template page 284 template pages 94 theatre lighting consoles 5 9 tilt see position time setting the console clock 70 timecode 216 291 jump points 301 options 298 regenerating 298 simulating 301 triggering cues 299 viewing 300 timing 205 effects 236 fanned 215 for individual parameters 10 scenes 228 toolbars 83 CD Control Toolbar 292 Editor Toolbar 99 Editor Values Toolbar 98 Flying Pig Systems Fanning Toolbar 141 156 Jump Toolbar 99 Playback Bar 256 274 279 285 Record Options Toolbar 175 with cuelists 224 with cues 192 with effect palettes 238 with groups 164 with palettes 178 with scenes 228 Select Toolbar 140 Slot Toolbar 135 Status Bar 102 View Toolbar 88 Window Control Toolbar 86 touch screens 11 12 83 backlight off time 65 brightness 64 calibration 64 cleaning 345 disabling 65 external 66 maintenance 345 replacing 351 touched values 192 touching parameters 151 with Live 181 with Pig 152 Touchscreen Monitor technical specification 357 track backwards 198 track forwards 199 200 track through 7 151 Track Through Loops 264 Trackball 12 131 144 keys 67 modes 66 replacing 353 sensitivity 68 using for pan and tilt
401. system consists of a console and a DMX Processor that generates four universes of DMX to connect to the lighting rig Only slightly more complex is the case of a system with a single console and several DMX Processors connected together with an Ethernet switch Large systems can have several consoles DMX Processors MIDI Timecode Processors and other network devices controlling large lighting rigs Flying Pig Systems Section 12 Setting Up the System Reference 12 2 1 12 2 2 12 2 3 Connecting Directly to an DMX Processor If you have a single console and DMX Processor you should join them using a Category 5 cross over cable Note that an ordinary non crossover cable won t work all other network arrangements that use a switch or hub use non crossover cables throughout You should use only certified Category 5 cables With this set up no configuration is required as the Wholehog IIT and DMX Processor configure themselves automatically Connecting One Console to Several DMX Processors If you have a single console and several DMX Processors you should link them all to an Ethernet switch using certified Category 5 non crossover cables see Figure 12 6 A Typical Network with Several DMX Processors With this set up no configuration is required as the Wholehog IIT and DMX Processors configure themselves automatically 4 DMX universes oOo OOOO DMX Processor 1 L Wholehog III console eo 4 D
402. t they have been given parameter values 2 Press the Time key 3 The Wheels Toolbar will show the available timing types Fade In Fade Out Delay In and Delay Out together with their current settings see Figure 20 4 The Wheels Toolbar showing Timing 4 Use the parameter wheels to assign the desired Fade In Fade Out Delay In and Delay Out Note that if you want to see the timings that you have assigned in the editor you can select the Fade or Delay views using the buttons in the top left of the editor window You don t have to be in these views to assign timings however Fade In Fade Out Delay In Delay Out Mersi heist heity Westy Figure 20 4 The Wheels Toolbar showing Timing To assign fade and delay timings to specific parameter types 1 Select the fixtures that you want to assign timings to making sure that they have been given parameter values 2 Press the Time key 3 The Wheels Toolbar will show the available timing types 4 Click on Fade In Fade Out Delay In or Delay Out and select a parameter type see Figure 20 5 Selecting Parameter Types from the Wheels Toolbar 5 Use the parameter wheels to assign the desired timing Flying Pig Systems 211 Reference 20 2 2 212 Section 20 Working with Cue Timing and Ordering All Intensity Position Colour Beam Fade In Fade Out Delay In Delay Out Weasty Westy Westy We as ty Figure 20
403. t 2 Cue 4 Enter Recording to a Cuelist on a Master You can choose a master rather than a cuelist when recording a cue This will record the cue to the cuelist currently attached to the chosen master or create a cuelist if it doesn t exist For example 1 Press the Choose key above Master number 10 The Choose key will light up to show that Master 10 is the chosen master 2 Record 1 Enter records Cue 1 in the cuelist attached to Master 10 cre ating it if necessary To record more cues e Record 1 5 Enter inserts anew cue numbered 1 5 into the cuelist on the currently chosen master e Record Enter appends the cue to the end of the cuelist attached to the currently chosen master 191 Reference 19 1 2 19 1 3 19 1 4 192 Section 19 Working with Cues e Record Choose appends the cue to the end of the cuelist of the selected master This allows the current master to remain chosen while recording cues onto other masters The Contents of the Programmer after Recording a Cue When you record a cue the values remain in the Programmer but the background colour changes from blue to grey This indicates that the parameter values in the Pro grammer are no longer touched and so are available for recording to another cuelist but not to the same cuelist You can keep the values in the Programmer to act as the basis for the next cue on the same list but because of tracking only the changed parameter values will be r
404. t 5 Enter change the assert time to 5 seconds Alternatively you can assign the Assert Time for all new scenes in the Scene pane of the Preferences window e Setup Preferences Scene Tip If you have assigned an assert time to a scene and you want to revert to the default assert time press the Default button adjacent to the Assert Time cell Changing a Scene s Priority Under the LTP rule the most recent action determines the value of a fixture parameter see Running Multiple Scenes p 268 However you can override this precedence by assign ing scenes different priorities so that scenes with a higher priority take precedence over those with a lower one If their priority is equal then the LTP rule is used to determine which scene will take precedence and determine the parameter s value A scene s default priority is 0 and you can assign the priority value in increments of 10 For example if the priority of the scene on Master 9 is at default 0 and the priority of that on Master 8 is 50 then a Go triggered on Master 9 will not override common Flying Pig Systems Section 25 Scene Playback Reference parameters currently active on Master 8 Conversely you can apply a minus priority so if the scene on Master 10 has a priority of 50 common parameters on Master 9 will override those on Master 10 To change a scene s priority 1 Open Choose Options Scene 2 Select the Playback Priority cell Priorit
405. t back again Many moving light consoles use HTP for intensity and LTP for all other parameters By default the Wholehog III uses LTP for all parameters but you can assign individual cuelists to use HTP for intensities all other parameters are still LTP see Using HTP and LTP p 251 Flying Pig Systems 9 Introduction Section 2 Users New to Moving Light Consoles 2 Individual Times for Each Parameter With the Wholehog III you can assign individual crossfade timings for each parameter of each fixture giving you complete control of how each parameter changes during a cue Because of this there are no cue parts as found on some other consoles The Wholehog III gives you easy ways to assign timings for the whole cue for individual fixtures and by parameter type intensity position colour beam and so on as well as for each parameter For more information see Individual Parameter Timings p 210 and Working with Fade Timings p 206 10 Flying Pig Systems Section 3 Wholehog II Users If you are an experienced Wholehog II user you will find the transition to Wholehog III very straightforward This section lists the major changes and additions with brief descriptions while full information on each topic can be found in the Reference p 61 part of this handbook 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 Networking Unlike Wholehog II the Wholehog III console does not produce a DMX output directly Instead the console is designed to wo
406. t of the ten masters The main controls operate whichever master is chosen with its Flying Pig Systems 53 Tutorial Section 10 Playback Choose key located above it The Choose key will light up blue to show the chosen master You can increase or decrease the rate of a running cue by pressing and holding the master s Choose key and adjusting the left hand parameter wheel Alternatively you can use the sprung Rate Wheel on the left of the console to momentarily override the rate of the cue Once the cuelist reaches the end it will loop back to the first cue in the list Tip The Programmer will have priority over fixture parameter values outputted by the masters Press Clear to remove the contents of the Programmer to insure that the output on stage is not effected by the current Programmer contents 10 2 Understanding Feedback There are several ways in which the console shows you the status of the running cues The playback control key LEDs display feedback information e Go key Green When solidly lit this indicates that a crossfade is in progress When flashing it indicates that a crossfade has been paused e Halt Back key Red When solidly lit this indicates that this master is controlling parameters other than intensity When flashing it indicates that its control of those parameters has been overridden by other masters e Flash key Red When solidly lit this indicates that this master is con trolling fixture inte
407. t onstage If the cuelist is already active then pressing Go will run the next cue or restart paused fades see Halt Back below e Halt Back pauses any running fades If there are no running fades then pressing Halt Back will start a fade back to the previous cue e Fader controls the intensity of fixtures under the control of this playback When the fader is at full fixtures appear on stage at their programmed intensity As the fader level is reduced the intensity of fixtures is reduced proportionally e Flash momentarily puts the intensity of fixtures under the control of this playback to their full programmed value as if the fader had been put to maximum You can customise the function of master controls to suit the requirements of the user or a particular show see Configuring Playback Controls p 287 Tip Pressing or clicking on the Playback Bar is equivalent to pressing that master s Choose key The Main Controls The main playback controls positioned to the right of the masters see Figure 24 2 The Main Playback Controls work with the currently chosen master You can also use them with another master by holding down the required Choose key while pressing a key from the main controls Choose key Assert key Release key Goto key Skip forwards Skip back Halt Back key Go key Figure 24 2 The Main Playback Controls Flying Pig Systems 243 Reference Section 24 Cuelist Playback The ma
408. t the selected cuelist with the option to Release if already halted e Assign the Fader to be a manual crossfader rather than an intensity fader e Assign the Flash key to only flash to 50 and to Go the cuelist To assign the function of each control together with any associated options 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window 2 Options open the Options for the cuelist 3 Under Controls select the Master or Main Controls pane see Figure 27 2 The Master pane of the Cuelist Options window and Figure 27 3 The Main Controls pane of the Cuelist Options window 4 Select the action you want controls to have from the corresponding drop down list together with any options 5 Press OK when you have finished Flying Pig Systems 287 Reference 27 3 1 258 Section 27 Working with Playback Controls Wi List 1 Playback Options 10l x Options p Master Master gt ce W Fade Default Za Use default cuelist time Master Fader fade v 7A Go off zero 7A Release at zero Click Flash Zz Flash 4 i0 gt 80ontis Release on off Q so Latching Figure 27 2 The Master pane of the Cuelist Options window W List 1 Playback Options Iof xj Options Assert Assert v Fade Default Use default cuelist time Release Release v Fade Default Use default cuelist time Goto Goto cmdlin
409. th You can now specify over what proportion of the effect period the effect occurs 3 5 3 5 1 Abstraction A key philosophy behind the Wholehog III is that as a user you shouldn t have to worry about the technicalities of the way that a particular manufacturer implements a partic ular feature on a fixture As far as you are concerned the fixture has common parameters such as intensity position colour and beam and it is these parameters that you control with the console You no longer have to think in terms of DMX addresses and values This is called the abstraction layer because the software acts as a layer between you the user and the lighting hardware converting abstract ideas of intensity colour and so on into the specific instructions that the fixtures need defined by their DMX protocol Real World Units Fixture parameters are described as far as possible in real world units such as degrees for rotation and beats per minute for the speed of a chase Colour can be described in terms of a single colour model for all fixtures cyan magenta yellow or hue and satura tion for example irrespective of the technical details of how the fixture creates a partic ular colour see Colour Matching p 14 This speeds up programming and allows fixtures Flying Pig Systems 13 Introduction Section 3 Wholehog II Users 3 5 2 3 5 3 of different types to be selected and adjusted at the same time for example you can as
410. th fixtures in the current show if they have the same type and user number If a match is made the fixture in the current show is replaced with the one in the source show and all program ming in the source and current show that used that fixture will use the merged fixture If no match is made the source fixture is appended to the current show as above Important If you merge fixtures and then merge programming because both the source show and the current show are using the same fixture any program ming from the source show using that fixture will overwrite the programming in the current show Merging Programming After merging fixtures you can merge the programming groups palettes cuelists and cues scenes pages from the source show see Figure 13 25 The Group Merge page of the Merge Show window Flying Pig Systems Section 13 Using the Console Reference Merge Show ae Group Merge D Merge Groups Import Groups ter tax X Canca Figure 13 25 The Group Merge page of the Merge Show window The following options are available e Append adds all of the programming from the source show to the current show e Append Different if programming with the same name cannot by found in the current show the programming from the source show is appended e Merge By Name if programming with the same name is found in the current show merge the source progra
411. the Effects Engine Functioncolumn first You can also enter a value of say 50 Thru 80 in a cell of the Effects Engine window See Fanning p 154 Applying and Editing Effects in the Programmer or Editor Effects can be assigned directly to specific fixtures and their attributes in the Programmer This is helpful when you wish to make small changes without opening the Effects Engine Effect types are assigned and edited in the Table view whilst effect attributes can be adjusted in the Size Rate Offset Length Table and N Shot views The views are selected by buttons at the top of the Programmer or editor window For example to create an offset circle effect using fixtures in positions from the current onstage look 1 Main Toolbar gt Programmer open the Programmer 2 1 Thru 5 Position Suck sucks position information from fixtures 1 through 5 that are currently live on stage 3 Table select the Table view in the Programmer the pan and tilt column will read Off 4 Select all pan and tilt cells of the selected fixtures by clicking and dragging 5 Set Sine Enter choose the Sine table from the drop down menu and confirm by pressing Enter 6 Select Offset select the Offset view in the Programmer the pan and tilt column will read 0 Deg 7 Select all pan and tilt cells of the selected fixtures by clicking and dragging 8 Set 1 Thru 288 Enter offset pan and tilt equally across the fixtures Once you ha
412. the cue contains a reference to the palette rather than the parameter values that the palette contains If later you change the palette then all cues that have been recorded using the palette are also changed This is especially useful if for example the position of a piece of set on stage is moved and moving lights have been programmed to light it The palette can be updated once to accommodate the change rather than in every cue For more information see Working with Palettes p 167 2 4 Tracking Tracking is quite a difficult concept at first but it is a very important one When a se quence of cues is programmed the lighting console can store the information in one of two ways either it records the settings for all the parameters of all the fixtures in the show or it only records the values that have changed since the previous cue The second method is called tracking The following example shows the intensities of four fixtures in three cues Fixture 3 4 Cue 1 Cue 2 50 100 50 50 Cue 3 50 100 100 50 With a non tracking console the cues would be recorded with the channel levels as shown above With a tracking console however the recorded information would be Flying Pig Systems Section 2 Users New to Moving Light Consoles Introduction Fixture 1 2 3 4 Cue 1 100 0 50 50 Cue 2 50 100 Cue 3 100 If the intensity has not changed from the previous cue then no value
413. the fixture builder they are stored within the show file You can then add these fixtures to your show in the same method as existing fixtures within the selected library 1 In the Fixture window open the Fixture Schedule 2 Scroll down to the User Created manufacturer and expand to view all custom made libraries Flying Pig Systems 321 Appendices 3 Section 31 The Fixture Builder E Fixture Schedule 2 x Specify how many fixtures of each type you wish to use Select a type and press Set Name Mode Count i aj H Studio Due Syncrolite Thomas User Created mine 0 Tutorial 0 6 Varilite H Wybron H E ml Xenotech zi Var eT PK cancel Add patch and program custom libraries in the same manner as exist ing libraries Once a fixture is created it behaves the same as built in fixture libraries You can merge custom libraries from one show to another using the Merge Show function You can use the Edit Fixtures window to adjust default values and fur ther customize user created libraries You can replicate and replace to and from user created fixtures You should send a show containing your custom made fixtures to sup port flyingpig com so they may be added to future built in libraries 31 1 2 Creating Editing and Deleting Fixture Libraries You can create edit and delete fixture libraries in the Fixture Builder window Setup Patch Fixture Builder open t
414. the order of their patch address e To select all the cells in a column Double click on the column header at the top of the spreadsheet To select a cell Click or press in the cell You can use the cursor keys below the Trackball to change which cell is selected If the cell is editable it will have a red border To select a range of cells You can click or press and then drag across a range of cells to select them all Alternatively you can click in the first cell press and hold Thru and click in the last cell this is useful if you want to select a large range and need to scroll the window To edit the contents of cells Click or press in the cell and press the Set key or double click in the cell Type in the new value and press Enter This works for both a single selected cell and a range Cells that are ed itable have a red border when selected 13 3 1 Compact Mode In editor windows such as the Programmer you can use compact mode to save space and get more information onto the screen without having to scroll see Figure 13 5 A spreadsheet with and without Compact Mode In compact mode fixtures only have columns for the actual parameters that they have rather than for all the parameters of any fixture in the editor The console uses the display space more efficiently by having multiple columns for fixture types with few parameters such as desk channels Flying Pig Systems 91 Reference 13 3 2 92 Se
415. the selection is now Studio Colors 2 and 4 Studio Color 5 Sub Selections You can make sub selections from within the current selection using the Next and Back keys and the Odd Even and Random buttons on the Select Toolbar e Main Toolbar Select Random The Random button selects a single fixture at random from the current active selection in the Programmer Even and Odd The Even and Odd buttons on the Select Toolbar select the even and odd fixtures from the current selection according to the The Selection Order p 141 Note that the selection order is not related to fixture user numbers so the sub selection pro duced by Odd might contain even numbered fixtures Next and Back The Next and Back keys on the console select a single fixture from within the current selection Repeatedly pressing Next or Back steps forwards or back wards through the current selection with the order determined by the The Selection Order p 141 Tip When the Trackball is in position mode the bottom left Trackball key also acts as a Next key This can make it very fast to work through a selection of fixtures assigning their position Flying Pig Systems Section 15 Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters Reference 15 1 6 Deselecting Fixtures To deselect all selected fixtures press the Backspace key when the command line is empty You can also use the following command line syntax e Fixture 0 Enter deselects all fixtures
416. the show Disabling Touch Screens You can disable the touch sensitive action of the screens or turn them off all together in the Displays pane of the Control Panel 1 Setup gt Control Panel Displays 2 Press the buttons for the LCD and Touchscreen functions to toggle them on or off 3 Select OK to apply and close External Displays You can attach two external displays to the Wholehog III using standard VGA connectors The screen resolutions supported are e 800x600 e 1024x768 e 1280x1024 To use external displays you must enable them and set the screen resolution in the Displays pane of the Control Panel e Setup Control Panel Displays You will need to restart the console to enable the external monitors see Restarting and Shutting Down p 106 Flying Pig Systems 65 Reference 12 1 4 12 1 5 66 Section 12 Setting Up the System External Touch Screens You can use external touch screens with the Wholehog III connected using one of the console s USB ports At present only one model is supported the Elotouch 1727L Ac cutouch USB 227258 000 This 17 TFT touch screen is available from High End Systems www highend com part number 61040021 You can find more information about it at www highend com products controllers touchscreenmonitor asp As with any external display you need to enable external touch screens in the Control Panel see External Displays p 65 The display will be a
417. thout overriding the intensity information of the original look or when touring with smoke machines you may wish to manually boost the level of smoke programmed into the main cuelist to combat changes in air condition ing or venue size at specific points in the show For a full explanation of LTP see HTP and LTP p 9 To assign a cuelist s precedence to HTP 1 Open Choose Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Use HTP Properties Use HTP y Alternatively you can turn on Use HTP for all new cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the Preferences window e Setup Preferences Cuelist Important If you have an HTP master with the fader up i e intensities above zero then using Release or Pig Release has no effect on the intensity parameters To release the intensities of HTP masters bring the fader to zero For more on releasing cuelists see Releasing a Cuelist on a Master p 244 Asserting One Cuelist Over the Others When you have several cuelists active at the same time control of fixture parameters programmed into one cuelist may be taken by another cuelist that also has programming for that fixture parameter For example if Cuelist 1 has programming for desk channels Flying Pig Systems 251 Reference 24 2 3 252 Section 24 Cuelist Playback 1 3 and Cuelist 2 has programming for desk channels 3 6 then running a cue in Cuelist 2 will override the intensity parameter of desk channel 3 You ma
418. ti dienes hears ak 359 38 1 1 Warning For Continued Protection Against Fire 359 38 1 2 Warning For Continued Protection Against Electric SHOCK nna Ca Sastre cle a E rN ail tence la chanted 359 38 2 Importantes Informations Sur La S curit accro 360 38 2 1 Mise En Garde Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les INCONGIES 0 0 teas 360 38 2 2 Mise En Garde Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les Chocs El Ctriques o 360 38 3 Wichtige Hinweise Fur Ihre Sicherheit cece eee eee 360 38 3 1 Warnung Zum Schutz Vor Brandgefahr ecca 360 38 3 2 Warnung Zum Schutz Gegen Gef hrliche K rper SNOMS a oaeen ope e E AN E E AAAA AN TAEAE 360 38 4 Informaci n Importante De Seguridad ccccccrrcrcrcrc 361 38 4 1 Advertencia Para Protecci n Continua Contra In SOMOS es iann nE NEE TEE ENA AE AE AAAA 361 38 4 2 Advertencia Para La Protecci n Continua Contra FISCTIOGUCIONGS A ei or a niaaa EENE ONAT TAE 361 38 5 Importanti Informazioni Di SICULEZZO 362 38 5 1 Avvertenza Per Prevenire INCeEnd cccceceeee esas 362 38 5 2 Avvertenza Per Prevenire Le Scosse Elettriche 362 38 6 Vigtig SikkerhedsinforMation sacccccccccrcrcccrrcrc c 362 e Neea E E E ET TT 363 38 7 1 ZE KKD D ORGANISED ASI oes 363 38 7 2 ZE REICHT DRIT REQ AIS cr 363 GIOSSONY EEE EE TE E A AT 365 WACK enaa ea a aaa a AEA 379 Flying Pig Systems xiii List of Figures 3 1 The HSI Colour Wheel 0 rene tenE 15 6 THE STAMUP
419. tically creating Palettes and Group c cece eee 39 FO sFING QUTIMOIS siaitiigat soaks anea Aa a de aA DAA AT ET apa ees 40 8 Programming Fixtures cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 41 8 1 Selecting FIXTULES ii airiran a aaia a 41 8 1 1 Selecting Individual Fixtures 0 0 eect eens 41 8 1 2 Selecting Multiple Fixtures 00 cece eeee teen eens 42 8 1 3 Deselecting and Removing Fixtures from Program GST fechas ict etc cathe an Ailtndeeuteten ch encode E 43 8 2 Creating ANd USING GrOuPS 00 eect teenies 43 8 3 Assigning Values to PArOMe Tels cece ene tenes 44 8 3 1 Assigning INTENSITY ccc 44 8 3 2 ASSIGNING POSION esnie ei eeii raae E E ns 45 8 3 3 Assigning Colour ANd BEAM ccccccccrcrrccccrcncnrnno 45 8 3 4 Fanning PArAMe els cca 47 8 4 Creating and Using Palettes terete nein 47 gS FING OUT MOPS easiest 0d vad wal a Cae Aa UY siecle vues Cage 48 9 Recording Cues and TIMES eeceeeeee eee eee eee eee eeneeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeeee 51 9 Building THE LOOK iiaii nid a aiaa aa ensigns a a aN 51 9 2 Recording O CUS ys saci cits tavecds aiian aea a aa Ea 51 9 3 ASSigNING TIMINGS ieie irinin i beai a AEE EAN 52 OA FING Out MOS eaa eea died a OEA A EAI OARS 52 10 ehdoteta AE EE T T E A S 53 10 1 Playing Back CuUGS rinitin rin anrai diac A ETNEA DEAA 53 10 2 Understanding Feedback oo erties 54 TOS FINA OUNMO ii neei A EA E EE TAU aA 55 11 Saving and Shutting DOWN sssssesesessssnnsn
420. tion For in depth visualiser usage please contact the visualiser manufacturer see Visualiser Support Contacts p 319 30 1 Installing the Connectivity Application Download the current Wholehog III Connectivity installation application from the Flying Pig Systems website www flyingpig com Alternately a Wholehog III full installation CD or ISO image download version 1 3 8 or greater contains the Wholehog III Connectivity installation application within the VIZSETUP folder To install the connectivity application 1 Automatic installation a Insert the CD into your PC b The install wizard should start automatically 2 Manual installation a Insert the CD into your PC b Double click the setup msi file to launch the install wizard 3 Press Next to begin the installation process Flying Pig Systems 309 Appendices Section 30 Visualiser Connectivity li xi Welcome to the Wholehog IIl Connectivity Setup Ce Wizard The installer will guide you through the steps required to install Wholehog III Connectivity on your computer WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Cancel 4 Select an installation folder By default the software will be installed into the C P
421. tion on getting help from Flying Pig Systems can be found in Getting Help p 347 Flying Pig Systems 33 Section 7 Setting Up the Show 7 1 Adding the Fixtures Before starting programming you need to choose the fixtures you wish to use in the show and patch them within the Fixture window injxl To open the Fixture window e Setup gt Patch press the Setup key on the console to show the Setup Toolbar then press Patch To add new fixtures open the Fixture Schedule window by pressing the Fixture Schedule button in the top left hand corner of the Fixture window W Fixture Schedule 2 x Specify how many fixtures of each type you wish to use Select a type and press Set Name J Mode J Number J ES 1 a Intellabeam 13 chan Studio Beam Studio Beam CTO Studio Color 250 O O 39 oO 0 Studio Spot 250 0 Studio Spot 575 5 Flying Pig Systems 35 Tutorial Section 7 Setting Up the Show Use the trackball mouse or cursor keys below the trackball to navigate the list of manufactures With the cursor keys use up and down to scroll and right and left to toggle open and closed each manufacture s list 1 Scroll to High End and toggle the list open by clicking on the icon or using the right cursor key 2 Select Studio Color 575 press Set type 10 and Enter 3 Repeat for 5 Studio Spot 575s 4 Repeat for 8 Technobeam Iris Tip If you have an external ke
422. tly tighten the thumbscrews and re connect the cable ensuring correct pin alignment 8 With the LCD box back in the vertical position fit the LCD screen and Soft Keys 9 Replace and tighten the six screws starting with the centre pair 10 Calibrate the touch screen See Touch Screens p 64 Flying Pig Systems 351 Appendices Section 36 Servicing 36 2 Replacing Faders Caution Always shut down and disconnect the mains power before removing the front panel Damaged or dirty faders are easily replaced 1 Remove the parameter wheel knobs using a 2mm allen key to loosen the grub screws 2 Pull off the fader knobs and position the faders at 50 3 Undo the four screws with a 4mm allen key and carefully lift off the front panel Note that the front panel is intentionally concave 4 Gently unplug the fader s flying lead and lift the fader to unclip it from the PCB 5 Clean fader if required See Cleaning Faders p 352 6 Fit the new fader in place ensuring that it sits completely flat against the PCB this is crucial 7 Reconnect the fader flying lead and position the fader at 50 8 To re assemble follow steps 3 through 1 36 3 Cleaning Faders Faders are often unnecessarily discarded when all they need is a clean 1 Remove the dirty fader See Replacing Faders p 352 2 Undo the top crosshead screw furthest from the flying lead using a small Philips screwdriver Remove the top end cap
423. to Palettes WINQAOW s sssssrsersursnrnrrttrtrrt tnt r rtnn trn trt trar rtrrnrrrrrnn 121 14 6 The Fixture PAtCh WINQAOW sssssrsrsersrrnrnnrttrtrrt trti rtint ratit seen seen en en eens 123 14 7 The View by DP view of the Fixture WINQAOW sssssssrsrrsrrrrrsrrrrrerirrrrrne 125 14 8 Examples of Fixtures requiring Multiple Patch Points cccccccccrccccrc 126 14 9 A Fixture with Multiple Patch Points cccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeseseeeseeaees 127 14 10 The Clone Universe WINKOW s sssssssurerrerrtrrtrrtrntrnnrt titr seen ease seen en enes 127 14 11 The Fixture WINKOW ooo cece ec cece cece eee eee ntron rnt r tt n rtu EE Seer SE er et Saba EH EH EE ES 130 14 12 The Edit Fixtures WINGOW 00 cece cece cee cece ee ee eens esses ee seen seen besa st en enna 133 14 13 The Edit Fixtures window sorted by FUNCTION ccccccceceeeee ee ee ease eee es 134 15 1 The Programmer WINKOW 0 Erne 137 15 2 The SElIECT IOOID ON aai kenaii ein aiiin E E AOAR AERA 139 15 3 The Wheels Toolbar for the Beam Parameters of a Studio Spot 575 145 15 4 The Wheelsets Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 acccccccecccerccrccccrcncnnno 145 15 5 The Slot Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 s ssssssssrsrrsnrerrerrerierreririrerrrrrere 146 15 6 The Colour Slots Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 wc e ee nee ee 146 18 7 The Colour Wheelman anre eiior e i aa divas ed ete Ar Ea ners 148 15 8 The Colour PICKET oaa a a a Aa R ECU A 150 15 9 The GelPickei tensar nana be
424. to select the type from the Palette Masking Toolbar The Palette Masking Toolbar For example suppose that you wanted to add a gobo a beam parameter to the existing Colour Palette 2 1 Open Colour opens the Colour Directory 2 Open Colour 2 opens the palette editor for Colour Palette 2 3 Press the Edit button in the editor window to select this as your current editor 4 Select the B Beam button on the Palette Masking Toolbar 5 Edit the fixture parameter values to assign the required gobo 6 Press Update to save the changes 170 Flying Pig Systems Section 17 Working with Palettes Reference Tip You can also use the Palette Masking Toolbar to quickly remove all values of a particular parameter type from a palette by deselecting the appropriate button before updating 17 4 Deleting Palettes Important Deleting a palette will remove all references to the palette that have been recorded in cues scenes and other palettes and replace the references with numerical parameter values Creating a new paletie in the same loca tion will not replace the references which are removed once the palette is deleted To delete a palette using the command line 1 Colour 1 Delete deletes Colour Palette 1 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Or from the palette directory 1 Press and hold Delete whilst selecting the palette to be deleted from directory 2 Release the Delete key A dialog will appear as
425. ton ale Colour F3 Colour Technobeam Iris __ Normal Normal Normal Normal Figure 19 1 The Cue Editor window Within the editor you can assign fixture parameters and timing in the same way as in the Programmer See Selecting Fixtures Modifying Parameters p 137 Once you have made changes be sure to press the Update key to save them the Cue Editor will then automat ically close 19 6 1 Viewing Different Cues in the Editor In addition to the usual functions available in all editors described in Working with Ed itors p 98 the Cue Editor window has controls that allow you to select which cue is displayed e Next and Back The Next and Back buttons to allow you to easily step through the cues in the cuelist to view or edit them e View Cue You can jump to another cue by typing its number in to the View Cue box and pressing the Enter key e Follow Current If you select the Follow Current button the Cue Editor window will always show the current cue as the cuelist is played back If you use Next Back or View Cue to view another cue or if you edit the current cue then Follow Current is disabled e Follow Next This is similar to Follow Current except that the next cue is displayed rather than the current one When the last cue is played the first cue in the cuelist is displayed Flying Pig Systems 197 Reference Section 19 Working with Cues Tip As well as the buttons in th
426. ton that can be pressed the Programmer for example With the Open Key To open a window using console keys hold down Open and press the window s associated key or button For example e Open Position opens the Position Directory window e Open List opens the Cuelist Directory window e Open Choose opens the Cuelist window for the chosen master You can also hold down the Open key to gain access the second level of the main toolbar with buttons for many of the console s windows such as the Output and Parked windows From the Command Line You can specify the window to be opened using the command line and then press the Open key For example e Position 5 Open opens the editor window for Position Palette 5 e Cue 4 8 Open opens the editor window for Cue 8 in the cuelist on Master 4 85 Reference Section 13 Using the Console Double Pressing Keys You can also open some windows by double pressing the appropriate key e Position Position opens the Position Directory window Tip If you prefer not to use the double press shortcut to open windows then assign the double press time to zero to disable it see Keys and Buttons p 69 13 2 2 Closing Windows Windows can be closed using the window s Close button marked with a cross at the right hand end of its title bar by pressing Open Backspace or with the Close button X on the Window Control Toolbar 13 2 3 Fronting Resizing and Moving
427. triggering of the next Timecode The cue is triggered when this timecode value is received See Working with Audio MIDI and Timecode p 291 The timecode value will be displayed in the wait cell Flying Pig Systems Section 20 Working with Cue Timing and Ordering Reference Manual A manual cue can only be triggered by pressing the Go key This stops the cuelist until the Go key is pressed irrespective of any wait follow or timecode triggers that later cues in the list may have Manual cues are useful because the word Manual appears in the Cuelist window to remind the operator that they need to press the Go key They are also useful to prevent times being recorded into the Wait column when using Learn Timing p 217 20 3 1 Learn Timing You can use Learn Timing to assign cue trigger timing values by operating the cues with the Go key manually once The console can either assign wait times to replicate your timing or assign the cue trigger to a frame value of a running timecode To use Learn Timing with timecode 1 2 8 Open Choose open the Cuelist window of the required cuelist Options Cuelist Options open the Cuelist pane of the cuelist s Options window Select Enable Timecode and choose a timecode source Close the Op tions window In the Cuelist window click View Timecode The Timecode Toolbar will open If your timecode source is not currently running click Simulate on the Timecode Toolba
428. try of 0 gt 200 will become 0 gt 100 Many features also allow negative values to be used When defining the real world values for a rotating gobo for example you could enter 50 gt 50rpm This real world range will be mapped directly to the corresponding DMX value range so if the DMX value range was 0 gt 255 then the real world value of Orpm would be equal to a DMX value of 128 positive rpm values would map to higher DMX values and negative rpm values would map to lower DMX values Decimals may also be used with some Real World values 22 5 gt 99 7rpm In the case of features defined as slots gobos or colours an additional popup box will become available when the Real World cell is selected This dialog box will allow you to select a name for the gobo or colour from a predefined list of names Slot entries will appear on the slot toolbar during programming Additionally you can define an offset for the slot name in the field at the bottom of the dialog This offset defines the range used by the function when dialling values on the encoder wheel Leaving this field blank will result in the default 0 being used Additional function feature selections may result in various Real World value selections via a dialog box For instance a strobe function and shutter feature will allow a Real World value entry of either open or closed 31 2 Fixture Builder Tutorial This tutorial takes you through the process of building a c
429. tte tenet nen es 312 30 2 2 Configuring the Network Connection c eee 312 30 2 3 Configuring the ESP Vision Universes ceeee 313 30 2 4 Using the Connectivity with ESP VISION eee 314 30 3 Connecting to WYSIWYG o iene 314 30 3 1 Configuring the Network Connection c eee 314 30 3 2 Configuring WYSIWYG 00 ieeiies 315 30 3 3 Additional Steps for WYSIWYG Console Edition 317 30 3 4 Using the Connectivity with WYSIWYG ccce 317 30 4 TTOUDIESHOOTING cisssstidesgsiereeisas aena ree th aaeeed bei vncetan 318 Flying Pig Systems xi Wholehog III 30 5 Visualiser SUpport CONTACTS 0 centre ne eens 319 31 The Fixture Builder acces ic coves esii iaeo ateni a o EE iaei 321 31 1 Working With the Fixture Builder ccccrcccrcccrcrca 321 31 1 1 Adding User Created Libraries to a Show scc 321 31 1 2 Creating Editing and Deleting Fixture Libraries 322 31 1 3 Building the Fixture eerie renee nent 324 31 2 Fixture Builder Tutoridl ccc eerie ees 327 31 2 1 Step 1 Create the New Fixture ccccceceseeeeeeeeeeees 328 31 2 2 Step 2 Enter Fixture Details i e 328 31 2 3 Step 3 Configure Channel Functions and Fea TUOS paien anani a AENEA conic ie EN RETTEN 330 31 2 4 Step 4 Build the FIXTUre ssssssisersrrrrrrrirrrrrsrrrererrre 335 31 2 5 Step 5 Add the Fixture in the Fixture Schedule 336 31 2 6 Step 6 Edit Fixture to Define Default Values 336 31 2 7 Ste
430. ty of tasks when a cue runs Macros are simple text instructions placed in the cue s Macro cell 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window 2 Select the Macro cell for the desired cue and press Set 3 Type in the Macro command then press Enter For a full description of the available macro commands see Automating the Console Using Macros p 303 Tip You can display a list of available commands on the console by selecting the Macro cell in the Cuelist window and pressing the Set key Flying Pig Systems Section 25 Scene Playback To play back a scene it needs to be attached to a Master Masters can be either Physical using the faders and controls on the front panel of the console or Virtual using on screen master controls 25 1 25 1 1 Playback Attached to a Physical Master The Wholehog II console has ten physical masters that scenes can be attached to for playback You can also move scenes between masters or copy them so that you create a copy of the scene on a new master By attaching playback or expansion wings you can add more physical masters to a Wholehog III system Attaching a Scene to a Master To attach a scene to a master e Scene 1 Move Choose Alternatively you can select the scene from the Scene Directory e Scene 1 Move Choose The name of the scene and the fader level is shown on the Playback Bar immediately above the master 4 Scene 4 Scene 4 2s Moving and Copying Scenes betw
431. u can connect the console to an existing ethernet network if desired Contact the ad ministrator of the network to obtain the correct network settings Important You should disable the DHCP server of the console before connecting to an existing computer network otherwise it may interfere with the correct oper ation of the network Flying Pig Systems 75 Reference Section 12 Setting Up the System 12 3 12 3 1 76 Working with Network Processors There are two types of network processor the DMX Processor provides four DMX outputs while the MIDI Timecode Processor provides timecode inputs and outputs see Working with Audio MIDI and Timecode p 291 A network processor needs mains power at any voltage between 100 and 240V AC You can control the network processor s functions either directly from its front panel or remotely from a console 1 Setup Network open the Network window 2 In the Network window you can assign the Network Number for any network processor connected to the network 3 To set other functions select the network processor in the left hand column and click on the Settings button W Network Port 6600 5 x Network Components Show Notes _ Back User SW Version IP Address v1 3 7 beta b 648 00 11 11 01 59 ae 10 0 0 3 1336 Yes No Yes Runnin Server Off v1 3 7 beta b 648 00 11 11 01 59 ae 10 0 0 3 1781 v1 3 7 beta b 648 00 11 11 01 59 ae 10 0 0 3 1784 __
432. um length of any segment of ethernet cable between any two pieces of equipment is 100 meters 328 feet Please consult the Wholehog Ill Ethernet System Design Guide available at www flyingpig com for addi tional information More than One DMX Processor on the Network If you have more than one DMX Processor on the network each one needs to have its own Net Number and IP address To assign the Net Number on the DMX Processor see Checking and Setting the Net Number p 77 By default DMX Processors are set to get their IP address from a DHCP server usually the Wholehog III console so you don t have to do anything To give a DMX Processor a static IP address see Checking and Setting the IP Addresses p 77 More than One Console on the Network If you want to use more than one console on the same network it is important to give each an unique identifying number The Console Number can be assigned when starting up via the Settings option on the Wholehog III Start screen You also need give the consoles different IP addresses 1 Setup Control Pnl gt Network open the network pane of the Control Panel see Figure 12 7 The Network pane of the Control Panel 2 Select Use Custom IP Settings 3 Enter anew IP address The default IP address for a console is 172 31 0 1 so you could increment the number for additional consoles by one 172 31 0 2 172 31 0 3 and so on Important You could set the second console to get
433. urn to the Network Configuration screen OK return to the Main screen Main Control Panel navigate to the Control Panel P NAT RF WN Hard Reset the DMX Processor needs a hard reset for changes to take effect Setting the Port Number To assign the Port Number 1 Main Network navigate to the Network Configuration screen 2 Assign the Port Number as required 3 OK return to the Main screen Options and Defaults The DMX Processor has various options and controls assigned in the Control Panel screen e Main gt Control Panel You can revert all settings to their default values by selecting Set to Defaults Tip The Locked Status Pin Number Backlight Off Time and Watchdog settings described below are all held by the DMX Processor not by the show Changing show will have no effect on these settings Locking the DMX Processor Controls You can use the Lock function to lock the DMX Processor s controls The default PIN is 1234 a new PIN can be assigned on the Wholehog III via Setup gt Network on the Setup Toolbar Select the required DMX Processor in the network window and click Settings Change PIN and OK to apply and close the window To lock the DMX Processor locally e In the Control Panel select Lock the Enter PIN to Unlock screen will appear Flying Pig Systems Section 12 Setting Up the System Reference 12 3 4 12 3 5 To unlock the DMX Processor locally e Enter your
434. us of shared para meter values when multiple cuelists are running simultaneously see Figure 24 6 The Output Window To open the Output window e Press and hold the Open key then select Output from the Main Toolbar e Select Output from the View Toolbar at the top of the left hand touch screen Desk Studio Studio Technobeam Petes Effects Soucas Peo Compact S a a Channel Color 575 Spot 575 Iris J Minn Colour 1 15 x Shak Za a Figure 24 6 The Output Window The Output window by default displays raw parameter values you can configure it via buttons at the top of the window to display output information in the following ways e Values displays the raw parameter values e Effects displays the base value before the effect is applied along with a percentage indication of the effect cycle e Sources displays the source that currently has control of a parameter for example the Programmer or a cuelist and cue number e Show Palettes as with sources displays the palette that is supplying the parameter value e Compact Compacts the display of information in the window see Compact Mode p 91 Flying Pig Systems 259 Reference Section 24 Cuelist Playback 24 4 4 The Levels View Window The Levels View window displays the output value of all intensities controlled by the Wholehog III from all cuelists virtual cuelists scenes the Programmer and other editors an
435. ustom fixture library for a fictitious fixture Follow the steps to create a custom fixture library Flying Pig Systems 327 Appendices Section 31 The Fixture Builder Fictitious 575 Protocol Ch Purpose Intensity Pan Coarse Pan Fine Tilt Coarse Tilt Fine Cyan Magenta Yellow Gobo OMAN OO KR WN 10 Shutter Value Oto 255 O to 255 O to 255 Oto 255 O to 255 Oto 255 Oto 255 Oto 255 0 20 30 31 40 41 50 51 60 100 150 151 200 201 255 0 1 127 128 200 201 210 221 230 231 240 241 250 255 Description O is out 255 is full 540 degree pan 270 degree tilt O is full 255 is out O is full 255 is out O is full 255 is out Open Gobo 1 breakup Gobo 2 bubbles Gobo 3 cone Gobo 4 radial Gobo wheel spin fwd slow to fast Gobo wheel spin rev slow to fast Random gobo slow to fast Closed Linear Strobe slow to fast Random Strobe fast to slow Reset Fixture Strike Lamp Shutdown fixture Douse Lamp Open 31 2 1 Step 1 Create the New Fixture To create the new fixture Setup Patch open the Fixture window Press the Fixture Builder button 1 2 3 Click OK on the warning dialog 4 Press the Create New button The Create New Custom Type window will open 31 2 2 Step 2 Enter Fixture Details Enter the Model Name Author and Notes by clicking in each cell and pressing Set 1 Name the model Tutorial 328 Flying Pig Systems Section 31 The Fixtur
436. uto Launch window Click Launch Now to ignore the remaining delay and launch the show immediately Click Cancel to return to the Start window If you specified a delay of 0 seconds the delay window will not be displayed The following show will automatically launch in 54s as Big Show Hog3 Show v3 0 47 i X Cancel Load Now Figure 13 17 The Auto Launch window 13 7 3 Launch Macros You can assign a macro that is executed once the show has been launched You can use this to automate a variety of tasks such as recalling a view changing pages starting cuelist playback on masters and so on The launch macro is assigned in the Misc pane of the User Preferences window e Setup Preferences Misc Use with care Startup Macro Startup Macro y Grand Master Options Gf DBO on Flash For details of the macro syntax see Automating the Console Using Macros p 303 Flying Pig Systems 105 Reference 13 7 4 Section 13 Using the Console Restarting and Shutting Down To shut down select Setup Quit The Quit button is on the right hand end of the Setup Toolbar The Shut Down dialog will open see Figure 13 18 The Shut Down Dialog with the following options e Shut Down shutting down will turn the Wholehog III off completely e Restart Console restarting is like shutting the console down and turning it on again and will take you to the Start window e Log Off l
437. utomatically detected by the console and should be calibrated in the same way as the console s built in touch screens see Calibration p 64 If you have two external touch screens the pointer may initially appear on the other screen to the one you have pressed If this happens press the Control key during calibration to swap the touch screens Desk Lights You can adjust the brightness of the desk lights by holding down the Setup key and adjusting the third parameter wheel You can also use the fourth right hand parameter wheel to adjust the brightness of the LEDs in the keys on the front panel By default the desk lights are white while the console is being used and turn blue after a period of inactivity the period is determined by the Backlight Off Time p 65 If you prefer the desklights always to be blue you can select Use Blue Desklights in the Appear ance pane of the User Preferences window Trackball and Wheels The Wholehog III has a number of controls that allow continuous input of data rather than discrete values the Trackball the Wheel the Rate Wheel and the four Parameter Wheels The Trackball has two modes Pointer Mode controls the on screen pointer like a mouse on a personal computer e Position Mode controls the position pan and tilt of fixtures The Trackball lights up blue in this mode You can switch between the two modes by pressing the top right Trackball key You can also lock the Trackball
438. uts Tip You can have multiple timecodes running over the network at once How ever MIDI Timecode Processors can only have one active timecode source at a time Connecting a Timecode Input Connecting To a MIDI Timecode Processor To connect a timecode source to a MIDI Timecode Processor 1 Connect the MIDI Timecode Processor to the network You will need to use an ethernet switch see Setting Up the Network p 72 2 Connect the timecode source to the MIDI Timecode Processor s MIDI LIC or VITC input as appropriate Setup Network open the Network window Select the MIDI Timecode Processor in the list Settings open the Settings window Dy OH ies OW In the Timecode pane select the input source and any required options see Timecode Input Options p 298 Flying Pig Systems Section 28 Working with Audio MIDI and Timecode Reference E Console Settings 2 x A Timecode Midi input Active port None z Regenerate frames 20 vA Regenerate forever Jump after frames 20 Simulate Jump 1 00 00 00 00 Simulate format SMPTE 30 Y Jump 2 00 00 00 00 Jump 3 00 00 00 00 Update Modity Defaut Modity Al ake Apply A ok XK ares Figure 28 4 The Timecode pane of the Console Settings window Connecting To a Console To connect a timecode source to the console 1 Gs e e Flying Pig Systems If you are using MIDI Timecode connect the
439. value or range defined by a fixture s DMX protocol will result in an additional DMX entry for the same DMX channel Use the New DMX Entry button to add additional blank rows for the currently selected DMX channel and the Delete DMX Entry button to remove unwanted rows 16 bit DMX functionality can be defined by combining two DMX channels with the same function and feature Select a DMX channel cell press Set and type in the two DMX channels to be combined separated by from the console keypad For example Flying Pig Systems 325 Appendices Section 31 The Fixture Builder to combine DMX channels 3 and 4 to create 16 bit DMX functionality enter 3 4 in the Channel cell for channels 3 and 4 Combined channels do not need to be sequential for example 3 8 is valid Function This cell represents the function or parameter used to access this channel A function is defined as the parameter name displayed when programming the fixture Examples of functions include intensity pan tilt gobo cyan etc Functions are selected from a dialog box that is sorted by the following Kind categories Unused Intensity Position Colour Beam and Control Most functions also have a sub category called feature Feature A feature is defined as a sub classification of a function For example a gobo function can have slots spins and random features All features within a function are mutually exclusive In other words each feature is a unique behav
440. ve applied an effect to a parameter it will appear in the Value view of the Programmer or editor with the effects symbol next to the value Flying Pig Systems 235 Reference 23 3 3 Section 23 Working with Effects T Cran vave Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Show f Show Fade A Ie t j Palettes Changes Bonnis E Eol Position Colour Mixing Tip When assigning effect parameters such as Offset remember that values 0 and 360 Degrees are the same Fanning a range of fixtures from 0 through to 360 degrees of offset will mean that the first and last fixtures will share the same offset value Tracking Effects By default effects values track through to subsequent cues until a new value for the particular parameter is reached You can turn effects on and off set them to track through in the Table column of the Effects Engine Programmer or editor In the Programmer for example 1 Select Table view 2 Select the cell of the parameter for which you want to turn the effect off or allow to track through and press Set 3 Select Off or Track from the drop down menu 23 4 236 Cue Timing and Effects When you record a cue scene or palette that includes effects values each fixture para meter has its fade delay and path value in the usual way see Individual Parameter Timings p 210 These timings control how the fixture parameter changes from its starting value to its unde
441. window see Figure 13 8 The Jump Toolbar This has a button for each aggregation section clicking a button will scroll the list to bring the section into view CE ioxi vae Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Erit Show Fade GE O Technobeam Studio Studio Desk Palettes z Iris ea 575 Color 575 Channel Num Note Time Length a MEE 21 100 Figure 13 8 The Jump Toolbar To enable the jump toolbar 1 Press 7 to open the Configuration window 2 Select Enable Jump Toolbar 3 Click on Apply Tip The jump toolbar is turned on by default in all editors such as the Program mer Cut Copy and Paste You can copy and paste the contents of selected cells e Right click and select Copy or Paste from the contextual menu e Pig Copy copy e Pig Record paste 13 4 94 Working with Directories Directory windows give you quick access to groups palettes scenes cuelists and so on and they all work in essentially the same way Flying Pig Systems Section 13 Using the Console Reference Colour Directory i lol x Figure 13 9 A Typical Directory Figure 13 9 A Typical Directory shows a typical directory The main part of the window is filled with large buttons used to access the group palette scene cuelist or page as well as displaying their names and some other key information Display AppliesTo Description
442. x Enable Follow Follow Insert View Timecode Cue Chosen _ Link CATE Timecode s k Dela Q Figure 21 2 The Cuelist window 21 1 Creating Cuelists Cuelists are created automatically when you record a cue to an empty location in the Cuelist Directory or to a master that has no cuelist attached to it See Recording a Cue p 191 21 2 Naming Cuelists You can name cuelists 1 Open List open the Cuelist Directory 2 Check that the Guard button is selected so that you don t accidentally activate a cuelist when pressing its button in the directory Select the cuelist 4 Set name Enter type in the name Tip You can rename a cuelist when it is attached to a master by pressing Set Choose 21 3 Deleting Cuelists To delete a cuelist 1 List 1 Delete deletes cuelist 1 2 Click OK to confirm the delete 222 Flying Pig Systems Section 21 Working with Cuelists Reference Or from the cuelist directory 1 Open List open cuelist directory 2 Check that the Guard button is selected so that you don t accidentally activate a cuelist when pressing its button in the directory 3 Delete Cuelist 1 delete the cuelist You will be asked to confirm the action Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirmation by going to Setup Preferences Programming and selecting Con
443. xture window Adding a Fixture to the Show You add fixtures using the Fixture Schedule dialog within the Fixture window see Fig ure 14 2 The Fixture Schedule window The Number column shows the number of fixtures of that type currently in the show Any mode options are shown when you select the fixture type To add a fixture 1 Setup Patch gt Fixture open the Fixture window 2 Press the Fixture Schedule button in the top left hand corner of the Fix ture window The Fixture Schedule window will open with a list of fixture personalities in the current Fixture Library see Figure 14 2 The Fixture Schedule window Each fixture is listed under its manufacturer Flying Pig Systems 117 Reference 14 1 2 118 Section 14 Adding and Configuring Fixtures while Desk Channels conventional intensity only fixtures such as parcans and Scroller Dimmers are listed under Generic Use the four Cursor keys below the Trackball to navigate to the fixture type that you want to add The Up and Down keys scroll through the list while the Left and Right keys open and close sub lists Set number of fixtures required Enter assign the quantity of that fixture type in the show Repeat for all fixture types required You can add more later When you have finished select OK W Fixture Schedule 2 x Specify how many fixtures of each type you wish to use Select a type and press Set Name Mode J Nu
444. y Playback Priority q 0 gt 3 Set 50 Enter change the priority to 50 Alternatively you can assign the Playback Priority for all new scenes in the Scene pane of the Preferences window e Setup Preferences Scene Persist on Override The Wholehog III automatically releases scenes when all of their parameter contents have been overridden by other scenes or cuelists However sometimes it is useful to return to a scene s look when overriding cuelists or scenes have been released in this case you can use Persist on Override When this option is activated the overridden scene will not automatically release and will remain active when the overriding scene or cuelist is later released To turn Persist on Override on for a scene 1 Open Choose Options gt Scene 2 Select Persist on Override yA Persist On Override Alternatively you can assign Persist on Override for all new scenes in the Scene pane of the Preferences window e Setup Preferences Scene Flying Pig Systems 271 Reference 25 2 4 Section 25 Scene Playback Multiple Scenes with Effects If a scene has parameters that are running an effect when another cuelist or scene changes the underlying values of those parameters the effect continues to run Use Pile Add FX to allow the cuelist or scene to override the effect as well as the underlying values For example to allow the scene on Master 10 override effects running on Mast
445. y the same amount For example if fixture 1 is at 10 2 at 50 and the wheel is increased by 10 then fixture will move to 11 and 2 will move to 55 Moving the parameter wheel with Pig allows fine adjust ment of the parameter so that each turn of the wheel will change the parameter value by a smaller amount making exact adjustments easier Flying Pig Systems Section 34 Upgrading and Care of the Console 34 1 Updating Software 34 1 1 Updating the Console Software To install a software upgrade from a CD ROM 1 2 Restart the console When the Start window appears press the Software button located on the bottom of the right hand screen Open the leather arm rest at the front of the console Insert the CD ROM into the drive below Choose CD ROM from the displayed list Select the software version to confirm the upgrade The console will continue with the upgrade without further interaction Note that this may take several minutes After it finishes the upgrade the console will restart To upgrade software from an fpspkg file downloaded from the Flying Pig Systems website www flyingpig com 1 2s 3 Check that the file has a name like gut_x x x _ Build xx fpspke Copy the file to a CD ROM or Zip disk Continue as above selecting CD ROM or Zip as the source of the up grade file as appropriate 34 1 2 Clean Install You may occasionally need to do a clean install of the software
446. y want some of the data from that object There are two types of mask a fixture mask specifies only data for certain fixtures for example Cyberlight 1 a kind mask specifies only data for certain kinds for example Colour Beam If no Flying Pig Systems Section 13 Using the Console Reference mask is specified then the default mask for the command and destination is used this will often be the entire object e Command The Command is the operation you want to perform Com mands include Copy Record Delete Move Merge Knockout Some of these only need a source to be specified others only need a destination but they all have the same syntactical form e Options The behaviour of some commands for example Record can be altered with options These usually appear on a popup toolbar once the command key is pressed Destination The destination is the object that will be affected by the command Again it might be a palette cue scene or the editable editor If the destination already exists and the action to take is unclear then you will be asked what the console should do Some examples of the command line syntax are shown below Note that the final press of the Enter key required to tell the console to implement the command has been omitted for clarity Source Mask Command Options Destination Comments Record Position1 Records a position palette to location 1 in the position palette directory No source is given
447. y want to return control of desk channel 3 to Cuelist 1 without having to run a cue in Cuelist 1 this is known as asserting Cuelist 1 Asserting a cuelist forces all fixture parameters to their programmed value in the cuelist To assert parameters on the cuelist attached to Master 3 for example press and hold the Assert key and press the Choose key for Master 3 The Assert Time When you assert a cuelist the parameters that have been asserted change to their new values over the assert time The default is 2 seconds but you can assign your preferred assert time for each cuelist 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select the Assert Time cell Detault heiease ime i Assert Time 2s Q Default ack Time 12 Detaut B 3 Set 5 Enter change the assert time to 5 seconds Alternatively you can assign the Assert Time for all new cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the Preferences window e Setup Preferences Cuelist Tip If you have assigned an assert time to a cuelist and you want to revert to the default assert time press the Default button adjacent to the Assert Time cell Changing a Cuelist s Priority Under the LTP rule the most recent action determines the value of a fixture parameter see Running Multiple Cuelists p 250 However you can override this precedence by as signing cuelists different priorities so that cuelists with a higher priority take precedence over those with a lower
448. yan Magenta and Yellow function properly in respect to the DMX values being inverted from the Real World value The Gobo slots appear on the Slot toolbar The Gobo Spin and Random functions appear on the Gobo encoder wheel The various types of parameters that are controlling channel 10 shutter strobe fixture control and lamp control Notice how each appears as unique functions although they all output on the same DMX channel 337 Section 32 Keyboard Mappings You can use an external keyboard to operate many of the Wholehog III s functions This is especially useful if you are using the Rack Mount Unit version of the console The following tables show how keys map to Wholehog III functions using the various modifier keys With no modifiers Ctrl Pig Esc Open Insert Set With Alt Fl Intensity L Control F2 Position E Set F3 Colour H Highlight F4 Beam Blind F5 Effects Q Clear F6 Macro N ext F7 Group B Back F8 Fixture G ain Go F9 Scene P ain Pause F10 Cue F Skip Fwd F11 List K Skip Back F12 Page J Goto R Record Z Release M Merge A Assert O Move X Next Page C Copy D Delete Full U Update z Thru V Live _ Minus T Time Plus S Setup 1 gt Point 1 0 Choose Master 1 10 Flying Pig Systems 339 Appendices 340 Section 32 Keyboard Mappings With Open Esc Fl Intensity Directory F8 Fixture window F2 Position D
449. yboard attached to the console you can press H to jump to High End and so on To add the Desk Channels 1 Scroll to the Generic list and toggle open 2 Select Desk Channel Press Set type 16 and Enter 3 When you have finished select OK to apply and close the window Tip Desk channels are conventional intensity only fixtures such as parcans 7 2 Patching the Fixtures You now need to assign a DMX address to each fixture that you entered into the schedule The following patch uses the same DMX addresses as the visualiser tutorial show files obtainable from the Flying Pig Systems website All the fixtures in the tutorial rig can be connected to a single DMX universe To patch fixtures make sure that the Fixture window is open Setup Patch First patch the Studio Color 575s 1 Fixture Studio Color 575 1 Thru 10 select the fixtures to patch The Fixture key is on the console and the fixture types are on the Fixture Types Toolbar on the right hand touch screen 2 Patch the Fixture Patch window will open The Patch button is at the top of the Fixture window 3 Inthe Fixture Patch window check that DMX Processor 1 is highlighted and its first Universe is selected Figure 7 1 The Fixture Patch Window 36 Flying Pig Systems Section 7 Setting Up the Show Tutorial W Fixture Patch i 2 x Number J IntUse Found Patch points Fixture Y lt Add DP Press Set to enter Number gt Omi Dmx
450. ying Pig Systems Section 27 Working with Playback Controls 27 1 27 1 1 27 1 2 Grand Master The Grand Master inhibits the intensities of all fixtures on the console including those within the Programmer with the exception of those that are parked By default it resides on Master 1 on each page of masters but you can load a cuelist scene or inhibitive master onto Master 1 in the same way as with any master see Working with Pages p 277 The Flash key below the Grand Master fader acts as a non latching blackout key Pressing it will temporarily reduce all fixture intensities in the output to 0 with the exception of any intensity parameters that have been parked see Parking p 187 When you release the key fixture intensities are restored to their normal values You can also control the Grand Master using the GM key Hold down the GM key and turn the first parameter wheel or the I Wheel This allows you to access the Grand Master quickly when a normal master on the current page is obscuring it The GM key LED shows the state of the Grand Master e Off Grand Master is at 100 e On Grand Master is at 0 e Slow flashing Grand Master is between 0 and 100 Matching the Grand Master Level If you use the GM key to change the Grand Master level it is possible for the position of the physical fader to be different to the Grand Master level If this happens the Grand Master level will be shown on the Playback Bar in b
451. you select the first Studio Spot and make red then select the first Studio Color and make red with different parameter values and record this as palette it will by default be by fixture and work only for those two fixtures However if you select Per Fixture Type when recording then the palette will work for all Studio Spots and all Studio Colors assigning them the same values as was used to create the palette Recording with Specified Masking The Wholehog III records palettes through layers of masking the mask determines which parameter types of the selected fixtures are included in the palette By default palettes record just intensity position colour or beam information according to the Flying Pig Systems Section 17 Working with Palettes Reference palette type that is they mask out all other parameter types You can remove masks to record more than one parameter type ina palette for example combining colour and beam information into one palette The Palette Directory will display the parameter types included in each palette indicated by I for intensity P for position C for colour and B for beam see Figure 17 8 Example of Palettes containing different parameter types W Colour Directory IC Palette with only Colour parameters Palette with only Position parameters Palette with Intensity Position Colour and Beam parameters Figure 17 8 Example of Palettes containing different parameter types M
452. z von h chstens 20 A angeschlossen werden 38 3 2 Warnung Zum Schutz Gegen Gef hrliche K rperstr 6me 1 Wenn dieses Ger t ohne einen Netzkabelstecker erhalten wurde ist der entsprechende Netzkabelstecker entsprechend dem folgenden Code anzubringen e Braun Unter Spannung stehend e Blau Neutral 360 Flying Pig Systems Section 38 Safety Information Appendices e Griin Gelb Erde 2 Da die Farben der Leitungen im Hauptanschluss m glicherweise nicht mit den farbigen Markierungen die die Anschlussklemmen identifiz ieren tibereinstimmen fahren sie wie folgt fort e Die Gr n und Gelb gef rbte Leitung muss im Stecker mit der mit dem Buchstaben E oder dem Erde Symbol markierten oder der Griin und Gelb gef rbten An schlussklemme verbunden werden e Die blau gef rbte Leitung muss mit der mit dem Buchstaben N oder der Schwarz gef rbten Anschlussk lemme verbunden werden e Die Braun gef rbte Leitgun muss mit der mit dem Buchstaben L markierten oder rot gef rbten Anschlussk lemme verbunden werden 3 Dieses Ger t geh rt zur Klasse I Dieses Ger t mu geerdet werden 4 Diese Ger te sind nur zum Einbau in trockenen Lagen bestimmt und m ssen vor Regen und Feuchtigkeit gesch tzt werden 5 Vor Wartungsarbeiten stets den Netzstecker ziehen 6 Servicearbeiten sollten nur von Fachpersonal ausgef hrt werden Das Ger t enth lt keine wartungsbediirftigen Teile 38 4 Informaci n Importante De Seguridad 3
453. zione 3 Questa apparecchiatura e da usarsi in ambienti secchi Non e da essere esposta ne alla pioggia ne all umidita 4 Per qualsiasi riparazione rivolgersi al personale specializzato L utente non deve riparare nessuna parte dentro l unita 5 Aparecchio di Classe I Questa apparecchiatura deve essere messa a terra 38 6 Vigtig Sikkerhedsinformation Advarsel Beskyttelse mod elektrisk chock 362 Flying Pig Systems Section 38 Safety Information Appendices VIGTIGT LEDEREN MED GUL GROEN ISOLATION MAA KUN TILSLUTTES KLEMME MAERKET ELLER 38 7 REIL Otek 38 7 1 Digt E KD D OFTHE REO Al lt ORE I SAKARAORRO AORA 20 A Oia A re se HOTWET 38 7 2 2S REIS SRR CREO Alo 1 Flying Pig Systems FIFOWMWTWBLYIRECCOBBEZIMOKGSRIZL UFO I FRISCLEMDC BIC FSFEMVUMITTHKSL e Brown 4 Live 34 7 e Blue 4 Neutral a kFIbL e Green Yellow Hf Earth 7 2 CO CHHASHCWSSHMRICAT 6EMHEEOHD TUOD TIT DROE EH LTWRUGRAMHVEST MUFI LIED o CHER LTF e Green Yellow 4 D7 TDILE JI F OS RAILEBL lt MEK P AZOV URI ORHOHSD ITs SD Green Yellow k OWK LTF e Blue ODY TIE JI ZNOMARIN ARS ntl lt k gT ADNET RLT e Brown Kf OF TFIVE JIFZNmMRI LAK ECS MEMEL ld HICBONEMICKGML TRS bs COIS Class I TC COACOHBLPT ALATHILE YEA ORBILEIS LIKE COMEAHRET CORBEMRSaR IFS HSEWCKSEL SERRE THAIS SAMICBRe DY BELT RSL RRRA LARA OLRMOAOMTCT A Y Ic ko

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Cisco Systems SFS 7008 Server User Manual  User Manual - Galco Industrial Electronics  Press Release - ドットコム総合案内  INVITATION:Mise en page 1  Thomson 46FU5554 46" Full HD Black LED TV  Sony DSC-T99/G Instruction Manual  データシート  Ovation F-95WW User Manual Rev. 5  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file